B8 Superb OwnersManual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 247

Your Owner’s Manual

Electronic version available on the Internet


http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals

OWNER´S MANUAL
ŠKODA SUPERB

ŠKODA SUPERB 07.2019


Angličtina/English

3V0012720AK
Documentation of vehicle delivery
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Date of vehicle delivery ____ / ____ / ________

ŠKODA Partner

Stamp and signature of the vendor

I confirm that I have taken delivery of the vehicle in good condition, have received information on how to
operate it correctly, and have had the terms of the warranty explained to me.

Signature of the customer


Does the vehicle have an extended warranty?
YES
NO
Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warrantya)
Years: _______________
or
km/mileage: _______________
or
Miles: _______________

a) Depending on which comes first.

Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in part, is not permitted without the
written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
3V0012720AK © ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2019
Vehicle owner 1

Vehicle owner
First Vehicle owner Second Vehicle owner
This vehicle with the registration plate This vehicle with the registration plate

__________________________________________ __________________________________________
belongs to: belongs to:
Title, name/company: Title, name/company:

__________________________________________ __________________________________________

__________________________________________ __________________________________________
Address: Address:

__________________________________________ __________________________________________

__________________________________________ __________________________________________

__________________________________________ __________________________________________
Telephone: Telephone:

__________________________________________ __________________________________________

ŠKODA Partner: ŠKODA Partner:

Service consultant: Service consultant:

__________________________________________ __________________________________________
Telephone: Telephone:

__________________________________________ __________________________________________

3V0012720AK
2 Table of Contents

Table of Contents 32 Seats, steering wheel and mirror


32 Front seat - with manual operation
1 Vehicle owner 32 Front seat - with electrical operation
33 Memory function of the seat
5 About the Owner's Manual 33 Massage function in the driver's seat
34 Rear seats
5 About the Owner's Manual
34 Headrests
6 Explanations 35 Front armrest
35 Rear armrest
7 Vehicle overviews 35 Load-through device
7 Front vehicle area 35 Seat heating and ventilation
8 Rear vehicle area 36 Steering wheel
9 Driver's seat 37 Heated steering wheel
9 Centre console and passenger seat 37 Interior rear-view mirror
10 Engine compartment 37 Exterior mirror
10 Indicator lights 39 Restraint systems and airbags
10 Functionality 39 Seat belts
10 Indicator light overview 40 Child seat
41 Fasteners for child seats
14 Correct and safe 43 Airbags
14 Introductory notes for correct use 44 Key switch for the front passenger airbag
14 New vehicle or new parts
14 Regular checks 45 Lighting, windscreen wipers and
14 No improper vehicle adjustments washers
14 Keeping sensors and cameras in working 45 Exterior lighting
order 47 COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME exterior
15 Engine compartment lighting
15 Vehicle battery 47 Light Assist high-beam assist system
15 Using electrical sockets in the vehicle 48 Dynamic Light Assist headlight assist system
15 Before your journey 48 Replace light bulbs
17 Safe driving 50 Interior lighting
18 Emergency call 50 Interior ambient light
19 After an accident 50 Windscreen wipers and washers
20 Keys, locks and alarm system 52 Heating and air conditioning system
20 Key 52 Manual air conditioning
21 Memory function of the key 53 Climatronic automatic air conditioning system
21 Central locking 54 Auxiliary heating and ventilation
23 Keyless locking (KESSY)
23 Alarm system 56 Driver information system
56 Analogue instrument panel
25 Doors, windows and boot lid 57 Digital instrument cluster
25 Doors 58 Instrument cluster display
25 Child safety lock on the rear doors 59 Driving data
25 Window - with electrical operation 60 Speed limit warning
27 Sliding/tilting roof 60 Vehicle condition
28 Sunblind - with manual operation 61 Stopwatch in the Infotainment
28 Sunblind - with electrical operation 61 Information Sport
28 Sunblind for the rear window 61 Personalisation
28 Sun protection roller blinds for the rear door
panes 62 Infotainment Swing
28 Sun visors 62 Infotainment overview
28 Heated windscreen 62 System
29 Boot lid - with manual operation 63 Screen
29 Boot lid - with electrical control 64 Infotainment keyboard
30 Electrically operated contactless boot lid 65 Radio
31 Unlocking the boot lid 67 Media
70 Mobile device management
71 Telephone
Table of Contents 3

73 SmartLink 163 Economical driving style


75 ŠKODA Connect online services 164 Towing a trailer
165 Towing eye and towing procedure
77 Infotainment Bolero 166 Brakes
77 Infotainment overview 166 Electric parking brake
77 System 167 Auto Hold automatic holding function
79 Screen
79 Infotainment keyboard 168 Driver assist systems
80 Voice control 168 Braking and stabilising systems
81 Radio 169 Front Assist
84 Media 170 Pedestrian detection system
87 Images 170 Speed limiter
89 Mobile device management 171 Cruise control system
90 Telephone 172 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
92 SmartLink 174 Lane Assist
94 ŠKODA Connect online services 175 Traffic jam assistant
175 Lane change assist system Side Assist
97 Infotainment Amundsen 176 Traffic sign recognition
97 Infotainment overview 177 Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant
97 System protection
98 Screen 178 Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant
99 Infotainment keyboard 178 Emergency situation assist systemEmergency
100 Voice control Assist
101 Radio 178 Hill descent assistant
104 Media
107 Images 179 Park Assist systems
108 Media Command 179 Park Pilot parking aid
110 Mobile device management 180 Rear view camera
111 Telephone 182 Rear Traffic Alert
113 Wi-Fi 182 Park steering assistant
114 Data connection
115 SmartLink 184 Engine, exhaust system and fuel
117 ŠKODA Connect online services 184 Bonnet
119 Navigation 184 Engine oil
185 Coolant
125 Infotainment Columbus 186 Engine electronics
125 Infotainment overview 186 Particle filter
125 System 186 Exhaust control system
127 Screen 187 Fuel filter
128 Keypad 187 Fuel filler flap
129 Voice control 187 AdBlue
130 Radio 188 Petrol
132 Media 189 Diesel
137 Images
138 Video DVD 190 Vehicle battery and fuses
140 Media Command 190 Vehicle battery
141 Mobile device management 191 Using the jump-starting cable
144 Telephone 192 Fuses
147 Wi-Fi 192 Fuses in the dash panel
148 Data connection 194 Fuses in the engine compartment
148 SmartLink 195 Wheels
151 ŠKODA Connect online services 195 Tyres and rims
153 Navigation 196 All-season or winter tires
159 Starting and driving 196 Snow chains
159 Start at the push of a button 196 SEAL tyres
159 Starting issues 197 Spare and emergency spare wheel
159 START STOP 197 Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle
160 Automatic gearbox 198 Breakdown kit
162 Vehicle driving mode 200 Tyre pressure
4 Table of Contents

200 Tyre pressure monitoring system


201 Tyre pressure monitoring system
202 Wheel bolt cover caps
202 Full wheel frame

202 Storage space and interior equipment


202 Equipment in the boot
202 Emergency equipment
203 Fasteners in the boot
204 Fastening nets
204 Multifunctional pocket
205 Net partition
205 Double-sided floor covering
205 Flooring in the luggage compartment
206 Removable light
206 Rigid boot cover
207 Roll-up luggage compartment cover
208 Variable loading floor in the boot
209 Through-loading bag
209 Overview of passenger compartment
210 Storage compartment under the front seat
211 Storage compartment for an umbrella
211 Phonebox
211 Cup holder
212 Waste container
212 Ashtray and cigarette lighter
212 Ceiling
212 Display in rear centre console
213 Tablet holder
214 Storage compartment for the tablet
214 12-Volt power socket
214 230-Volt power socket

215 Roof rack and hitch


215 Roof rack
215 Swivelling hitch

217 Maintaining and cleaning


217 Service events
217 Service work, adjustments and technical
changes
218 Interior
218 Exterior

220 Technical data and specifications


220 Requirements for the technical data
220 Vehicle identification data
221 Maximum permissible weights
221 Operating weight
222 Vehicle dimensions
222 Engine specifications
225 Event Data Recorder
226 Information about the radio systems in the
vehicle
226 Rights arising from defective performance,
ŠKODA Warranty for new cars, ŠKODA
Mobility Warranty and Optional ŠKODA
Extended Warranty

228 Index
About the Owner's Manual 5

About the Owner's Manual About the Owner's Manual


General General
This Owner's Manual applies to all chassis variants This Owner's Manual applies to all chassis variants
of the vehicle, including all models and trim levels. of the vehicle, including all models and trim levels.
All possible trim levels are described here without All possible trim levels are described here without
identifying them as special trims, model variants or identifying them as special trims, model variants or
market-dependent equipment. This means that not market-dependent equipment. This means that not
all the trim components described in this Owner's all the trim components described in this Owner's
Manual are available in your vehicle. Manual are available in your vehicle.
The images in this Owner’s Manual are for illustra- The images in this Owner’s Manual are for illustra-
tive purposes only. The images may differ from your tive purposes only. The images may differ from your
vehicle; these are for general information purposes vehicle; these are for general information purposes
only. only.
ŠKODA AUTO is constantly working on the further ŠKODA AUTO is constantly working on the further
development of all vehicles. It is therefore possible development of all vehicles. It is therefore possible
for changes to be made at any time to the scope of for changes to be made at any time to the scope of
delivery in terms of shape, equipment and technolo- delivery in terms of shape, equipment and technolo-
gy. The information contained in this Owner's Man- gy. The information contained in this Owner's Man-
ual corresponds to the information available at the ual corresponds to the information available at the
time of going to press. time of going to press.
No legal claims can therefore be derived from the No legal claims can therefore be derived from the
technical data, illustrations and information in this technical data, illustrations and information in this
Owner’s Manual. Owner’s Manual.
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual
The printed Owner’s Manual contains the most im-
portant information regarding vehicle operation and
vehicle maintenance.
Complete information is included in the electronic
version of the Owner's Manual. This is available on
the ŠKODAweb pages as well as in the mobile appli-
cation MyŠKODA, which can be downloaded.

▶ http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
6 Explanations

Explanations
Terms used
“Specialist garage” - A workshop that carries out
specialist service tasks for ŠKODA vehicles. A
specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA
Service Partner, or an independent workshop.
“ŠKODA Service Partner” - A workshop that has
been contractually authorised by ŠKODA AUTO
or its distribution partner to perform service
work on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA
Genuine Parts.
“ŠKODA Partner” - A company that has been con-
tractually authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or its dis-
tribution partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles
and, when applicable, to service them using
ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
Text notes
“Press” - short press (e.g. a button) within 1 second
“Hold” - long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1
second
Direction indications
All direction indications, such as “left”, “right”,
“front”, “rear”, relate to the forwards direction of
travel of the vehicle.
DANGER
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations
which, if the safety instructions are not observed,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situations
which, if the safety instructions are not observed,
could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Texts marked with this symbol indicate dangerous
situations which, if the safety instructions are not
observed, could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Texts with this symbol indicate situations which, if
the corresponding instructions are not observed, will
result in damage to the vehicle.
Texts with this symbol contain additional informa-
tion.
Vehicle overviews › Front vehicle area 7

Vehicle overviews
Front vehicle area

A Under the windscreen


▶ Camera for assist systems
▶ Light sensor for automatic driving light circuit » page 45
▶ Rain sensor for automatic wiping » page 51
B Door handles
▶ Open the door » page 25
▶ Keyless locking (KESSY) » page 23
C Bonnet release lever (under the flap) » page 184
D Headlight washers » page 51
E Cover for screw-in towing eye socket » page 165
F Ultrasonic sensors for assist systems
G Front radar sensor for assist systems

› Keep the sensors and cameras for the assist systems clean » page 14.
8 Vehicle overviews › Rear vehicle area

Rear vehicle area

A Handle of the boot lid


▶ Manually operated boot lid » page 29
▶ Electrically operated boot lid » page 29
▶ Camera for assist systems
B Radar sensors for assist systems (in the bumper)
C Ultrasonic sensors for assist systems
D Swivelling hitch » page 215
E Cover for screw-in towing eye socket » page 165
F Fuel filler flap » page 187
▶ Sticker with tyre pressures » page 200
▶ Sticker with prescribed fuel
▶ Ice scraper
▶ Filler neck of the AdBlue®tank » page 187

› Keep the sensors and cameras for the assist systems clean » page 14.
Vehicle overviews › Driver's seat 9

Driver's seat Centre console and passenger seat

A Side Assist lane change assist system indicator A Infotainment (depending on trim level):
light » page 175 ▶ Columbus » page 125
B Door opening lever » page 25 ▶ Amundsen » page 97
C Light switch » page 45 ▶ Bolero » page 77
▶ Swing » page 62
D Air outlet nozzle
B Hazard warning system button » page 45
E Operating lever (depending on equipment):
▶ Flashing and high beam » page 45 C / Pilot light for front passenger air-
▶ Cruise control » page 172 bag » page 44
▶ Speed limiter » page 171 D Air outlet nozzle
▶ High-beam assist system » page 48 E External Infotainment module (in the passenger
▶ Headlight Assist System » page 48 storage compartment) » page 125
F Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering F Key switch for passenger front airbag (in front
wheel » page 58 passenger storage compartment) » page 44
G Depending on the equipment: G Door opening lever » page 25
▶ Analogue instrument cluster » page 56 H Side Assist lane change assist system indicator
▶ Digital instrument cluster » page 57 light » page 175
H Control lever: I Window operation in the passenger
▶ Windscreen wipers and washers » page 51 door » page 26
▶ Information system » page 58 J Operation (depending on the trim level):
I Starter button » page 159 ▶ Heating
J Steering wheel with horn/with driver's front air- ▶ Manual air conditioning » page 52
bag » page 43 ▶ Climatronic » page 53
K Safety lever for steering wheel adjust- K Buttons (depending on the equipment):
ment » page 36 ▶ START-STOP » page 159
L Operation of the automatic distance con- ▶ Stabilisation Control ESC / Traction Control
trol » page 173 ASR » page 168
M Bonnet release lever » page 184 ▶ Driving mode selection » page 162
N Exterior mirror operation » page 37 ▶ Park Assist » page 182
O Window operation » page 26
▶ Park Pilot » page 179
▶ Button for the electric boot lid » page 29
L Buttons (depending on the equipment):
▶ Auto Hold » page 167
▶ Parking brake » page 166
▶ Central locking » page 22
10 Indicator lights › Engine compartment

M Depending on the equipment: Indicator lights


▶ Shift lever (manual transmission) » page 160
▶ Selector lever (automatic transmis- Functionality
sion) » page 160
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster indicate
the current status of certain functions or faults.

Engine compartment The illumination of some of the indicator lights may


be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the instrument cluster display.
Colour display of the indicator lights
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the colour
scheme of the indicator lights may vary. The coolant
indicator light can, e.g. be shown in colour as follows.
- colour display
- black and white display
Additional indicator lights
Depending on the meaning, the additional indicator
light will also light up in the display along with some
of the indicator lights.
- Danger
- Warning
A Coolant expansion tank » page 185
WARNING
B Engine oil dipstick » page 184 Ignoring the illuminated indicator lights and associ-
C Engine oil filler opening » page 184 ated messages on the instrument cluster display may
result in accidents, serious injury or damage to the
D Brake fluid reservoir » page 166
vehicle.
E Vehicle battery » page 190
F Fuse box » page 194
Indicator light overview
G Windscreen washer fluid reservoir » page 51
After switching on the ignition, some indicator lights
for the functional test of the vehicle systems light up
briefly. If the tested systems are in order, the respec-
tive indicator lights go out a few seconds after the
ignition is switched on or after the engine has been
started.

Symbol Meaning
Indicates a warning together with
another warning light » page 10.
Vehicle battery is not charg-
ing » page 191.
Along with - Engine
fault » page 186, » page 191.
Coolant level is too low » page 185.
Coolant temperature too
high » page 186.
ACC does not decelerate sufficient-
ly » page 172.
Parking brake on » page 167.
Indicator lights › Indicator light overview 11

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning


Automatic gearbox overhea- Airbag system faulty » page 44.
ted » page 162.
Illuminates 4 s - Front passenger air-
Automatic gearbox im- bag deactivated with key
paired » page 162. switch » page 44.
Front seat belt not fas- Illuminates for 4 seconds and then
tened » page 39. flashes - Airbag or belt tensioner de-
activated with diagnostic de-
Brake fluid level is too
vice » page 43.
low » page 166.
Crew Protect Assist faul-
Together with - Brake system and
ty » page 177.
ABS faulty » page 169.
ESC Offroad is activated » page 163.
Parking on a slope with too much in-
clination » page 167. ASR deactivated » page 169.
Parking brake faulty » page 167. ESC Sports enabled » page 169.
Warning if there is a risk of a colli- Worn brake pads » page 166.
sion » page 169.
Engine oil level too low » page 185. ABS faulty » page 169.

Engine oil pressure too Illuminates - ESC or ASR faul-


low » page 184. ty » page 169.
Flashing - Steering lock faul- Flashing - ESC or ASR is engag-
ty » page 36. ed » page 168.
Illuminates - Power assisted steering Clogged particle filter » page 186.
faulty » page 36.
Indicates a warning along with an- Front Assist deactivated » page 170.
other warning light » page 10.
Petrol engine control faul-
ACC not available » page 174.
ty » page 186.

Flashing - Diesel engine control faul- Tyre pressure


ty » page 186. change » page 196, » page
200, » page 201, » page 201.
illuminates, if relevant, does not illu-
minate after switching on the igni- Tyre pressure control system faul-
tion - Diesel preheating system faul- ty » page 201.
ty » page 186. Emission control system faul-
Front passenger airbag switched ty » page 186.
off » page 44. Lane Assist intervenes » page 174.
Front passenger airbag switched
on » page 44. Lane Assist intervenes » page 174.
Flashes together with - Key
switch for airbag deactivation faul- Engine oil level too high or engine oil
ty » page 44. level sensor impaired » page 185.
Ball rod not locked » page 216.

Windscreen washer fluid level too


low » page 51.
Automatic gearbox overhea-
ted » page 162.
12 Indicator lights › Indicator light overview

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning


The fuel supply has reached the re- ACC activated » page 172.
serve area. » page 189, » page 190.
Illuminates - Power assisted steering ACC controls the driving speed ac-
faulty » page 36. cording to the permissible
speed » page 172.
Flashing - Steering lock not un-
locked » page 36. ACC controls the driving speed ac-
cording to the road » page 172.
Flashing - Steering lock faul-
ty » page 36. AdBlue®level too low » page 187.
Bulb faulty » page 47.
AdBlue®system impaired » page 188.
Rear fog light switched
on » page 46. High beam Assist System switched
on » page 48, » page 48.
Water in the diesel fuel fil-
ter » page 187. Break recommendation » page 178.

Adaptive suspension faul-


Rear seat belt not fas-
ty » page 163.
tened » page 39.
Automatic gearbox im-
A rear seat belt is fas-
paired » page 162.
tened » page 39.
ACC controls the driving
The Hill Descent Assist System is ac-
speed » page 172.
tivated » page 178.
Speed limiter controls the driving
Hill Descent Assist System inter-
speed » page 170.
venes » page 178.
The cruise control system controls
Safety distance too small » page 169.
the driving speed » page 171.
ACC controls the driving
Speed limiter activated » page 170.
speed » page 172.
Vehicle is secured by Auto Speed limiter faulty » page 171.
Hold » page 167.
The selector lever is Engine was switched off automati-
locked » page 161. cally by START-STOP » page 160.
Lane Assist is activated and ready to Engine was not automatically
intervene » page 174. switched off via START-
Lane Assist is activated and ready to STOP » page 160.
intervene » page 174. No light is switched on » page 45.
Turn signal light,
left » page 45, » page 47. Cruise control activated » page 171.
Turn signal light,
right » page 45, » page 47. Cruise control system faul-
ty » page 172.
Trailer turn signal light » page 47.
Consumption-friendly driv-
ing » page 164.
Front fog lights switched
on » page 46. Driving mode Normal » page 162.
Low outside temperature » page 58.
Driving mode Sport » page 162.
High beam or flasher activa-
ted » page 45. Driving mode Eco » page 162.
Indicator lights › Indicator light overview 13

Symbol Meaning
Comfort Driving Mode » page 162.

Offroad Driving Mode » page 162.

Driving mode Individual » page 162.


14 Correct and safe › Introductory notes for correct use

Correct and safe Regular checks


Introductory notes for correct use What should be taken into account before driving?
A vehicle with technical defects can increase the risk
▶ Read this Owner's Manual carefully, as proceeding of accidents and injuries.
in accordance with this manual is a prerequisite for Eliminate any defects before driving. If required,
the correct use of the vehicle. This Owner's Manual seek the help of a specialised garage.
should therefore always be in the vehicle.
Pay special attention to the following points.
▶ When using the vehicle, the generally binding legal
provisions that are specific to the country must be ▶ Is the tyre undamaged?
observed. Such as those for transporting children, ▶ Is the tyre tread sufficient?
switching off airbags, using tyres, road traffic and ▶ Is the tyre pressure sufficient?
the like. ▶ Do the headlamps, brake and turn signals work?
▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible weights ▶ Is the windscreen in good condition?
and loads.
▶ Is the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level OK?
▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible roof load.
▶ Is the air intake in the engine compartment free
▶ Use the specified fuel and operating fluids. from obstruction?
▶ Drive on roads that meet the technical vehicle pa- ▶ Are the air outlet nozzles or air intake in front of
rameters. Obstacles that exceed the ground clear- the windscreen free from obstruction?
ance of the vehicle can damage the vehicle when
▶ Are the windscreen wiper and washer system and
driving over them.
windscreen wiper blades functional?
▶ Care must be taken during operations related to
▶ Is the windscreen washer fluid level sufficient?
operation, maintenance and self-help to avoid
damage to the vehicle or injury. If required, seek ▶ Are the windscreen wiper blades in good condi-
the help of a specialised garage. tion?
▶ All work on the vehicles and safety systems e.g. on ▶ Are all seatbelt system components in good work-
the seatbelts or the airbag system, may only be ing order? Are the seatbelts clean and have the
carried out by a specialist garage. buckles been unclogged?
▶ When using accessories, please note the instruc- ▶ Is the spoiler working properly?
tions in the accessory manufacturer’s instruction ▶ Are parts and components of the vehicle still visi-
manual. These include child seats, roof racks, com- bly attached?
pressors etc. ▶ Are there no oil stains or other operating fluids un-
▶ Please note the service intervals. der the vehicle?

New vehicle or new parts No improper vehicle adjustments


New vehicle - Running in the engine Improper modifications can cause interference and
Driving style during the first 1500 km determines the affect safety-related functions and other functions
quality of the engine run-in process. of the vehicle.
▶ During the first 1000 km, rev the engine to max. ▶ Adjustments and technical modifications to the ve-
3/4 of the highest permissible engine speed and hicle should only be carried out by a specialist ga-
avoid using a trailer. rage.
▶ Over the next 500 km, the engine speed can be ▶ Do not cover the engine with additional insulation
slowly increased. materials, e.g. a blanket.
Depending on driving style and operating conditions,
the engine consumes some oil, up to 0.5 l / 1000 km.
Keeping sensors and cameras in working
Consumption may be higher over the next 5000 km.
order
New brake pads
New brake pads do not provide the optimum braking Some functions of your vehicle are supported by
effect during the first 200 km, they have to be worn sensors and cameras inside and outside the vehicle.
in first. Therefore, drive very carefully. The rear-mounted accessories, e.g. bike rack, may
New tyres affect system and camera functionality.
New tyres do not have optimum grip for the first ▶ Do not cover or put a sticker over the sensors and
500 km. Therefore, drive very carefully. cameras and keep them clean.
Correct and safe › Engine compartment 15

▶ If there is damage suspected to the sensors or ▶ If battery acid comes into contact with skin, wash
cameras, seek the help of a specialist garage. the affected areas with water for a few minutes.
Get medical help without delay.
▶ Do not charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery.
Engine compartment Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
▶ Do not use a damaged vehicle battery.
Before opening the engine compartment flap
Risk of scalding! Do not open the engine compart- ▶ Short circuit! Do not connect the battery terminals.
ment flap if steam or coolant comes out of the en-
gine compartment.
Using electrical sockets in the vehicle
▶ Stop the engine and allow it to cool.
▶ Open the driver door. Improper handling of sockets can lead to life-threat-
ening electric shock or fire.
When working in the engine compartment
▶ Keep children away from the engine compartment. ▶ The sockets may get hot during operation. Do not
touch hot sockets.
▶ Do not touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan can
turn itself on, even when the ignition is off. ▶ Protect sockets from liquids.
▶ Do not touch electrical cables. Avoid short circuits ▶ If moisture gets into the socket, let the socket dry
in the electrical system, especially on the vehicle before reusing it.
battery. ▶ Do not insert any objects into the socket contacts.
▶ Do not smoke near the engine and refrain from
handling open flames or sparks.
▶ If you need to work in the engine compartment
Before your journey
with the engine running, be mindful of rotating en- Adults and children, cargo and objects - everything
gine parts and electrical equipment. has its place in the vehicle. Observe the following in-
▶ Do not leave any objects in the engine compart- structions so that all occupants are protected in the
ment. best possible way in the event of an accident.
Handling operating fluids Before you go
Your vehicle needs various fuels to operate that can ▶ Ensure that you have a good view of outside the
affect health or the environment when they are vehicle.
emitted. These include fuel, oils, battery acid, coolant ▶ Adjust the rearview mirrors.
and brake fluid or AdBlue®.
▶ Close all doors and the engine compartment and
▶ Only use operating fluids outdoors or in well-venti- boot flap.
lated areas. If required, wear protective equipment. ▶ Take the correct seating position and put on the
▶ Do not use or check operating fluids with the en- seatbelt properly. Ensure that passengers do like-
gine running. wise. Always leave the seatbelt on while driving.
▶ In the event of contact with operating fluids, wash ▶ Only one person can be secured with a seatbelt.
affected areas with warm water. If required, seek ▶ Make sure that the seatbelts are not trapped, e.g.
medical help. in the door or in the seat.
▶ The leaked engine oil in the engine compartment ▶ Check seatbelts, their locks and attachment points
can cause a fire, so wipe it off with a cloth. for damage.
▶ Store soiled cloths in a well-ventilated area until
Sitting safely
disposal. Cloths with residues of engine oil can ig-
For the safety of the occupants and to reduce the
nite and cause a fire.
risk of injury in the event of an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
Vehicle battery ▶ Stand the backrests upright. If the front passenger
seat backrest has been folded forward, only the
Handling the vehicle battery seat behind the driver's seat may be used for trans-
Battery acid is highly corrosive. Improper handling of porting passengers.
the vehicle battery can cause an explosion, fire, ▶ Engage the rear seat backrests correctly.
chemical burns or poisoning!
▶ Adjust the height-adjustable headrest so that the
▶ When handling the vehicle battery, eye and skin top of the headrest is as close as possible to the
protection must be worn. top of the head.
▶ Do not tilt the vehicle battery, as it may leak bat- ▶ Keep your feet in the footwell.
tery acid. ▶ Use the entire seat.
16 Correct and safe › Before your journey

▶ Do not lean forward or sit to the side. Correct steering wheel position
▶ Do not hold your limbs out the window.
▶ Hold the steering
› Adjust the driver's seat wheel with both hands
in the longitudinal di- on the outer edge in
rection so that the the "9 o'clock" and "3
pedals can be fully o'clock" position. Oth-
pushed through with erwise, you may expe-
slightly bent legs. rience serious injury to
› Adjust the steering the arms, hands and
wheel so that the dis- head when deploying
tance A between the the airbag.
steering wheel and
Be mindful of the effect of the airbag system
sternum is at least 25
Airbag systems can only properly protect if all occu-
cm.
pants have been secured and they are in the correct
› For vehicles with driver's knee airbag, adjust the seating position.
driver's seat longitudinally so that the distance B
No persons, animals or objects such as cup holders
from the legs to the dash panel in the area of the
may be in the deployment area of the air-
knee airbag is at least 6 cm.
bags » page 43.
› Adjust the angle of the backrest so that the steer-
ing wheel can be reached at the top with your arms ▶ Do not cover or stick anything over the steering
slightly bent. wheel or the dash panel. The front airbags were
not able to deploy.
› Move the passenger seat back as far as possible.
The front passenger must maintain a minimum dis- The front passenger airbag should be switched off in
tance of 25 cm from the dash panel. some situations » page 44.
Correct belt webbing arrangement Securing children properly
▶ Do not carry a child on your lap, and secure the
The webbing arrange-
child and yourself with a seatbelt.
ment is extremely impor-
tant for the seatbelts to ▶ Only transport children in a suitable child
offer the best possible seat » page 41.
protection. Children under 150 cm tall will not be properly pro-
▶ The shoulder belt part tected without a child seat. Children that have been
must run over the mid- inadequately secured can be thrown through the ve-
dle of the shoulder and hicle in the event of an accident or a sudden ma-
rest firmly on the body. noeuvre. You can cause life-threatening injuries to
yourself and other occupants.
▶ The lap belt part must
be placed in front of the pelvis and fit tightly. If children lean forward or assume a wrong sitting
▶ In pregnant women, the lap belt part must be as position while driving, they are more likely to be in-
low as possible on the pelvis, so that no pressure is jured in the event of an accident. This is especially
exercised on the abdomen. true for children who are carried in the passenger
The webbing must not be pinched or twisted and seat - when the airbag system triggers, they can be

rub against sharp edges. seriously injured or killed!
▶ The tongue may only be inserted into the buckle of A child that has been incorrectly secured in the
the associated seat. wrong sitting position - endangered by the side
▶ The webbing must be tight. Therefore, do not at- airbag
tach clamps or similar items to the webbing for ad- The child should not be
justing the seatbelt according to body size. in the deployment area
of the side airbag.
Correct and safe › Safe driving 17

A child that has been properly secured in a child ▶ If the vehicle issues a warning signal, then park the
seat vehicle safely and follow the information in the in-
There must be enough strument cluster, and in this manual.
room between the child Using assistance systems in a clever way
and the exit area of the The assistance systems are only for support and do
side airbag for the side not absolve you from your responsibility for driving
airbag to offer the best the vehicle.
possible protection.
The assistance systems are subject to physical and
technical limitations. Therefore, in certain situations,
system reactions may be perceived as undesirable or
delayed.
▶ Stay alert and be ready to intervene.
Transporting objects safely
▶ Familiarise yourself with the assistance systems,
When moving heavy objects, there is a shift in em-
their limitations and operating conditions.
phasis. Thus, the driving behaviour of the vehicle
changes. ▶ Activate, deactivate and adjust the assistance sys-
tems so that you have full control of the vehicle in
▶ Adjust driving speed and driving style to this any traffic situation.
changed driving behaviour.
Driving with a substitute spare wheel or emergen-
Unsecured or misplaced items may be thrown
cy wheel
around in the event of an accident or sudden ma-
A substitute spare wheel or emergency wheel is only
noeuvre. There is a risk of serious injury and loss of
used to reach the nearest specialist garage.
control of the vehicle!
▶ Inflate the wheel with the max. prescribed inflation
In a rear-end collision at 50 km/h unsecured objects
pressure.
are thrown forward with up to 50 times their weight.
A 1.5 litre water bottle is thrown up to 75 kg. ▶ Follow the instructions on the warning label on the
rim.
▶ Transport objects securely.
▶ Do not cover the warning sign.
▶ Stow objects so they do not hinder the driver.
▶ Avoid full accelerations, strong braking and fast
Keep the driver footwell clear.
cornering.
▶ Stow small items in the storage compartments.
▶ Do not drive with more than one mounted spare
▶ Do not leave lockable storage compartments open. wheel.
▶ Do not let items protrude out of the slots. This ▶ Avoid using snow chains on the temporary spare
note does not apply to bottles in bottle trays. wheel.
▶ Do not place any objects on the dash panel or on
the luggage compartment cover. Driving with a loaded roof rack
When transporting objects on the roof rack, the ve-
▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of
hicle’s driving behaviour changes.
fasteners and shelves.
▶ Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compart- ▶ Adapt your speed and driving style to this.
ment and fasten it so it cannot slip. Towing a trailer
▶ Place heavy objects in the luggage compartment The vehicles handling characteristics change with a
as far forward as possible. trailer. The assistance systems may behave different-
ly.
▶ Drive more slowly, excessive speed can lead to loss
Safe driving
of control of the vehicle.
Introductory notes ▶ Keep a larger distance from the vehicle in front.
▶ Pay attention when you are driving! As a driver, you ▶ Do not exceed the max. vertical load and the per-
are fully responsible for road safety. missible trailer load.
▶ Always adjust driving speed to the road conditions
Driving through water
as well as the traffic and weather conditions.
There must be no water ingress into the vehicle sys-
Paying attention to warning signals tems e.g. into the engine’s air intake system!
The driver information system warns you with indi- ▶ Therefore, determine the water depth before driv-
cator lights and messages in the event of any faults. ing through water. The water level must not ex-
Failure to follow the warnings may increase the risk ceed the lower edge of the lower beam.
of accidents and injuries.
18 Correct and safe › Emergency call

▶ Drive at max. walking speed. Otherwise, a wave ▶ At very high or very low temperatures, there is
may form in front of the vehicle, increasing the wa- danger to life!
ter level. ▶ When locking the vehicle, the SAFE function
▶ Never stop in the water, do not drive backwards switches on. As a result, no doors or windows can
and never stop the engine. be opened from the inside. Turn off the SAFE func-
tion if people are left behind in the locked vehi-
Vehicle operation in different weather conditions
cle » page 21.
If you wish to operate your vehicle in countries with
different weather conditions from those specified,
please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will advise
Emergency call
you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure
the full functioning of the vehicle or to prevent dam- WARNING
age (e.g. coolant, battery replacement, etc.). Availability of a mobile network is indispensable for
Is something wrong? establishing a connection to the emergency number.
▶ Pay attention to changes in vehicle handling. WARNING
▶ If in doubt about safety, stop driving and seek the This emergency service is only available in some
help of a specialist garage. countries.
▶ Unusual vibrations or the vehicle ‘pulling’ to the WARNING
side may indicate a puncture. If the vehicle is located in an area without a function-
▶ If tyre pressure loss is very quick, try to stop the ing emergency call system infrastructure, no vehicle
vehicle carefully without heavy steering or heavy data shall be transmitted to the emergency call cen-
braking. tre.
▶ Immediately remove foreign bodies stuck in the After the start of the conversation, the emergency
tyre tread. call centre also contains information as to the acci-
▶ Do not remove foreign objects that have penetra- dent location and the severity of the accident, the
ted into the tyre. Check the tyre pressure and seek number of occupants with seatbelts on and the vehi-
the help of a specialised garage. cle identification number (VIN).
▶ Immediately remove any objects jammed under Once the connection has been established, commu-
the floor of the vehicle. These can damage the ve- nication with the emergency call centre takes place
hicle or ignite and cause a fire. via the loudspeaker and microphone installed in the
Parking the vehicle safely vehicle.
A vehicle that has not been secured may roll away Personal data
and cause accidents. Personal customer data is collected, processed and
▶ For parking, look for a place with suitable ground. used by ŠKODA AUTO in accordance with the provi-
Do not park the vehicle on flammable materials sions of the generally binding legal provisions in the
such as dried leaves, spilt fuel. Hot vehicle parts area of personal data protection.
can cause a fire. The current declaration on the protection of person-
Carry out the following activities in the specified or- al data can be found on the following website: http://
der when parking. www.skoda-auto.com/data-privacy/.
› Stop the vehicle and keep the brake pedal de- Serious accident - automatic call
pressed. In the event of an accident where the airbag or belt
› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake. tensioner activates, a call is automatically started
› For vehicles with an automatic gearbox, put the se- with the emergency call centre.
lector lever in the position. Minor accident - call option
› Turn off the engine. The infotainment screen displays the option to set
› For vehicles with manual transmission, engage up a connection to the emergency call centre or
1st gear or reverse gear. breakdown service.
› Release the brake pedal.
Exiting the vehicle
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle!
▶ Children may injure themselves when handling the
seats, releasing the parking brake etc.
▶ In emergency situations, children are not able to
leave the vehicle on their own or help themselves.
Correct and safe › After an accident 19

Manual call
› Keep the key press-
ed down.
› Confirm the connec-
tion to the emergency
call centre in the Info-
tainment screen.
Starting a manual con-
versation can then be
used, for example, if you
also report an accident in
which you are not directly involved.
Indicator light
The system state is dis-
played after the ignition
is switched on by the
warning light A illumi-
nating.
▶ Green - lit up - the sys-
tem is functional.
▶ Green - flashing - a call
is being made to the
emergency call centre.
▶ Red - lit up - if there is a system failure, immediate-
ly seek the help of a specialist garage.
▶ Not lit up - the system is out of order due to a long
term unavailable mobile network, if this circum-
stance persists, the system will require the assis-
tance of a specialist garage.
WARNING
If there is a system fault, no emergency call is possi-
ble.

After an accident
Safety systems
After an accident, the safety systems of the vehicle,
e.g. seatbelts and airbag system, may be out of ac-
tion.
▶ Have the vehicle's safety systems checked by a
specialist garage, even if no load or trip has occur-
red.
▶ Have damaged, loaded or triggered components of
the safety systems replaced by a specialist garage.
20 Keys, locks and alarm system › Key

Keys, locks and alarm system › Replace the battery » page 20.
The vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked with the
Key remote control
Key Overview There may be the following reasons.
▶ The battery in the key is empty.
Locking the vehicle
Operate the boot lid
› Replace the battery » page 20.
▶ The key is not synchronized.
Unlocking the vehi-
cle Synchronize the key as follows.
A Battery status warn- › Press one of the buttons on the key.
ing lamp
› Unlock the door within 1 minute with the key via
B Locking tab for re- the locking cylinder » page 22.
moval of the key bit
If necessary, the key must be synchronized if one
of the buttons on the key has been repeatedly press-
NOTICE ed outside of the effective range of the remote con-
▶ Protect the key from moisture and strong vibra- trol.
tions.
▶ Keep the grooves in the key clean.
Changing the key battery
The effective range of the key is about 30m. The
effective range of the key can be reduced, e.g. due to The new battery must comply with the specification
signal interference from other transmitters. of the original battery.
› Remove the key bit.
Remove the key bit
› Insert a small flat-head
screwdriver into the
› Unlock the securing resulting opening.
tab A . › Loosen the battery
cover by turning the
› Remove the key bit B.
screwdriver.

› Slide on the battery


cover.

› Remove the battery.


› Press any button on
the remote key to re-
set the key.
Troubleshooting › Insert the new battery.
› Fit the battery cover
The battery in the key is almost empty and press until it clicks
▶ After pressing a button on the key, the warning into place.
light does not flash.
Or:
▶ A message stating it is necessary to change the
battery will be displayed.
Keys, locks and alarm system › Memory function of the key 21

Memory function of the key › Adjust the mirror to the desired position.
› Disengage reverse gear.
Functionality
The set mirror position is saved.
Applies to vehicles that do not have the personalisa-
tion function.
Each time the vehicle is locked, the driver's seat and
Central locking
exterior mirror position settings are saved. Functionality
The saved setting is then assigned to the key used to
lock the vehicle. Central locking system
The system unlocks and locks all doors, the fuel filler
flap and the boot lid at the same time.
Operation Unlock indicator: double flashing of the indicator
lights.
Retrieve stored position
› Unlock the vehicle and open the driver's door. Lock indicator: single flashing of the indicator lights.
The driver's seat and the exterior mirrors occupy the The warning light in the driver's door will flash for
position assigned in the memory to the key used to about 2 seconds in quick succession after the vehicle
unlock the vehicle. is locked, then it will start flashing regularly at longer
intervals.
Stop position change
If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened
› Press any button on the seat to be adjusted. within 45 seconds of unlocking, the vehicle automat-
Or: ically locks again.
› Press the button on the key. SAFE function
Depending on the equipment, the SAFE function can
be integrated into the central locking system.
Settings
The SAFE function prevents the doors from opening
Activate and deactivate the memory function of from the inside once the vehicle is locked.
the key
The SAFE function switches on when the vehicle is
The function is activated or deactivated in the fol-
locked.
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
In the display of the instrument cluster after the igni-
tion is switched off, a message regarding the SAFE
Or: function is displayed.
DANGER
Risk of death!
Storing driver's seat and exterior mirror position
When the vehicle is locked and the SAFE function is
for driving forwards
switched on, nobody is allowed to remain in the vehi-
Storing takes place automatically every time the ve-
cle.
hicle is locked.
The seat position can be stored if the angle of in- Turn off the SAFE function
clination of the seat back relative to the seat surface ▶By double locking within 2 seconds.
is less than approximately 110° and the seat is not in Or:
any of the end positions.
▶ Together with the deactivation of the interior mon-
Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror position itoring » page 24, Settings.
for reversing The warning light in the driver's door will flash for
› Unlocking the vehicle with the key. about 2 seconds in quick succession after the vehicle
› Turn on the ignition. is locked, then goes out and starts flashing regularly
› Activate the folding function of the mirror in the at longer intervals after about 30 secs.
Infotainment in the following menu. When the SAFE function is switched off, the door
can be opened from the inside by pulling once on the
Or: opening lever.
The SAFE function is switched on again after unlock-
ing and locking the vehicle.
› Turn the exterior mirror knob to the position .
› Engage reverse gear.
22 Keys, locks and alarm system › Central locking

Operation The vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from


the inside.
Ways in which central locking operates
Depending on the equipment: WARNING
An automatically locked vehicle makes it difficult for
▶ Key » page 20
responders to enter the vehicle in an emergency.
▶ Keyless locking (KESSY) » page 23
▶ Central locking button

Central locking button Troubleshooting


The button locks all of the doors and the boot lid. Central locking fault
Locking and unlocking ▶ The warning light in the driver's door first flashes
› Press the button in the centre console. for 2 secs in quick succession.
The symbol in the button comes on when locked. ▶ Then it lights up continuously.
▶ After 30 secs, it flashes slowly.
The vehicle is also unlocked when a door is opened
from the inside. › Seek the help of a specialist garage.
WARNING
A locked vehicle with a central locking button makes Emergency unlocking and emergency locking
it difficult for responders to enter the vehicle in an of the door
emergency.
Unlocking and locking the door with the lock cylin-
der
Setting the unlocking and locking function Remove the cover
The lock and unlock functions are set in the follow- › Pull on the door handle
ing menu in the Infotainment system. of the vehicle and hold
it.
› Insert the key bit into
Or: the recess on the un-
derside of the cover.

All doors
› Open the cover in the
direction of the arrow.
Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler
flap. › Release the door han-
dle.
Single door Locking and unlocking
Using the button on the key, the driver's door and › Insert the removed key
the fuel filler flap are unlocked. bit with the handle fac-
In vehicles equipped with a keyless unlocking sys- ing downwards into
tem, the door near to which the key is located and the lock cylinder and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked by touching the door unlock or lock it.
handle. Install cover
When unlocked again, the other doors and the boot › Pull on the door handle
lid are unlocked. and hold it.
Doors on a vehicle side › Replace the cover.
Using the button on the key, the doors on the driv- › Release the door handle.
er’s side and the fuel filler flap are unlocked.
In vehicles equipped with a keyless unlocking sys-
tem, the doors on the passenger’s side near to which
the key is located and the fuel filler flap are unlocked
by touching the door handle.
When unlocked again, the other doors and the boot
lid are unlocked.
Automatic locking after starting
After starting, all doors and the boot lid are locked
when a speed of 15 km/h is reached.
Keys, locks and alarm system › Keyless locking (KESSY) 23

Locking the door without the lock cylinder Lock


› Touch the sensor.
After locking, it is not
possible to unlock
within 2 seconds by
touching the door han-
dle. This can be used to
check whether the ve-
hicle is locked.

› Open the door. Unlocking the boot lid


› For vehicles with a panel over the opening, remove › Press the handle of the boot lid.
the panel. Protection against accidentally locking the key in-
› Insert the key or a flat-head screwdriver into the side the vehicle
slot. If the key is locked inside the vehicle, the vehicle will
› Turn the key or flat-head screwdriver towards the unlock itself automatically. If no door is opened with-
outside of the vehicle (spring-loaded position). in 45 seconds, the vehicle automatically locks again.
After closing, the door is locked. If the key is locked in the luggage compartment, the
luggage compartment lid will automatically unlock it-
self.
Keyless locking (KESSY)
Usage Deactivating keyless unlocking and locking
The keyless locking system, KESSY, enables unlock- › Lock the vehicle with the button on the key.
ing and locking of the vehicle without actively using
the remote control key.
› Within 5 s, touch the sensor on the door handle
with your finger.
Deactivation is confirmed by a single flash of the
Operation direction indicators.
› To check the deactivation, wait at least 10 seconds
Keep the key with you when unlocking and locking. and then pull the door handle.
The sensors on the handle are intended to be operat- The door must remain locked.
ed with bare hands, e.g. wearing gloves may affect
the function of the sensors. Keyless unlocking and locking is automatically acti-
vated once again after the vehicle is unlocked.
Unlocking
› Grab the door handle.
Troubleshooting
› Open the door.
The vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked using
the sensors on the handle
› Lock or unlock the vehicle with the button on the
key.
› Then try to unlock or lock the vehicle using the
sensors on the handle.
› If keyless locking does not work, seek the help of a
specialist garage.

Alarm system
Functionality
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals
during a break-in or towing attempt.
24 Keys, locks and alarm system › Alarm system

The alarm system is activated automatically approxi- ▶ In Infotainment, in the Interior monitoring
mately 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked. menu
The alarm system is automatically deactivated after Or:
the vehicle is unlocked. In Infotainment, in the Interior moni-

Alarm triggering toring menu
The activated alarm system triggers an alarm when The functions of the alarm system must be deac-
one of the following events occurs. tivated if the vehicle is being towed or transported,
▶ Opening the bonnet. for example.
▶ Opening the boot lid. The functions of the alarm system are reactivated
▶ Opening the door. after the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.
▶ Manipulation of the ignition lock.
▶ Towing the vehicle.
▶ Movement in the vehicle.
▶ Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electri-
cal system.
▶ Uncoupling the trailer.
▶ Opening the door unlocked via the lock cylinder.
Switching off the triggered alarm
› Unlock the vehicle.
Or:
› Switch on the ignition.

Operating conditions
For the correct functioning of the alarm system, all
windows must be closed.
A trailer is integrated into the alarm system under
the following conditions.
✓ The vehicle is factory-fitted with a towing device.
✓ The trailer is electrically connected to the vehicle
via the trailer socket.
✓ The trailer is not equipped with LED taillights.
If the electrical connection to the trailer is interrup-
ted on a vehicle with an activated alarm system,
warning signals are triggered.
Disable the alarm before connecting or discon-
necting a trailer.

Settings
The following functions of the alarm system can be
deactivated once.
▶ Interior monitoring.
▶ Towing protection.
Deactivation will also switch off the SAFE func-
tion » page 21, Functionality.
Deactivation
▶ By double locking within 2 seconds.

Or:
Doors, windows and boot lid › Doors 25

Doors, windows and boot lid Electrically operated fuse

Doors
Opening/closing the door
Opening from the outside
› Unlock the vehicle and
pull on the door handle.

› Press the left button to switch on/off the fuse in


the left rear door.
› Press the right button to switch on/off the fuse in
the right rear door.
The fact that the fuse is switched on can be seen by
Opening from the inside the illuminated displayed in the button.
› Pull the door opening After the fuse is switched on, the electric window
lever and push the regulator in the respective door is also blocked.
door away from you.

Window - with electrical operation


What you should be mindful of
Force limiter
To reduce the risk of pinch injuries when closing the
windows, the vehicle has a force limiter.
Closing from the inside
If there is an obstacle, the window closing process is
› Grasp the pull handle and close the door. stopped and the pane retracts by several centime-
tres.
Child safety lock on the rear doors If the obstacle prevents the it from being closed for
the next 10 seconds, the closing process is interrup-
Operation ted once again and the window goes down by sever-
al centimetres.
The child lock prevents the rear doors from being
opened from the inside. If you attempt to close the window again within
10 seconds of the window being moved down for
Switching on and off the second time, even though the obstacle was not
yet been removed, the closing process is only stop-
ped. During this time, it is not possible to automati-
cally close the windows by pulling the button all the
way. The force limiter is, however, switched on.
The force limiter is only not operational if you at-
tempt to close the window again within the next
10 seconds – the window will now close with full
force! If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force
limiter is switched on again.
CAUTION
› Turn the fuse with the vehicle key or a flat-head Risk of injury!
screwdriver. ▶ Close the windows carefully, even though they

A Child lock switched off have a force limiter.

B Child lock switched on


26 Doors, windows and boot lid › Window - with electrical operation

Overview of the operating buttons on the › Turn off the ignition, open the driver's door, and
driver's door hold down the driver's window button until it
stops.
Depending on the setting, only the driver’s win-
dow can be opened in this way.
Close all of the windows at the same time
› Press and hold the button on the key.
Or:
› Turn off the ignition, open the driver's door, and
pull upwards on the driver's window button until it
stops.
Or:
Depending on the equipment:
A Front door left
› For vehicles with a keyless unlocking system, hold
one finger on the sensor on the outside of the han-
B Front door right dle on the front door.
C Rear door, left Depending on the setting, only the driver’s win-
D Rear door, right dow can be closed in this way.
E Deactivation/activation of the buttons in the
rear doors Settings
F Deactivation / activation of the key in the left
rear door (part of the child safety lock with elec- The window operation is set in the following menu in
tric operation) the Infotainment system.

G Deactivation / activation of the key in the right Window operations


back door (part of the child safety lock with Or:
electric operation)
Window operation

Operation Troubleshooting
Opening The window regulator has stopped working after
› Press the corresponding button slightly down- repeated opening and closing
wards and hold it until the window has reached the The window regulator mechanism could have over-
desired position. heated.
Or: › Allow the window regulator mechanism to cool
› Press the corresponding button until it stops; the down.
window opens automatically. Pressing the button
The automatic window operation does not work
again will stop the opening process.
after disconnecting the vehicle battery
Closing › Enable automatic window operation » page 26.
› To close, pull gently upwards on the top edge of
the corresponding button and hold until the win-
dow has reached the desired position. Activation after disconnecting the vehicle
battery
Or:
› Pull the corresponding button until it stops; the Activate automatic window operation
window closes automatically. By pressing the but- › Turn on the ignition.
ton again, the closing process is stopped. › Pull the corresponding button upwards and the
window closes.
After switching off the ignition, the windows can
still open and close for about 10 minutes so long as › Release the button.
none of the doors are opened. › Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
Open all of the windows at the same time
› Press and hold the button on the key.
Or:
Doors, windows and boot lid › Sliding/tilting roof 27

Sliding/tilting roof After another movement to position B the sliding/


tilting roof opens completely.
What you should be mindful of
After switching off the ignition, the sliding/tilting
Force limiter roof can still open and close for about 10 minutes so
To reduce the risk of pinch injuries when closing the long as none of the doors are opened.
tilt/slide sunroof, the vehicle has a force limiter.
Comfort operation of the tilting/sliding sunroof
If there is an obstacle, the glass panel closing proc- The comfort operation makes it possible to lock the
ess is stopped and the pane retracts by several cen- sliding/tilting roof with the key if necessary.
timetres.
› Press and hold the button to turn it off.
If the obstacle is not removed, the force limiter will › Press and hold the button to close it.
be disabled during the third closing attempt. The
sliding/tilting roof will then close with full force. On vehicles with a keyless unlocking system, it is
possible to move the sliding/tilting roof over the sen-
CAUTION sor in the door handle of the front door to close it.
Risk of injury!
▶ Close the sliding/tilting roof carefully, even though
› Hold one finger on the sensor on the outside of the
handle on the front door.
there is a force limiter.
NOTICE
▶ During winter time, if necessary, remove any ice Troubleshooting
and snow around the area of the sliding/tilting roof
Operation of the sliding/tilting sunroof does not
before opening.
work after disconnecting the vehicle battery
▶ Always close the sliding/tilting roof before discon- › Activating operation of the sliding/tilting sun-
necting the battery. roof » page 27.

Operating conditions Activation after disconnecting the vehicle


✓ The ignition is switched on. battery
✓ The temperature is higher than -20 °C. Activating operation of the sliding/tilting sunroof

Operation

A Gradual opening

B Complete opening

C Gradually reset

D Fully reset

› Turn on the ignition.


› Pull the switch all the way down and hold it down.
After about 10 secs, the sliding/tilting roof opens
A Gradual opening and closes again.
B Full opening › Release the switch.
C Gradual closing

D Complete closing

After moving the switch to the position B the


sliding/tilting roof is in the low-noise position (at a
speed of about 80 km/h).
28 Doors, windows and boot lid › Sunblind - with manual operation

Sunblind - with manual operation Rolling up


› Remove the sun protection blind from the holders
Operation at the handle and let it roll in slowly.

› Pull the handle in the


appropriate direction. Sun protection roller blinds for the rear
door panes
Operation

Sunblind - with electrical operation


Operation
To open
Closing Brightness protection
› Pull out the sun protection blind by the handle and
› Press or hold the but- hang it into the holder A .
ton to move the roller
blind. Rolling up
› Press or release the › Remove the sun protection blind from the holder
button to stop the roll- at the handle and let it roll in slowly.
er blind from moving.

Sun visors
Activation after disconnecting the vehicle Folding up and folding down
battery
› Turn on the ignition.
› Keep the key pressed down. The sun protection
blind opens and closes again.
› Release the button.

Sunblind for the rear window


Operation
1 Swivel the front visor towards the windscreen
2 Swivel the visor towards the door

Heated windscreen
Usage
Windscreen heating is used for defrosting or venti-
lating the windscreen.

Brightness protection
› Pull out the sun protection blind by the handle and Conditions
hang it into the holders A .
✓ The engine is running.
Doors, windows and boot lid › Boot lid - with manual operation 29

Operation Closing

Heated rear window › Grasp the fixture A


› Press the key to turn on the heated rear win- and pull the lid down.
dow.
Heated windscreen
Applies to Climatronic.
› Press the key to turn on the heated windscreen.
Windscreen heating switches off automatically after
10 minutes.
CAUTION
Setting Danger of opening the lid while driving!
▶ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after clos-
Automatic heated windscreen ing the lid.
Applies to Climatronic.
The heated windscreen switches on automatically if
the windscreen mists up.
Set a delayed lid lock
This function is set in the following menu in the Info- If the lid is unlocked with the button on the key,
tainment system. the lid is automatically locked again after closing.
› Press the button on the Climatronic control The period after which the lid is locked automatically
panel , tap the functional surface on the Info- can be extended by a specialist garage.
tainment screen.
Or:
Boot lid - with electrical control
› Tap the functional surface on the In-
fotainment screen. Operation
CAUTION
Troubleshooting Risk of injury!
▶ Only operate the tailgate when nobody is within
The indicator light in the button or below the but- swivel range.
ton flashes CAUTION
The heating does not work as the battery charging Danger of opening the lid while driving!
level is low. ▶ Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after clos-
ing the lid.
Boot lid - with manual operation NOTICE
▶ Do not manually close the tailgate when moving.
Operation ▶ Before operating the tailgate, check that there are
no objects in the swivel area that could damage the
To open
tailgate. Also check that there are no objects with-
› Press the handle and in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle that could
lift the lid. damage the vehicle interior and the transported
objects.
If the tailgate hits an obstacle when closing, it
stops and an audible signal sounds.
When automatically closing the tailgate, e.g. un-
der the weight of snow, a broken beep sounds.

The option to open by pressing the handle is deacti-


vated once a speed of 5 km/h is reached. This is acti-
vated again after the vehicle has stopped and a door
is opened.
30 Doors, windows and boot lid › Electrically operated contactless boot lid

Handle in the tailgate Settings


› Press the handle to Set the uppermost position of the tailgate and
open, close or stop the store it
movement of the tail- It makes sense to set the top position of the tailgate,
gate. e.g. setting for the opening of the tailgate in a limited
The option to open by space due to the garage height.
pressing the handle is
deactivated once a
› Stop the lid in the desired position.
speed of 5 km/h is › Press the button and hold down on the lower
edge of the tailgate until an audible signal sounds.
reached. This is activated
again after the vehicle Re-adjusting the top starting position of the lid
has stopped and a door › Carefully raise the flap manually to the limit.
is opened. › Press the button and hold down on the lower
Button in the tailgate edge of the tailgate until an audible signal sounds.

› Press the button to


open, close or stop the Troubleshooting
movement of the tail-
gate. The tailgate does not react to the opening signal
› There is a possible obstacle, e.g. snow; remove it.
Or:
› Press the handle in the tailgate and lift the lid.
Or:
› Unlock the tailgate » page 31.
Button in the centre console
The tailgate does not react to the closing signal
› To open the tailgate, › Close the tailgate manually.
hold the button until
NOTICE
the tailgate starts to
▶ Close the tailgate slowly, push down the tailgate
open.
and push in the lock on the centre of the rear edge
› Press the button to of the tailgate.
stop the tailgate from
moving.
Electrically operated contactless boot lid
Operating conditions
Button on the key
✓ Ignition off.
› Press the button to ✓ You have the vehicle key with you.
open, close or stop the ✓ No trailer or other accessory is connected to the
movement of the tail- trailer socket.
gate.
The option to lock exists
only on vehicles with a
keyless unlocking sys-
tem. The key must not
be in the vehicle and
must be at a distance of
max. 2 m from the tail-
gate.
The tailgate can also be closed by pulling it briefly
downwards.
Doors, windows and boot lid › Unlocking the boot lid 31

Operation Unlocking the boot lid


Opening/closing the lid Unlocking

› Quickly swing a foot under the rear bumper in the › Insert a screwdriver into the opening in the panel.
sensor area.
› Release the flap by moving it in the direction of the
If the lid doesn’t move, wait a few seconds and re- arrow.
peat the swing motion.
Closing display
When you close the lid, audible signals are sounded.
Stopping/ restoring lid movement
The lid movement can be stopped by a rapid swing-
ing motion with your foot. Lid movement is restored
by a subsequent swinging motion with your foot.

Restriction
The system function may be restricted in the follow-
ing cases.
▶ Downpour.
▶ Dirty rear bumper.

Settings
Activating and deactivating
The function is activated and deactivated in the fol-
lowing menu in the Infotainment.

Or:

We recommend that the function is deactivated in


the following cases:
▶ Installation of a roof rack.
▶ Coupling a trailer or another accessory to the hitch.
▶ Car wash.
▶ Maintenance and repair work in the back of the ve-
hicle.
32 Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Front seat - with manual operation

Seats, steering wheel and mirror Front seat - with electrical operation
Front seat - with manual operation Controls on the seat

Controls on the seat Adjusting the seat


A Adjust in a longitudi-
nal direction
B Adjust the inclination

C Adjusting the height

Adjusting the seat back


A Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction -
after releasing the operating lever, the lock must A Adjust the inclination
audibly click into place
B Adjusting the height
C Adjusting the angle of the backrest - do not lean
against the backrest during adjustment
D Adjusting the extent of the curvature of the lum-
bar support

After a certain time, play can develop within the ad-


justment mechanism of the backrest angle. Adjusting the lumbar support
A Set the position of
Folding passenger seat backrest the curvature
B Set the extent of the
Folding down curvature
› Pull on the operating
lever.
› Fold the backrest for-
wards until it clicks in-
to place.

Adjusting the passenger seat from the rear seats


A Adjusting the angle
of the seat backrest
B Adjusting a seat in a
Folding back up forward/back direc-
› Pull on the operating lever. tion
› Press the backrest backwards until it audibly clicks
into place.
Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Memory function of the seat 33

Set the length of the seat manually Settings


› Press the release han- Storing driver's seat and exterior mirror position
dle. for driving forwards
› Push the front part of
the seat forwards or › Turn on the ignition.
backwards. › Adjust the seat and the
exterior mirrors.
› Press the button A
and within 10 seconds
one of the memory
buttons B .
Storing is confirmed by
Memory function of the seat an acoustic signal.
The seat position can be stored if the angle of in-
Functionality
clination of the seat back relative to the seat surface
Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's is less than approximately 110° and the seat is not in
seat. any of the end positions.
Each of the memory buttons on the driver's seat can Save front passenger seat position
be used to store and recall the set driver's seat and Storing the passenger seat position is analogous to
exterior mirror position. storing the driver's seat position.
Depending on the equipment, the front passenger Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror position
seat may also have a memory function. for reversing
› Turn on the ignition.
› Activate the folding function of the mirror in the
Operation Infotainment in the following menu.
Retrieve stored position
› With the ignition off and the driver’s door open, Or:
press the desired memory button.
› In other instances, hold the key for example with
the ignition switched on or the driver's door closed. › Turn the exterior mirror knob to the position .

The passenger seat position can be retrieved in the


› Engage reverse gear.
same way. › Adjust the mirror to the desired position.
› Disengage reverse gear.
Stop position change
The set mirror position is saved.
› With the ignition off and the driver's door open,
press any button on the seat to be adjusted. When changing the stored seat and exterior mir-
ror position for forward driving, the passenger exte-
Or:
rior mirror position for reverse driving must be re-
› Press the button on the key. stored.
› In other cases, release the held memory button.
Massage function in the driver's seat
Turn on/turn off
› Press the button.
Function switches off
automatically after 10
minutes.
34 Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Rear seats

CAUTION Headrests
Only switch the function on and off when the vehicle
is stationary. Adjusting the height of the headrests
Front headrests
Rear seats › Hold the safety button
and move the headrest
Fold the seat backs forwards in the desired direc-
tion.
Before folding down
› Insert the rear headrests as far as they will go or
remove them.
› Adjust the position of the front seats in such a way
that they are not damaged by the folded-down
seat backrests.
› For vehicles with a mesh partition, roll it into the
housing, then unlock the left seat backrest fol- Rear headrests
lowed by the right seat backrest. › Move the headrest in
› Pull the outer seat belt to the side trim. the desired direction.
Folding forwards from the passenger compart- When pushing down,
ment press and hold the
safety button.
› Press the release han-
dle and fold the seat
forwards.

Folding side bolsters on the rear headrest


The folded down side
bolsters reduce uncon-
trolled sideways head
movement , e.g. when
Folding forwards from the luggage compartment sleeping.
› Pull on the lever. › Adjust the headrest to
The seat back is un- the initial pulled out
locked and partly fol- position.
ded forwards. › Fold down the side bol-
sters on the head rest.

Removing and inserting the rear headrests


Removing
Folding back up › Partially fold the re-
spective seat back for-
› Pull the outer seat belt wards.
to the side trim.
› Fold the seat backrest › Move the headrest up
to the stop.
back up.
The release handle must
› Hold safety button A
and, at the same time,
audibly click into place.
push safety button B
› Check that the seat into the opening with a
backrest has locked in flat-head screwdriver
place. The pin A must and remove the headrest.
not be visible.
Inserting
› Insert the headrest into the seat backrest.
Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Front armrest 35

The safety button must click into place. Open from the luggage compartment
› Press the store button.
Front armrest › Open the lid.
Settings
Adjusting the height
› Raise the backrest to
one of the locked posi-
tions.
Folding down
› Raise the backrest be- Closing
yond the highest › Fold back the lid from the passenger compartment
locked position and until it clicks into place.
fold it down again.
After closing, the red mark on the back of the cov-
er above the safety button must not be visible.
WARNING
Rear armrest The through-loading channel is only intended for
Settings transporting skis in a secured through-loading bag.

› Fold down the armrest.


The folded-down arm- Seat heating and ventilation
rest can be used as a What you should be mindful of
storage table.
WARNING
Risk of burns!
▶ Do not switch on the seat heater for persons with
limited perception of pain or temperature.
NOTICE
Risk of seat damage!
▶ Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise puncture
Load-through device them.
▶ Do not turn on the heater in the following situa-
Open and close tions.
▶ The seat is not occupied.
Open from the passenger compartment
▶ There are objects on the seat, such as a child
› Fold down the armrest. seat.
› Press the lid in the up- ▶ There are additional seat covers or protective
per area and pull on
covers on the seat.
the handle.
› Open the lid.
Conditions
✓ The engine is running.

Operation
Depending on the equipment, the front seats can be
heated or heated and ventilated. The outer rear seats
can only be heated.
Models without seat ventilation
› Press the or key to switch on the seat heating.
36 Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Steering wheel

The seat heating is switched on with maximum heat- › Adjust the steering
ing output. By repeatedly pressing the button, the wheel to the desired
heating output is reduced until it is switched off. position.
The heat output is determined by the number of illu-
minated indicator lights that are shown in the key or
in the Climatronic display.
Models with seat ventilation
› Press the or button. › Press the safety lever
as far as it will go.
The Infotainment screen displays a menu for operat-
ing the front seat heater and ventilation.
› Adjust the heating output/ventilation level.
If the seat heating and ventilation functions are
both switched on at the same time, the heating out-
put/ventilation level can only be adjusted in the Info-
tainment screen. Troubleshooting
Display heating output/ventilation level from the Power assisted steering faulty
button illuminates - total failure of the power assisted
Seat heating switched on steering, failure of steering assistance
Seat ventilation switched on
Seat heating and ventilation switched on › Turn off the ignition, start the engine and drive a
few meters.
› If the indicator light does not go out, stop driv-
Settings ing. Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Lock increases in heat output for the rear seat illuminates - partial failure of the power assis-
heater ted steering, possible reduction in power
› To turn the function on or off, press the but- steering
ton on the Climatronic / in the Infotain-
› Turn off the ignition, start the engine and drive a
ment screen. few meters.
Or: › If the indicator light does not go out, continue
› Tap on / in the Infotainment driving, exercising appropriate caution. Seek the
screen. help of a specialist garage.
When the function is switched on, the heating out- Steering column lock faulty
put can only be turned down. flashing
Message regarding a fault in the steering col-
umn lock
Steering wheel
› Stop the vehicle.
Adjust the steering wheel › Seek the help of a specialist garage.
WARNING After switching off the ignition, it is then no longer
Risk of an accident! possible to switch on the ignition, to lock the steer-
▶ Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. ing and to switch on the electrical consumers.
› Swing the safety lever flashing
downwards. Message regarding a fault in the steering lock
› You may continue driving, exercising appropriate
caution. Seek the help of a specialist garage.

Steering column lock not unlocked


flashing
Message concerning the required steering
wheel movement
› Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth.
› If the steering does not unlocked, stop the vehicle
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Heated steering wheel 37

Interior rear-view mirror


Heated steering wheel Operation

Conditions Interior mirror with manual darkening

✓ The engine is running. A Mirror is not dark-


ened
B Mirror darkens
Operation
Turn steering wheel heating on/off
Applies to Climatronic.
› Press the key on the Climatronic, tap the / Interior mirror with automatic darkening
on the Infotainment screen to turn on steering Darkening of the mirror is automatically controlled
wheel heating. through the sensors in the mirror once the engine is
Or: started.
CAUTION
› tap / in the Infotainment screen, to
turn on steering wheel heating. Risk of an accident!
A glowing display e.g. a mobile phone or navigation
Adjust the heating output of the heated steering device may affect the function of the automatic mir-
wheel ror darkening.
› Tap Heated steering wheel on the Infotainment screen ▶ Do not attach these devices close to the mirror.
to adjust the heating level.
The output level of the heating is indicated by the
number of illuminated warning lights in the Exterior mirror
switch. Operation
Positions of the rotary knob and adjustment of the
Settings mirror surface
The mirrors can be folded manually or electrically,
Steering wheel heating together with driver's seat
depending on the equipment.
heating
Applies to Climatronic. Adjust the left mir-
When the function is switched on, pressing the but- ror
ton for the driver's seat heating also turns steering Switch off operation
wheel heating on or off. Adjust the right mir-
ror
› Press the button on the Climatronic in the
Fold mirror in elec-
Infotainment screen and select the menu item for
coupling the seat and steering wheel heating. trically (to fold back
out, select a differ-
Or: ent position)
› Tap on in the Infotainment screen and Heat the mirror
select the menu item for the coupling of the seat when the engine is running
and steering wheel heating.
Adjusting the mirror surface
When the function is switched on, the function sur- › Select position or .
face is displayed in the Infotainment screen. This › Turn the rotary knob in the direction of the arrows.
can be used to switch steering wheel heating on or
off. Folding electrically folding mirrors automatically
The mirrors fold in when the vehicle is locked and
fold back out when the vehicle is unlocked, if this
feature is activated.
Locking of the vehicle is not indicated by the fact
that the mirrors fold in. Locking of the vehicle is indi-
cated by the turn signal lights flashing.
38 Seats, steering wheel and mirror › Exterior mirror

Manually foldable mirrors


› Fold the mirror towards the side window by apply-
ing pressure with your hand.
Troubleshooting
Setting the mirror surfaces synchronously
When adjusting the mirror surface of the driver's Electric mirror operation impaired
mirror, the mirror surface of the front passenger's › Adjust the mirror surface by pressing it lightly with
mirror is adjusted at the same time if this function is your finger.
activated.
CAUTION
Mirror with memory function Risk of burns!
Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's Do not touch heated exterior mirror surfaces.
seat.
The current setting for the exterior mirror surfaces
can be stored in the memory of the driver's
seat » page 33 or the remote key » page 21.
Lower the passenger mirror surface when revers-
ing
Valid for vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's
seat.
The mirror surface of the passenger mirror takes in
the memory of the driver's seat » page 33 or the re-
mote key » page 21 stored position to improve visi-
bility when reversing.
Conditions
✓ The function can be activated in Infotainment.
✓ The mirror position is saved.
✓ The reverse gear is engaged.
✓ The adjustment knob is in the position.
The mirror automatically resumes the home position
when driving forward at speeds above 15 km/h or af-
ter the ignition is switched off.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
The exterior mirrors make objects appear farther
away. Use the rear-view mirror to determine the dis-
tance from vehicles behind.
NOTICE
Danger of mirror damage!
If the electrically foldable mirror is swung out by ex-
ternal influences (e.g. due to an impact during ma-
noeuvring), fold the mirror in using the rotary knob
and wait for an audible folding sound.

Settings
Activation or deactivation of the automatic folding
of the exterior mirrors, the synchronous adjustment
of the mirror surfaces as well as the lowering of the
passenger-side mirror surface when reversing are
carried out in the Infotainment in the following
menu.

Or:
Restraint systems and airbags › Seat belts 39

Restraint systems and airbags Operation


Fastening the seat belt
Seat belts
› Grasp the buckle latch
Functionality and slowly pull the belt
over the chest and pel-
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer very
vis towards the buckle.
good protection in the event of an accident. They re-
duce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of › Insert the buckle latch
survival in the event of a major accident. into the buckle until
there is an audible
WARNING click.
The seat belts must not be removed or altered in

any other way.
› Pull on the belt to en-
sure that the buckle is
▶ Do not attempt to repair the seat belts yourself. securely fastened.
Have a damaged seat belt replaced immediately by
a specialist garage. Unfastening the seat belt

Automatic belt retractor › Grasp the buckle latch


The automatic belt retractor locks the belt when the and release it by press-
belt is pulled jerkily or when the belt is being rolled ing the red button.
up violently. › Hold the belt so it does
not twist when rolling
WARNING up.
If the seat belt does not lock when pulled jerkily,
have the retractor checked by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
The safety of the driver, front passenger and passen-
gers on the outer rear seats who are wearing their
seat belts is enhanced by the belt tensioners fitted
Setting
to the inertia reels on the front and rear external seat
belts. › Move the seat belt
If there is a collision with a certain severity, the seat height adjuster up-
belt is tightened by the belt tensioner so that unwan- wards to increase the
ted body movement is prevented. height.
The belt tensioner can also be deployed when the
seat belt is not fastened.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of a
roll-over, minor collisions or in accidents in which no
major forces are produced.
Smoke is released when the belt tensioner is de- › Press the safety button
ployed. This does not indicate a vehicle. and move the seat belt
Reversible belt tensioner height adjuster down
Vehicles with a proactive occupant protection sys- to reduce the height.
tem include reversible belt tensioners » page 177. › After adjustment, firm-
The reversible belt pretensioners increase safety for ly pull on the belt to
the belted driver and front passenger by automati- ensure that the seat
cally tightening the seat belt tightly over the body in belt height adjuster has
critical driving situations and then releasing it again. correctly locked in
place and that the belt
Status display in the instrument cluster display is locked securely.
- front seat belt not fastened

- a rear seat belt is not fastened

- a rear seat belt is fastened


40 Restraint systems and airbags › Child seat

Troubleshooting the seat. This could cause serious injury to the child,
even death.
Blocked belt retractor
This is also indicated by the following stickers.
› Grasp the strap in the Sticker on the passenger
middle and pull quickly
in the direction of the sun visor.
arrow.
› Hold the strap and let
it roll up slowly.
› Pull on the strap to see
if the retractor is
working properly. Sticker on the central
body pillar on the pas-
› If the strap is still senger side.
blocked, repeat the un-
locking procedure once or twice.
› If the strap is still blocked, seek the help of a spe-
cialist garage.

Child seat
What you should be mindful of
The following instructions must be followed when
For how to install and use the child seat, please note using a child seat on the front passenger seat.
the instructions in this Owner's Manual as well as the
instructions of the child seat manufacturer. ▶ When using a rear-facing child seat, the front pas-
senger airbag must be deactivated.
For safety reasons, we always recommend that chil-
▶ If possible, adjust the front passenger seat back-
dren are transported on the back seats. Carry chil-
rest so that it is vertical, to ensure that there is se-
dren on the front passenger seat only in exceptional
cure contact between the backrest and the child
cases.
seat.
Child seats according to standard ECE-R 44 the Eu- ▶ If possible, move the front passenger seat back-
ropean Economic Commission. wards so that there is no contact between the
Child seats according to standard ECE-R 44 are front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
marked with the test symbol: large E in a circle, with ▶ Adjust the height-adjustable front passenger seat
the test number below. as much as possible.
We recommend using child seats from the ŠKODA ▶ Adjust the front passenger seat belt as high up as
Genuine Accessories range. These child seats have possible.
been developed and tested for use in ŠKODA vehi- WARNING
cles. They meet the standard ECE-R 44. Risk of the seat belt causing a neck injury to the
WARNING transported child!
▶ When installing the child seat on the rear seat, ad- ▶ For child seats in groups 2 and 3, ensure that the
just the front seat so that there is no contact be- guide fitting attached to the child seat headrest is
tween the front seat and the child seat or the child positioned in front of or at the same height as the
carried in the child seat. seat belt height adjuster on the central body pillar.
▶ If the headrest prevents the child seat from being ▶ Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt
fitted, adjust the headrest to the highest position. so that the belt passes through the guide fitting
without kinking and is not bent over the edge of
the guide fitting.
Using a child seat on the front passenger seat WARNING
As soon as the rear-facing child seat is no longer be-
Never use a child seat in which the child is carried
ing used on the front passenger seat, activate the
with his or her back to the direction of travel on a
front passenger airbag again.
seat protected by an active airbag placed in front of
Restraint systems and airbags › Fasteners for child seats 41

Recommended child seats


Grouping of child seats according to standard ECE-R 44.

Group Weight of the child


0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
1 9-18 kg
2 15-25 kg
3 22-36 kg
Recommended child seats
Approval number
Group Manufacturer Type Attachment Order number
(E1 ...)
0+
Britax Römer Baby Safe Plus Isofix base frame 1ST019907 04 301146
up to 13 kg
1 ISOFIX and TOP
Britax Römer Duo Plus TT DDA000006 04 301133
9-18 kg TETHER
2-3 Britax Römer Kidfix XP a) ISOFIX 000019906K 04 301198
15-36 kg Britax Römer Kidfix II XP ISOFIX 000019906L 04 301323
a)
For optimum protection, especially in the event of a side impact, it is recommended that you use this child
seat complete with the backrest.

Fasteners for child seats


Use of child seats
Overview of usability of child seats according to standard ECE-R 16.
Child seats that use the ISOFIX System
Passenger seat
Passenger seat
Size category of with deactiva- Outer rear seats
Group with activated Middle rear seat
child seat a) ted front airbag- c)
front airbag b) b)

0
E X X IL X
up to 10 kg
E
0+
D X X IL X
up to 13 kg
C
D
C
1
B X X IL X
9-18 kg
B1
A
2
- X X IL X
15-25 kg
3
- X X IL X
22-36 kg
a)
The size category of the child seat is indicated on the child seat plate.
b)
If the passenger seat is equipped with ISOFIX system retaining eyes, it is suitable for the installation of an
ISOFIX child seat with “Semi-Universal" approval.
c)
The seat is suitable for an ISO / R3 fixing.

IL The seat is suitable for the ISOFIX child seats with "Semi-Universal" approval.
42 Restraint systems and airbags › Fasteners for child seats

X The seat is not equipped with eyelets for the ISOFIX System.
i-Size
Passenger seat with acti- Passenger seat with deac-
Outer rear seats Middle rear seat
vated front airbag tivated front airbag
X X i-U X

i-UF The seat is suitable for forward- and backward-facing i-Size child seats of the "Universal” category.
X The seat is not suitable for i-Sizechild seats of the "Universal" category.
Child seat fastened with a safety belt
Passenger seat with Passenger seat with
Group activated front air- deactivated front air- Outer rear seats Middle rear seat
bag bag
0
X U a) U U
up to 10 kg
0+
X U a) U U
up to 13 kg
1
UF U U U
9-18 kg
2
UF U U U
15-25 kg
3
UF U U U
22-36 kg
a)
Adjust the height-adjustable front passenger seat as much as possible.

U The seat is suitable for the child seat category "Universal” and is permitted for use in this weight group.
UF The seat is suitable for forward-facing child seats in the "Universal” category and is permitted for use in
this weight group.
X The seat is not suitable for children in this weight group.

Overview › Remove the covers be-


fore installing the child
ISOFIX seat.
WARNING
▶ Do not attach any other child seats, straps or ob-
jects to the holding eyelets provided for the instal-
lation of a child seat using the ISOFIX system.
The ISOFIX system allows for the fast and secure in-
stallation of the child seat. The eyelets for installing
the child seat using the ISOFIX system are located
on the outer rear seats and possibly on the front pas- TOP TETHER
senger seat. WARNING
A child seat that uses the ISOFIX system can only be ▶ Child seats that use the TOP TETHER system
installed in the vehicle if it is approved for this vehi- should only be used on those seats that are fitted
cle type. Further information can be obtained from a with holding eyes bearing the TOP TETHER sym-
ŠKODA partner or from a list of vehicles enclosed bol.
with the child seat. ▶ Only attach one fastening strap on the child seat to
the holding eyelet in the TOP TETHER system.
▶ When attaching the child seat with the TOP TETH-
ER system, no other object must be attached to
the TOP TETHER system holding eyelet.
Restraint systems and airbags › Airbags 43

airbags will not be deployed despite possible serious


vehicle damage.

Airbag overview

Holding eyelets on the rear seats


The belt fastened into the TOP TETHER system re-
stricts the movement of the upper part of the child
seat. The holding eyelets for attaching the belt are
located on the outer rear seats A , as well as on the
middle rear seat B when necessary. A Front airbags
B Side airbags - front
Airbags C Head airbags
D Side airbags - rear
Usage
E Driver's knee airbag
The airbag system offers additional occupant protec-
tion in the event of severe frontal and side collisions, The installation location of the airbags is marked
as a supplement to the seat belts. with the lettering .
The best possible protective effect of the airbag is WARNING
achieved only when the seat belt is also worn. The Danger of a functional restriction of the side airbags!
airbag system is no substitute for the seat belts. ▶ Do not exert excessive forces, e.g. impacts, on the
seat backs.
▶ Have damaged seat covers at the installation loca-
Functionality tion of the side airbags repaired by a specialist ga-
When sinking into the inflated airbag, the forward rage.
movement of the body is damped and the risk of in- Deactivating the airbags
jury is reduced. We recommend having airbags other than the front
As the airbags inflate, smoke is released. This passenger airbag deactivated » page 44, Opera-
does not indicate a vehicle. tionby a ŠKODA service partner.

Function condition Deactivation of the airbags is provided for the fol-


✓ Ignition switched on. lowing cases, for example.
▶ If the driver's seat adjustment is correct, the dis-
Airbag deployment in the event of an accident
tance of at least 25 cm between the centre of the
Airbag deployment is influenced by many factors.
steering wheel and the sternum can not be main-
The deceleration rate at the time of impact is crucial.
tained.
WARNING ▶ Additional operating controls for a physically disad-
Danger of serious or fatal injuries! vantaged driver are installed in the vehicle.
▶ Maintain the correct seating position. The vehicle has special seats, e.g. orthopaedic

▶ Do not keep your limbs in the deployment area of seats without side airbags.
the airbags.
illuminates for 4 seconds after the ignition is
In the following situations, no airbags are deployed. switched on and then flashes for 12 seconds -
▶ Minor frontal and side collisions. Airbag or belt tensioner deactivated with the diag-
nostic device
▶ Rear-end collision.
Message regarding the deactivated airbag or belt
▶ Vehicle rollover. tensioner
If the measured deceleration rate is below the refer- WARNING
ence values programmed into the control unit, the If an airbag is deactivated during the sale of the vehi-
cle, inform the buyer!
44 Restraint systems and airbags › Key switch for the front passenger airbag

Troubleshooting › Close the storage compartment on the passenger's


side.
Airbag system faulty
illuminates
› Turn on the ignition and check that the front pas-
senger airbag indicator lights are lit up.
Message regarding an airbag fault
Status display in the instrument cluster display
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. lights up 4 secs after the ignition is switched
on – passenger front airbag switched off

Key switch for the front passenger Indicator lights


airbag ▶ After switching on the igni-
tion, the two indicator lights
Usage
light up briefly.
Deactivation of the front passenger airbag is provi- ▶ If the system is OK, both of
ded for the following cases, for example. the indicator lights go out.
▶ A rear-facing child seat is mounted on the front ▶ One of the indicator lights then lights up again de-
passenger seat. pending on the position of the key switch.
▶ The vehicle has special seats, e.g. orthopaedic Lights up - front passenger airbag switch-
seats without side airbags. ed off
Lights up 65 secs after the ignition is
switched on – passenger front airbag
What you should be mindful of switched on
WARNING
Danger of fault in the passenger airbag deactivation
system! Troubleshooting
▶ Only deactivate the airbag when the ignition is Key switch for airbag deactivation is faulty
switched off! and flash together
WARNING The front passenger airbag will not be de-
Danger of unexpected deployment of the passenger ployed in the event of an accident!
airbags in an accident! › Have the airbag system checked by a specialist ga-
▶ If the front passenger airbag has been deactivated rage immediately.
with the key, do not leave the key in the key switch
while driving. Vibrations can cause the key to turn
in the slot and activate the airbag!

Operation
Before switching off/switching on the front pas-
senger airbag
› Remove the key bit.
Switch front passenger front airbag on/off
› Switch off the ignition.
› Open the storage com-
partment on the pas-
senger's side.
› Insert the key bit into
the slot in the key
switch as far as it will
go.
› To Switch off, carefully
rotate the key switch
into the position .
› To Switch on, carefully rotate the key switch into
the position .
› Remove the key bit from the slot.
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Exterior lighting 45

Lighting, windscreen wipers and Operation


washers Switching off the
lights except the
Exterior lighting daytime running
lights
Functionality
Switching the low
Unless otherwise stated, the light works when the beam on/off auto-
ignition is switched on. matically
Switching on the
Daytime running lights
parking lights
The daytime running lights illuminate the area in
front of the vehicle. Switching on the low
beam
For vehicles for certain markets, they also illuminate
the rear vehicle area. Main beam
The high beam works when the low beam is on.
Operating conditions
✓ The lights switch is in position , or . A Switch on main
beam - lights up
Switching the low beam on/off automatically
B Switch off high
The low beam is automatically switched on or off de-
beam - goes out /
pending on the lighting conditions.
Switch on flasher - il-
Operating conditions luminates
✓ The light switch is in the position.
The automatic headlight circuit is indicated by the il- CAUTION
lumination of the symbol in the light switch. Risk of an accident!
▶ Do not dazzle other road users with the high beam.
Switching low beam on/off automatically in rain
Operating conditions Turn signal
✓ The light switch is in the position.
A Switch on right turn
✓ The function is activated. signal - flashing
✓ The windscreen wipers are switched on for lon- B Switch on left turn
ger than 30 seconds. signal - flashing
The automatic headlight circuit is indicated by the il-
lumination of the symbol in the light switch.
Full LED headlights
When the light switch is in position , the head-
lights provide the best possible beam of light in front
of the vehicle.
Turn signal - convenience signalling
CORNER function Convenience signalling enables three flashes of the
The CORNER function ensures the illumination of turn signal lights without having to move the lever
the area near the vehicle in the turning direction. up or down.
Operating conditions › Tap the control lever up or down.
✓ The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels The corresponding turn signal lights flash three
are steered sharply. times.
✓ The low beam is switched on.
Tap the lever in the opposite direction ahead of
✓ The fog lights are not switched on. time to stop signalling.
✓ The driving speed is lower than 40 km/h.
When no light is switched on
The symbol in the light switch may also light up in
the instrument cluster, indicating that it is necessary
to switch on the light.
illuminates
› Switch on the light.
46 Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Exterior lighting

Fog light The light may switch off automatically if the battery
is low. If the two-sided parking light is switched on
1 Fog light - lights up
when the ignition is switched off, the light will not
switch off automatically.
2 Rear fog light - lights
up When the parking light is switched on, an acoustic
warning signal sounds after the ignition is switched
› Turn the light switch to off and the driver's door is opened. After a few sec-
position . or . onds or after the driver's door is closed, the warning
› Pull the light switch to signal will stop.
the appropriate posi-
tion.
Settings
The rear fog light does not illuminate when an ac-
cessory is connected to the trailer socket. Activating/deactivating the automatic headlights
system in rain
The rear fog lamp automatically shuts off when
The function is activated or deactivated in the fol-
the boot lid is opened.
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
The indicator light stays on.
Hazard warning light system
› To switch on or off, press the button in the cen- Or:
tral part of the dash panel.
When the hazard warning system is on and the turn Activating/deactivating convenience signalling
signal is switched on, the hazard warning lights will The function is activated or deactivated in the fol-
be switched off temporarily and only the turn signal lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
will flash on the relevant side of the vehicle.
The hazard warning lights can be switched on auto-
matically during hard braking. The hazard warning Or:
lights are then switched off again automatically
when starting off or accelerating.
Headlight range control of the LED headlights
One-sided parking light The headlight range control is carried out in the Info-
The one-sided parking light allows one side of the tainment system in the following menu.
parked vehicle to be illuminated through activation
of the corresponding sidelights.
Or:
A Switch on the side-
lights on the right
B Switch on the side- › Select the position of the control according to the
lights on the left vehicle's current load status.
› Switch off the ignition. Front seats occupied, luggage compartment
empty
› Move the lever to the All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty
appropriate position.
All seats occupied, luggage compartment loaded
› Lock the vehicle. Driver's seat occupied, luggage compartment
When the parking light is loaded
switched on, an acoustic
In the event of another vehicle loading condition, the
warning signal sounds and the driver's door is
positions . . can be used.
opened. After a few seconds or after the driver's
door is closed, the warning signal will stop. For the Full LED headlights, the headlight range
control is adjusted automatically.
Double-sided parking light
The two-sided parking light allows the parked vehi- WARNING
cle to be illuminated through activation of the side- Risk of an accident!
lights. An incorrectly adjusted headlight range can cause in-
sufficient vehicle lighting or can dazzle other road
› Turn on the ignition. users.
› Turn the light switch to position . ▶ Adjust the headlight range correctly.
› Switch off the ignition.
› Lock the vehicle.
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME exterior lighting 47

Converting the Full LED headlights for the oppo- COMING HOME, LEAVING HOME
site direction of traffic exterior lighting
› Switch on travel mode in the Infotainment in the
following menu. Functionality
The COMING HOME function turns on the light after
Or: turning off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
The LEAVING HOME function switches on the light
when unlocking the vehicle with the wireless remote
Adapt LED headlights for the opposite direction of
control.
traffic
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Operating conditions
Troubleshooting ✓ Visibility has worsened.
Turn signal light defective ✓ The light switch is in the position.
flashes faster - turn signal light on the right de-
fective
Settings
› Check the turn signal light on the right.
This function is set in the following menu in the Info-
flashes faster - turn signal light on the left de- tainment system.
fective
› Check the turn signal light on the left. Or:
does not flash when the trailer is hitched -
trailer turn signal light defective
› Check the trailer lighting.
Light Assist high-beam assist system
Light bulb or LED bulb is defective
or illuminates Functionality
Information appears in the display regarding The high beam assist system automatically switches
the affected lights. the high beam on and off.
› Replace the defective bulb. WARNING
› In case of a defective LED lights, contact a special- Risk of an accident!
ist garage for help.
▶ If necessary, manually switch the high beam on or
off.
The headlights are misted up on the inside
Inside the headlights, moisture may occur. This is not
a defect. Operating conditions
Malfunction of the automatic headlight circuit
✓ The system is activated.
› Clean the windscreen in the area of the rain/light
sensor. ✓ The light switch is in the position.
✓ The driving speed is higher than 30 km/h (for
Beam of light in front of the vehicle has shortened some countries, higher than 60 km/h).
Headlight defective.
✓ The low beam is switched on.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Driving lights defective
If a message regarding the failed driving lights is dis-
played, the light will work in emergency mode.
› Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
48 Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Dynamic Light Assist headlight assist system

Operation Operation
Switching on Switching on
› Push the lever in the › Push the lever in the
direction of the arrow. direction of the arrow.
in the instrument Illuminated in the instru-
cluster lights up. ment cluster is .

Switching off Switching off


› Manually switch the high beam on or off. › Manually switch the high beam on or off.

Settings Function restriction


Activation/deactivation The system may dazzle other road users if their
The function is activated or deactivated in the fol- headlights/lights are not detected for the following
lowing menu in the Infotainment system. reasons, for example.
▶ The headlights/lights of oncoming vehicles are
Or: covered by crash barriers, for example.
▶ The headlamps/lights of the oncoming or preced-
ing vehicle are dirty or damaged. The system can
also recognize a vehicle as a single-lane means of
transport.
Dynamic Light Assist headlight assist
system
Settings
Functionality
Activation/deactivation
The headlight assist system automatically switches The Dynamic Light Assist system is activated or de-
the high beam on and off. activated in the following menu in the Infotainment
When the high beam is switched on, it adjusts the system.
light cone so that the drivers of oncoming and pre-
ceding vehicles are not dazzled.
Or:
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶ If necessary, manually switch the high beam on or
off.
Replace light bulbs
What you should be mindful of
Operating conditions
DIY replacement of the following bulbs is possible.
✓ The system is activated. Have the remaining light sources replaced by a spe-
✓ The light switch is in the position. cialist garage.
✓ The low beam is switched on. The new bulb must conform to the specification of
✓ The system has detected that the vehicle is not in the original light bulb. The name of the bulb is
an urban area. marked on the bulb socket.
NOTICE
Danger of headlight damage due to the ingress of
water and dirt!
▶ Always fit the protective cap on the headlight cor-
rectly after changing a bulb.
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Replace light bulbs 49

Conditions for changing a bulb › Turn the defective bulb


in the socket and re-
✓ Ignition switched off. move it.
✓ Light switched off. › Insert a new light bulb
into the socket and se-
cure the light bulb by
Rear turn signal and reversing lights turning it in the direc-
Loosen and remove the light tion of .

› Remove the cover with › Insert the socket with


the new bulb into the
the bracket from the
light so that the guide
tool kit.
lugs on the socket are aligned with the corre-
sponding openings in the light.
› Turn the socket clockwise to secure.
Insert and fix the light
› Insert the connector into the light until it clicks into
place.

› Unscrew the screws


A and remove the
light.

› Insert the lamp with the holes A onto the pins B


› Press the lock mecha- in the body.
nisms on the connec-
tor and remove the NOTICE
connector. Risk of damage to the electrical system due to water
ingress!
▶ Make sure that the seal is inserted correctly when
installing the light C .
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the electrical system!
▶ Make sure that the cables between the light and
Replacing the light bulb the body are not pinched when the light is inserted.

› Turn the corresponding › Screw the light into place.


socket with the bulb › Fit the cover of the light, ensuring it clicks into
and remove it. place.

Front turn signal


› Remove the protective
cap from the headlight.
50 Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Interior lighting

› Remove the base with Automatic switch off


the bulb. The light switches off when one of the following
events occurs.
▶ The vehicle is locked.
▶ The ignition is switched on.
▶ About 30 seconds after all the doors have been
closed.
Automatic switching on/off of the footwell light-
ing
› Change the bulb in the The lighting only works when the dipped or parking
socket. lights are on.
The lighting is also switched on automatically after
opening the door (e.g. when getting in or out).

Settings
The footwell lighting is set in the following menu in
the Infotainment system.
Interior lighting
› Insert the socket with
the light bulb into the Or:
light so that the fixing Interior lighting
lugs A fit into the re-
cesses on the head-
light. Interior ambient light
› Fit the protective cap
on the headlight again. Usage
The ambient lighting ensures that various areas of
the vehicle interior are lit.
The lighting only works when the dipped or parking
Interior lighting lights are on.
Operation The lighting is also switched on automatically after
opening the door (e.g. when getting in or out).
Operation of the lighting
Depending on the equipment:
Switching on Settings
Turn on/turn off
Rear lighting The ambient lighting is set in the Infotainment sys-
Switching off tem, in the following menu.
Reading lights
Automatic switch on and switch off
Or:
Depending on the equipment, the rear light can be
switched on and off automatically together with the
front light.
When the front light is switched off, the rear light Windscreen wipers and washers
can be switched on and off manually.
Operating conditions
Switching on automatically
The light switches on when one of the following ✓ Engine compartment flap closed.
events occurs. ✓ Boot door closed.
▶ The vehicle is unlocked. ✓ Ignition is switched on.
▶ One of the doors is opened.
▶ The ignition key is removed.
Lighting, windscreen wipers and washers › Windscreen wipers and washers 51

Operation Wiping

WARNING Switching off


Risk of an accident!
Automatic rear window wiping
At low temperatures, windscreen washer fluid can
When the windscreen wipers are switched on, the
freeze on the windscreen and restrict visibility.
rear window is automatically wiped when the re-
▶ Only use the windscreen washer when the wind-
verse gear is engaged.
screen is warm.
Wipe and wash the windscreen
Settings
Activating/deactivating automatic wiping
The functions for automatic rear window wiping and
automatic wiping in the rain can be activated and de-
activated in the following menu in the Infotainment
system.

Or:

Fast wiping
Slow wiping Refilling windscreen washer fluid
Depending on the equipment:
WARNING
▶ Intermittent wiping
Risk of an accident!
▶ Automatic wiping controlled by the rain sensor ▶ Use windscreen washer fluid that is suitable for the
Switching off weather conditions.
Tip-wiping (spring-loaded position) NOTICE
A Risk of damage to the windscreen washer system!
Setting the wiping speed for the position
▶ When refilling the washer fluid, do not remove the
Washing and wiping (spring-loaded position) strainer from the neck of the container.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the wind- NOTICE
screen washer nozzles of the windscreen can be Risk of damage to the headlights!
heated automatically after starting the engine. ▶ Only use washer fluid that does not attack polycar-
bonates.
Clean headlights
When the headlights are switched on, they are NOTICE
cleaned the first time and after every tenth wash of Risk of damage to engine compartment compo-
the windscreen. The cleaning interval can be set by a nents!
specialist company. ▶ Close the container after refilling the windscreen
washer fluid.
Wipe and wash the rear window
The windscreen washer tank is located in the engine
compartment » page 10.
The container can hold a volume of 3.1 litres and 4.7
litres for vehicles with a headlight cleaning system.
When the container is in the left-hand area of the
engine compartment, the volume of the container is
3.65 litres.

Troubleshooting

Washing and wiping the window (spring-loaded Windscreen washer fluid level too low
position) or illuminates
Washing the reversing camera (spring-loaded › Top up the windscreen washer fluid.
position)
52 Heating and air conditioning system › Manual air conditioning

Frozen windscreen wipers Heating and air conditioning


› Carefully remove frozen windscreen wipers from
the windscreen before switching on the ignition system
and free them from snow and ice.
Manual air conditioning
What you should be mindful of
Folding down windscreen wiper arms and
replacing windscreen wiper blades ▶ We recommend a difference of max. 5°C between
the outside temperature and the interior tempera-
Fold the windscreen wiper arms away from the ture.
windscreen
▶ We recommend switching the cooling system off
NOTICE about 10 minutes before the end of the journey to
Risk of damage to the windscreen wipers and the prevent odour formation.
engine compartment flap! ▶ Annual disinfection of the air conditioning is rec-
▶ Close the engine compartment flap before the ommended.
windscreen wiper arms are folded away from the
windscreen. WARNING
Danger of misting!
▶ Do not turn on the ignition when the windscreen
▶ Always keep the fan on.
wiper arms are folded away.
› Switch the ignition on and off again.
Operating conditions for the cooling system
› Within 10 seconds,
press the control lever ✓ The outside temperature is below 2 °C.
down and hold for ✓ The engine is running.
about 2 seconds.
✓ The blower is switched on.
The windscreen wiper
arms are in the folded
position. Overview of the controls for the manual air
› Fold the windscreen conditioning
wiper arms away from
the windscreen.
Replace the windscreen wiper blade
CAUTION
Risk of an accident!
▶ Change the windscreen wiper blades once or twice
a year.
› Fold the windscreen wiper arm away from the A Set the temperature
windscreen.
B Set the blower speed
› Press the catch and re-
move the wiper blade. C Set the direction of the air outlet
› Insert the new wiper Switch recirculated air mode on/off
blade until it clicks into
Switch the cooling system on/off
place.
› Fold the windscreen After pressing the button, the indicator light
wiper arm back onto in the button illuminates, even if the conditions for
the windscreen. switching on the cooling system are not met. The
› Turn on the ignition cooling system switches on when the conditions for
and push the control switching on the cooling system are met.
lever down. During operation of the air conditioning system,
there may be an automatic increase in the engine idle
speed.
Automatic activation of the cooling system
Automatic activation of the cooling system prevents
the windows from misting up. The system switches
on in the following cases.
Heating and air conditioning system › Climatronic automatic air conditioning system 53

▶ When the fan is on and the air distribution control- ✓ The engine is running.
ler is in the position. ✓ The blower is switched on.
In this case, the recirculation mode is switched off.
▶ If the air distribution controller is not in the posi-
Operation
tion, and recirculated air mode is switched on.
Recirculated air mode
The recirculation mode prevents contaminated out-
side air getting into the interior of the vehicle.
Briefly switching on recirculation mode can increase
the cooling effect.
Under certain circumstances, the recirculation
mode may be switched on or off automatically.
WARNING A Set the temperature for the left side
Risk of an accident! B Set the temperature for the right side
In recirculation mode, there is no fresh air supply Set the direction of the air outlet
C
from the outside. This can result in loss of driver at-
tention and fogging up of windows. D Set the blower speed
▶ Keep the recirculation mode switched on for a E Set the temperature for the left side
short time only.
F Set the temperature for the right side
G Depending on the equipment:
Troubleshooting ▶ Switch auxiliary heating and ventilation
on/off
Water under the vehicle
When the cooling system is switched on, water can ▶ Use of residual engine heat for maintain-
drip off the air conditioning system. This is not a leak. ing heat in the vehicle interior

Fogging It is possible to switch on within 30 minutes


of switching off the ignition.
› Increase the blower speed and switch on the cool-
ing system. Switching off the function takes about 30 mi-
nutes.
Automatic switch-off of the cooling system
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling H Interior temperature sensor
system may switch off automatically. This ensures Switch recirculated air mode on/off
sufficient engine cooling.
Switch the windscreen ventilation/defrosting
mode on/off
Climatronic automatic air conditioning Operate Climatronic in the Infotainment sys-
system tem
Switch maintenance of the interior tempera-
What you should be mindful of ture on/off according to the temperature set-
ting for the driver's side
▶ We recommend a difference of max. 5°C between
the outside temperature and the interior tempera- Press - Switch on automatic mode
ture. This function keeps the temperature constant
▶ We recommend switching the cooling system off and prevents the windows from misting.
about 10 minutes before the end of the journey to Hold - Maintain the interior temperature in ac-
prevent odour formation. cordance with the temperature setting for the
▶ Annual disinfection of the air conditioning is rec- driver side (SYNC function)
ommended. Switch the cooling system on/off
WARNING
With a temperature setting outside of the number
Danger of misting!
range, one of the following icons will be displayed in
▶ Always keep the fan on.
the Climatronic display.
LO Maximum cooling power
Operating conditions for the cooling system HI Maximum heating power

✓ The outside temperature is below 2 °C.


54 Heating and air conditioning system › Auxiliary heating and ventilation

During operation of the air conditioning system, Further Climatronic settings


there may be an automatic increase in the engine idle › To make further settings, press the button on
speed. the Climatronic , tap on in the Infotainment
screen.
Recirculated air mode
The recirculation mode prevents contaminated out- ▶ Applies to Infotainment Swing.
side air getting into the Interior of the vehicle. Climate profile - Setting the operating power in auto-
Briefly switching on recirculation mode can increase matic mode.
the cooling effect. ▶ Automatic air recirculation - Automatic re-circulated air
WARNING mode on/off.
Risk of an accident! ▶ Automatic supplementary heater - Switch fast interior heating
In recirculation mode, there is no fresh air supply on/off.
from the outside. This can result in loss of driver at- ▶ Automatic windscreen heating - Switch automatic wind-
tention and fogging up of windows. screen heating on/off.
▶ Keep the recirculation mode switched on for a
short time only.
Troubleshooting

Settings Water under the vehicle


When the cooling system is switched on, water can
Displaying the settings menu drip off the air conditioning system. This is not a leak.
› Tap the button on the Climatronic.
Fogging
Or: › Increase the blower speed and switch on the cool-
› Tap on in the Infotainment screen. ing system.
Automatic switch-off of the cooling system
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling
system may switch off automatically. This ensures
sufficient engine cooling.

Auxiliary heating and ventilation


Usage
The auxiliary heater heats the vehicle interior and the
A Set the temperature for the left side engine.
B Set the temperature for the right side The auxiliary ventilation makes it possible to supply
C Set operating power in automatic mode fresh air to the vehicle interior when the engine is
switched off. As a result, the interior temperature is
D Select Climatronic mode
lowered, e.g. when the vehicle is parked in the sun.
E Cooling system, switching circulating air oper-
ation on/off, setting blower speed and air dis-
tribution What you should be mindful of
F Set the temperature at the back
DANGER
Switch Climatronic on/off Risk of poisoning!
Switch maintenance of the interior tempera- ▶ The auxiliary heater must not be operated in en-
ture on/off according to the temperature set- closed spaces.
ting for the driver's side DANGER
The function reduces the penetration of pollu- Risk of fire!
tants into the vehicle interior. At the same ▶ Switch off the auxiliary heater before refuelling.
time, the air is both circulated and cleaned. ▶ The exhaust pipe for the auxiliary heater is located
The air purification process is displayed in the on the underside of the vehicle. Therefore, do not
Infotainment. stop the vehicle in places where the exhaust gases
For proper operation, the doors and windows could come into contact with easily flammable ma-
must be closed. terials, e.g. dry grass, spilled fuel etc.
› To turn on/off, tap active.
Heating and air conditioning system › Auxiliary heating and ventilation 55

Functionality
The system heats or ventilates the vehicle interior Or:
depending on the settings of the air conditioning
system and the air outlet nozzles before the ignition
Show menu for vehicles with Climatronic
is switched off.
› Press the key on the Climatronic control pan-
The system consumes fuel from the fuel tank when el , tap in the Infotainment screen.
operating the heating.
Settings and information in the Infotainment
screen
Operating conditions
✓ The battery charge is sufficient.
✓ The fuel supply is sufficient, the instrument clus-
ter does not light up .

Operation
Switching on/off via the control panel of the air
conditioning system
› Press the button.
Switch on/off with the radio remote control
› Hold down the corresponding key.
A Indicator light

B Antenna
Switching off
Switching on
A Day and time when the vehicle is to be ready for
use
B Setting the heating/ventilation
C List of pre-selected times, activation / deactiva-
Hold the radio remote control with the antenna tion of the preset time
facing upwards. D Set the selected choice of time and the duration
Keep a distance of at least 2 m from the vehicle. (10-60 minutes)
NOTICE E When the heating is running, the windows are
Protect the remote control from moisture, strong vi- displayed in red
brations and direct sunlight. When ventilation is running, the windows are
Display of the radio remote control indicator light displayed in blue
▶ Lit up green for 2 seconds - switch on. F Currently displayed preset time
▶ Lit up red for 2 seconds - switch off.
G Activation of the currently displayed preset time
Range of the radio remote control H Setting the departure time
The range of the wireless remote control is a few
hundred meters when the battery is full. For exam- When selecting the day in the preset time, there is
ple, obstacles or weather conditions can reduce the an option between Sunday and Monday without the
range. specified day. When selecting this position, the vehi-
cle is ready for operation at the selected time with-
out having to select a day.
Set automatic switch on When automatic switching on is activated, the warn-
Show the menu for vehicles with manual air condi- ing light in the symbol button lights up after the ig-
tioning nition is turned off.
The automatic switching on is set in the following Only one preset time can be active. The activated
menu in the Infotainment system. preset time will be deactivated again after it has
56 Driver information system › Analogue instrument panel

started automatically. For the next start, activate one Driver information system
of the preset times.
Analogue instrument panel
Troubleshooting Overview
Steam in the engine compartment
In the engine compartment, steam may form during
the operation of the heater. This is not a defect.
Running the auxiliary heater after stopping the en-
gine
After switching off the system, the coolant pump
and the auxiliary heating will continue running a little
while longer in order to burn the remaining fuel in
the heating.
Indicator light in the radio remote control
A Tachometer with indicator lights
▶ Flashes green in a slow sequence - the switch-on
signal was not received. B Display with indicator lights
▶ Flashes red in a slow sequence - the switch-off sig- C Speedometer with indicator lights
nal was not received.
D Bar with warning lights
▶ Flashes green in rapid succession - the system is
locked. E Multifunction button:
▶ Setting the time
› Check the level of fuel.
▶ Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)
› If the fuel quantity is OK, seek the help of a spe-
cialist company. ▶ Show distance and days until next service ap-
pointment
▶ If the indicator is orange or flashing - the battery is
almost discharged. F Coolant temperature gauge
G Fuel gauge

Change the battery in the remote control In poor visibility and with dipped headlights off,
the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting is
› Use a thin screwdriver reduced to remind the driver to turn on the light.
to remove the cover in
the marked area.
› Open the cover and Settings
push it out.
Setting the language
The language is set in the following menu in the Info-
tainment system.

Resetting the odometer


› Use a screwdriver to
loosen the battery in › Briefly press the button in the instrument
the marked area. cluster.
› Replace the battery. Set time
› Insert the guard and › Press and hold the button in the instru-
push it until it audibly ment cluster until the Time menu item is
locks into place. shown in the display.
› Release the button, the display shows the hour set-
ting.
› Press the button repeatedly to set the hours.
› Wait 4 seconds, the display shows the minute set-
ting.
› Press the key repeatedly to set the minutes.
Driver information system › Digital instrument cluster 57

› Wait 4 seconds, the display shows the initial set- Set time
ting. The time is set in the following menu in the Infotain-
The time is set in the Infotainment system in the fol- ment system.
lowing menu.
Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster
Setting the brightness of the instrument cluster lighting
lighting The brightness of the instrument lighting is adjusted
The brightness of the instrument lighting is adjusted automatically according to the given lighting condi-
automatically according to the given lighting condi- tions.
tions. When low beam is switched on, the brightness of
When low beam is switched on, the brightness of the instruments lighting can be adjusted in the fol-
the instruments lighting can be adjusted in the fol- lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
Or:
Or:
Set the variant of the display
› Press the button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel to change the variant of the display pre-
Digital instrument cluster sentation.
Overview Select displayed variants
› Press and hold the button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
› Select the menu item Display layout and confirm.
› Select one of the following variants of the display
and confirm.

A Bar with indicator lights


B Coolant temperature gauge
C Fuel gauge
D Display - 5 possible display variants
E Additional Information
F Central display area
A Classic display
B Advanced display
Settings C Modern display
Setting the language D Basic display
The language is set in the following menu in the Info- E Sporty display
tainment system.
Choose display of additional information
› Press and hold the button on the multifunc-
Resetting the odometer tion steering wheel.
The odometer is reset in the following menu in the › Select and confirm one of the following prefix op-
Infotainment system. tions (the scope of the prefix options depends on
the type of Infotainment).
Or: ▶ Auto - Information depending on the selected
driving mode
58 Driver information system › Instrument cluster display

▶ Classic - Information about the selected gear Main menu items


and the current speed ▶ Driving data » page 59
▶ adjustable pre-selection options ▶ Assist systems - Activate/deactivate assist sys-
tems
Setting the pre-selection option for the display of
▶ Navigation - e.g. Display driving recommendations,
additional information
The pre-selection option for displaying additional in- compass, list of destination
formation is set in the Infotainment system in the ▶ Audio - Using radio and media
following menu. ▶ Telephone - Call list, accept or reject an incoming
call
Virtual Cockpit
▶ Vehicle - Vehicle condition » page 60
Or:
Virtual Cockpit
Operation
Operation via the control lever
A Press - Switch be-
tween menu
items/set values
Hold - Show main
menu
B Press - Confirm the
menu item
› Select the desired additional information in the A
Operation via the multifunction steering wheel
areas.
› The desired function area for the preselection op-
tion in the area B hold to save the selection (the
scope of the preset options depends on the type
of Infotainment).

Instrument cluster display


Display overview and overview of the menu
items in the main menu
Switch voice control on/off
Depending on the equipment, the following informa-
tion is shown in the display. A Rotate - Adjust the volume
Press - Switch the sound off/on
A Time
Switch to the next track/station
B Compass direction
display Switch to the previous track/station
Selected gear/gear Show menu of assist systems
recommendation Depending on the equipment:
Automatic gearbox ▶Press - Show previous menu (if one has been
selector lever posi- selected) / Show telephone menu
tions
Or:
Detected traffic
signs ▶ Press - Change the display
C Menu, indicator lights and information ▶ Hold - Display the menu of preset options
with additional information
D Outside temperature
B Rotate - Switch between menu items/Set val-
or - low outside temperature ues/Manually change map scale
E Total distance travelled Press - Confirm the menu item
F Trip - Distance travelled after resetting the Turn and press - Activate automatic map scale
memory changing
Press - Return to the menu one level higher
Driver information system › Driving data 59

Hold - Show main menu Memory


The system saves the driving data in the following
memories.
Driving data From start or "1" (depending on display type)
▶ Driving data from the time of switching on the ig-
Overview nition until the ignition is switched off again is stor-
The driving data display works with the ignition ed in the memory. If the journey is interrupted for
switched on. more than 2 hours, the memory will be reset.
Long term or "2" (depending on display type)
In the instrument cluster display
▶The driving data of all trips up to a total of 99
▶ Range - Travel distance that can be covered with
hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9999 km
the existing tank fill level and the same driving style
driving distance is stored in the memory. If one of
▶ AdBlue®-range - Travel distance that can be cov-
the listed values is exceeded, the memory is reset.
ered with the existing AdBlue® tank fill level and the
From refuelling or "3" (depending on display type)
same driving style
▶ Driving data from the time the fuel tank was last
▶ Average fuel consumption
filled is stored in the memory. The memory is reset
▶ Current fuel consumption the next time the tank is filled.
▶ Oil temperature - If the temperature is less than
50°C or if there is a system error --- is displayed
▶ Speed limit warning » page 60 Operation
▶ Traffic Sign Recognition » page 176
Display driving data in the display of the instru-
▶ Current driving speed ment cluster via the operating lever
▶ Average speed › The menu item driving data in the main menu in the
▶ Distance travelled display of the instrument cluster.
▶ Driving time A Press - Select infor-
▶ Comfort consumers - Information on the total mation/Set values
consumption of comfort consumers in l/h and a list B Press - Confirm in-
of three consumers that account for the largest formation
share of fuel consumption
In infotainment Display driving data in the display of the instru-
ment cluster via the multi-functional steering
wheel
› The menu item driving data in the main menu in the
display of the instrument cluster.
A Rotate - Select in-
formation/Set values
Press - Confirm in-
formation

A Distance travelled
B Driving time
C Average speed
D Average fuel consumption Displaying driving data in the infotainment system
The driving data is displayed in the menu in the info-
E Evaluation of driving economy - Drive
tainment system.
GreenFunction (depending on Infotainment
type) » page 163 Driving data
F Graphical fuel gauge - If the expected range is Or:
less than 300 km, the vehicle slowly approaches Driving data
the symbol
G Range
60 Driver information system › Speed limit warning

Select and reset the memory for driving data in Speed limit warning
the display of the instrument cluster using the
control lever Usage
› To set the memory for The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit
the displayed driving beyond which an acoustic warning signal will sound
data, press button A and the following warning message appears in the
repeatedly. display of the instrument cluster.
› To reset the memory,
press and hold button
A. Setting

Select memory for driving data in the display of Setting the speed limit
the instrument cluster via the multifunction steer- › Select and confirm the Warning menu item at or
ing wheel and reset it (depending on display type).
› To set the memory for › When the vehicle is stationary, set the desired
the displayed driving speed limit and confirm.
data, press selection › While driving, drive at the desired speed and con-
wheel A repeatedly. firm it as the speed limit.
› To resetthe memory , Resetting the speed limit
hold the dial A . › Select and confirm the Warning menu item at or
(depending on display type).
› To reset the speed limit, confirm the stored value.
If the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours,
the set limit is deactivated, but the set value remains
Selecting the memory in the infotainment system stored.
To select the memory, use the functional areas
in the following menu in the infotainment system.
Driving data Vehicle condition
Or: Display
Driving data
The vehicle status is displayed in the following menu
Resetting the memory in the infotainment system in the Infotainment system.
The memory is reset in the following menu in the in-
Vehicle status
fotainment system.
Or:
Vehicle status
Or:

Settings
Select driving data to be displayed
The driving data to be displayed is selected in the
following Infotainment menu:

Or:
A Vehicle areas displayed in colour indicate associ-
ated warnings.
Setting units B No notification
The units are set in the following infotainment menu: Warning messages regarding the vehicle con-
dition and their quantity
Or: C Display of information about the condition
of the START-STOP system
Driver information system › Stopwatch in the Infotainment 61

▶ Activation/deactivation of information Information Sport


regarding the messages of the START-STOP
system in another screen display Settings
The Sport information display is shown in the menu
in the Infotainment.
Functionality
Sport
In the event of a system fault, messages regarding
Or:
the fault in question are displayed on the instrument
cluster display when the ignition is switched on. Sport
Messages in relation to faults can also be displayed in A swipe of the finger vertically across the screen al-
the Infotainment. lows three of the following displays to be shown.
The warning messages will continue to be dis- ▶ Charge pressure.
played until the malfunctions have been remedied. ▶ Acceleration.
After the message is displayed for the first time, only ▶ Output.
the indicator lights (Hazard) or (Warning) re- ▶ Coolant temperature.
main displayed.
▶ Oil temperature.

Stopwatch in the Infotainment Personalisation


Overview Usage
The stopwatch display is shown in the menu in the
The personalization feature allows each vehicle key
Infotainment.
to be assigned a user account.
Sport In the user account, settings can be assigned regard-
Or: ing e.g. light function, driver's seat and exterior mir-
Sport ror position, assistance systems, radio, navigation,
etc.

Functionality
After opening the driver's door, all the personalised
functions are adjusted according to the user account
that is assigned to the key which was used to unlock
the vehicle.
There are three user accounts and a guest account.

A Overall time
A change to the set personalised functions is auto-
matically stored in the active user account.
B Start the measurement
Stop the measurement
Change user account
C Current lap time
D Evaluate/reset split times WARNING
Risk of an accident!
End the measurement (the current lap time is
▶ Carry out the account change while the vehicle is
not stored)
stationary.
E Start measurement of the next lap time
In the instrument cluster display
F The split time is briefly shown in the display A
› Switching to a different user account is
End the measurement (the current lap time is in the instrument cluster display within
stored) 10 seconds after turning on the igni-
tion.

In infotainment
› The system settings are made in the Infotainment
in the following menu.
62 Infotainment Swing › Infotainment overview

Vehicle status Infotainment Swing


Or:
Infotainment overview
Vehicle status
The account changes e.g. when changing drivers
while traveling. This avoids unwanted re-setting of
the personalized functions in the active user account.

Settings
This function is set in the following menu in the Info-
tainment system.

Or:

A Touchscreen
▶ Key assignment - Options for assigning the recog-
nised key to the active user account B SD card slot
▶ Manual - the key must be manually assigned to Rotary control on the left
the active account ▶ Press: switch Infotainment on/off
▶ Automatic - detected key automatically assigned ▶ Turn: adjust Volume
to a different account of the active account Rotary control on the right
▶ Assign the key to the current user account - ▶ Press: Confirm menu item
Manual assignment of the key to the active ac- ▶ Turn: select menu item/set value
count
Radio menu
To maintain the assignment of the selected user
Media menu
account to the selected key, we recommend that
you select the manual key assignment. Phone menu
Infotainment settings menu
SmartLink menu
▶ Press: Display menu
▶ Hold: switch voice control for the SmartLink
application on/off
Sound settings
Information about vehicle settings

System
Restriction
For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainment
functions while driving is not possible or is restricted.
The Infotainment system indicates this by means of
a message in the screen.

Basic settings
Setting basic functions
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
menu .
▶ Time and date.
▶ Language.
Infotainment Swing › Screen 63

▶ Units. Determine system version


▶ Restore factory settings. › Tap System information.

Sound settings Manual update


The Infotainment sound is set in the menu For information on available updates, please refer to
Sound. the ŠKODA internet pages.
The following menu items can be set.
▶ Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment is
turned on.
▶ Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment
functions. ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
▶ Setting the equalizer. › Visit available updates.
▶ Adjusting the volume ratio. › Save the update to a USB source.
Depending on the equipment, the following ad- › Insert the USB source into the front USB input.
vanced sound settings can be set. › Tap System information Update software.
▶ Setting the sound system. › Select the connected USB device as the update
▶ Setting the sound space optimisation for the driv- source.
er. › Go to the update file and confirm the update.
▶ Turn on/off and adjust the subwoofer volume. › Confirm any messages and wait for the update
process to be completed.
Configuration wizard
The configuration wizard helps to set certain Info-
tainment functions.
Screen
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed
if, after switching on the Infotainment system, there Overview
are at least two menu items that have not been set
or if a new user account has been selected.
› To switch off the automatic display, tap on Don't
show again when the configuration wizard is displayed.
› For manual display, tap on Configuration wizard.
Safely disconnect the connected USB device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected device!
To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
follows. A Status bar
› Tap Remove safely. B Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayed
› Select the desired device. menu
› Disconnect/remove the device. C Other pages of the menu

Troubleshooting
Operation
Infotainment not responding
The Infotainment system must be restarted. NOTICE
Danger of screen damage!
› Press for more than 10 s. ▶ The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it
› Wait for the restart to complete. lightly with your finger.
In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op-
System update eration of a mobile phone.
The following operating modes are specific to the In-
We recommend having the system update carried
fotainment system.
out by a specialist company.
The system update ensures optimal function of the
Infotainment system, e.g. compatibility with new
phones.
64 Infotainment Swing › Infotainment keyboard

Settings Numeric keypad

The following basic screen functions are set in the


Screen menu.
▶ Brightness level of the screen.
▶ Switch off the screen.
▶ Display the time.
▶ Confirmation sounds and animations.

Infotainment keyboard
Keypad example
Keypad overview A Input line
The arrangement of the keypad characters depends ▶ Delete characters before the cursor
on the Infotainment language that has been set. ▶ Tap: delete the last character
In Infotainment, the following types are used, de- ▶ Hold: delete all characters
pending on the context. B Keypad functional surfaces
▶ Alphanumeric.
▶ Confirm the characters that have been entered
▶ Numeric.
▶ Keypad for input. If context-sensitive, alphanumeric characters can
▶ Keypad for search. be entered by holding a functional surface with a
digit.

Operation
The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters,
letters and numbers.
The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-
fotainment prompts for characters.
Find
Keypad example During the character input, a search for correspond-
ing entries takes place.
A Input line
▶ Delete characters before the cursor The entry to be searched can be entered, including
diacritics.
▶ Tap: delete the last character
The keypad will only provide characters that match
▶ Hold: delete all characters in sequence
the stored entries.
▶ Show list of searched entries
› To display the searched entries, tap .
B Keypad functional surfaces
▶ Change to lowercase Show additional keypad languages
To use the additional keypad languages, the desired
▶ Switch to the first capital letter, followed by languages must be set first.
lowercase letters
▶ / Switch to the language keypad › Tap or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until the
desired language keypad is displayed.
▶ Switch to the numeric and character key-
pad Further character variants
▶ Show additional keypad languages › Press and hold the sign with the symbol .
▶ Insert a space › Select the desired symbol.
▶ Hold: Show additional character variants
▶ Move cursor to the left Setting additional keypad languages
▶ Move cursor to the right
› Tap Additional keypad languages.
▶ Confirm the characters that have been en-
tered
Infotainment Swing › Radio 65

Radio Operation

Overview Select station

Display main menu


› Tap on .
Analogue and digital radio reception

› Tap or at the top of the screen.


SCAN function
The function plays receivable stations of the selec-
ted frequency range in succession for a few seconds
A Select frequency range each.
B Depending on the frequency range › To start automatic play press Scan or the right
FM: Radio text rotary control .
DAB: Name of the station group › To end automatic play press or the right rotary
control .
C Preset buttons for preferred stations
List of available stations Find stations manually
› In the Radio main menu, tap .
Manual station search
› To search in sequence, tap or next to the dis-
Display information about the station (applies to played frequency range scale.
DAB)
Or:
Settings
› Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency range
Infotainment supports digital radio reception in scale and move it to the desired value.
DAB and DAB+ formats. Or:
List of available stations › Turn the right rotary control .
› To display, tap .
Played station
Restriction
Station stored on the presets
A traffic radio station is set ▶ Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains can
DAB signal is not available restrict radio reception.
The DAB station reception is not stable ▶ In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-
Filtering the stations in the list according to the ceiving the radio signal.
programme type.
To filter the FM stations, the RDS and AF func- Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-
tion must be switched on. bels may affect the reception of the radio signal.
To filter the DAB stations, the alphabetical sort-
ing function of the stations must be activated.
Manual update of the station list
Settings
In the FM station list, information about the pro- Save the station currently being listened to as a fa-
gramme type and the type of the regional station vourite from the Radio main menu
can be displayed. › Hold the desired station key for preferred stations
until the station is stored.
Save station to favourites from the list of available
stations
› Hold the line with the name of the desired station.
› Tap the desired preset button.
66 Infotainment Swing › Radio

Delete favourites Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/off


› In the Radio main menu , tap Delete presets. Applies to the FM frequency range.
› To delete one preset button for preferred stations, When the function is switched on and the signal of
tap the desired station button and confirm the de- the FM station currently being listened to is weak,
letion. Infotainment automatically sets the same station to
a different frequency with a better signal.
› To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations,
tap All and confirm the deletion. › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Automatic frequency control (AF).
Buttons
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges. Sort stations in the list of available stations
The variant for changing stations using buttons Applies to the FM frequency range.
in the Radio main menu is set as follows. ▶ In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Sort station list:.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:.
Select the sorting of stations in alphabetical order
› Choose the change variant. ▶
or by group.
Traffic reception (TP) for FM stations on/off
Applies to the FM frequency range. Automatic change of frequency to a regionally
linked FM station
› In the Radio main menu, tap Traffic program (TP). Applies to the FM frequency range.
Switch traffic reception for DAB stations on/off Infotainment provides the option of automatically
Applies to the DAB frequency range. switching to a regionally linked FM station in case of
signal loss of the FM station being listened to.
› In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item Traf-
fic Radio (TP). › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings DAB RDS Regional:.
traffic programme announcements (TP) on/off. › Select one of the following menu items.
Assign station logo from an external source ▶ Fixed - If there is a loss of signal, another station
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges. must be set manually.
Infotainment offers the option to assign logos from ▶ Automatic - automatic selection of the station with
the pictures on an external source to the station but- the best signal reception.
tons. If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainment
For station logos, images in jpg, png format with a will automatically set another available region.
maximum resolution of 400x240 pixels can be used. Switch RDS on/off
› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos. Applies to the FM frequency range.
› Tap the desired preset button. The menu item is only available for some countries.
› Select the external source with the logo. › In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Radio
› Find the desired logo and confirm. Data System (RDS).
Delete station logos If the RDS function is disabled, the following menu
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges. items in FM station settings are not available.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:. ▶ Traffic programme (TP).
› To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and ▶ Radio text.
confirm the deletion. ▶ RDS Regional.
› To delete all logos, tap on All and confirm the dele- ▶ Automatic frequency change (AF).
tion.
Switch additional DAB announcements on/off
Turn on/off radio text reception Applies to the DAB frequency range.
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges. When the function is switched on, other announce-
When the function is switched on and station pre- ments are received as traffic announcements. For ex-
sets are displayed, detailed information about the ample, weather news, sports reports, financial news,
broadcast content of the FM station being listened etc.
to, or the name of the station group for the DAB sta-
tion, is displayed.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Other DAB announcements.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Radio text.
Infotainment Swing › Media 67

Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of a


DAB station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes to
the same station with a better signal in a different
DAB station group.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
DAB - DAB station tracking.
Turn on/off automatic switching from a DAB sta- A Select source
tion to the same FM station Manage files / multimedia database
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
Settings
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-
cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol Operation
(FM) is displayed after the station name.
Operation - Basics
When the corresponding DAB station can be re-
ceived again, the station automatically changes from
FM to DAB.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Automatic DAB - FM switching.

Media
What you should be mindful of
▶ Do not save any important data or that which has A Album image / symbol of the connected source
not been backed up on the connected audio sour- Tap: display available albums
ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or
damaged files or connected audio sources. Tap: start playback
▶ When changing or connecting an audio source, this Tap: pause
may cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce the Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap: play
volume before changing or connecting an audio the previous song
source.
After 3 seconds from the start of playback, tap
▶ When connecting an audio source, the source in- to play the current title from the beginning
formation messages can be displayed. These mes-
sages must be observed and, if necessary, con- Hold: fast rewind within the title
firmed. Tap: play the next song
▶ The national copyright laws that apply in your Hold: fast forward within the title
country must be observed.
Movement within the title is also possible by drag-
ging the finger over the timeline.
Overview
Extended operation
Display main menu Turn repeat playback of the current track on/off
› Tap on . Turn repeat playback of the current album/fold-
er on/off
Turn random playback of the current album/
folder on/off

Settings
Turn title playback including subfolders on/off
› In the Media main menu, tap on Mix/Repeat including
subfolders.
68 Infotainment Swing › Media

Traffic › Press on the inserted SD memory card.


› To turn on/off the traffic monitoring during the The SD card moves to the eject position.
playback of media files, go to the Media main menu
and tap on Traffic programme (TP). NOTICE
When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vi-
Safely disconnect the connected device brations might cause the card to fall out of the
NOTICE adapter.
Risk of damage to the data on the connected device! USB device
To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
› To connect, insert the USB device into the appro-
follows. priate port.
› In the Media main menu, tap Safely remove:.
To play audio files, use USB ports that support data
› Select the desired device. transfer.
› Disconnect/remove the device.
› To disconnect disconnect the USB device first. To
Bluetooth® player do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safe-
Infotainment allows audio files of a connected Blue- ly:and select the USB device.
tooth® player to play using the A2DP and AVRCP au-
dio profile.
› Disconnect the USB device.
A USB device can be connected directly to the
With Infotainment, multiple devices can be paired USB port or via a connection cable.
using Bluetooth®, but only one of them can be used We recommend that you use extension cables from
as a Bluetooth® player. ŠKODA Original Accessories.
› For connecting the Bluetooth® player, pair and USB extension cables or reducers may affect the
connect the device via Bluetooth®. playback function of the connected device.
› In the Media main menu , tap on Bluetooth paired Load USB audio source
devices. After connecting the USB device, charging will start
› In the list, choose the device with the symbol . automatically when the following conditions are met.
If a device is connected to Infotainment using ✓ The ignition is switched on.
Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, then it cannot be ✓ The USB device allows charging.
connected using Bluetooth®.
The charging efficiency can be different compared to
SD card the charging from the usual mains power supply.
NOTICE Depending on the type of the connected USB device
Risk of damaging the SD card reader! and the frequency of use, the charging current may
▶ Do not use SD cards with a broken slide for write not be sufficient to charge the battery of the con-
protection. nected device.
› To insert the SD card, with the bevelled corner to Some connected audio sources may not be recog-
the right, push into the slot in the external module nised and cannot be charged.
until it snaps into place.
› To remove, first disconnect the SD card safely. To
do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safely:
and select the SD card.
Infotainment Swing › Media 69

Supported sources and files

Source Interface Type Specification File system


SD
SD card SD card reader Standard size SDHC
SDXC
USB stick
HDD
(without special soft-
MSC ware) FAT16
USB devices that use FAT32
the USB mass storage exFAT
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x
support protocol
USB or higher with USB
Devices running the An-
2.x support
droid or Windows Phone
MTP operating system that
support the Media
Transfer Protocol
Devices with an iOS op-
Apple HFS+
erating system
Bluetooth® protocols
Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® - A2DP and AVRCP (1.0 - -
1.5)
Supported sources

The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources are not supported by Infotain-
ment.
Viewing images on the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Apple devices.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobile
device being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility

Compression for- Codec type File exten- Max. bit rate Max. sam- Multi channels
mat sion [kbps] pling rate
[kHz]
Mono, dual mono,
MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48 Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG
MPEG 2 Layer 3 16, 22, 24 Mono,
mp3 8 - 160 Stereo, Joint
MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12
Stereo
Windows Media
8 - 384 8, 11, 12, 16,
Audio 9 and 9.1
22, 32, 44,
Windows Media Mono, Stereo,
WMA wma 8 - 320 48
Audio 9.2 Joint stereo
Windows Media 32, 44, 48,
8 - 384
Audio 10 96
Supported audio files

Files that are protected by the DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.
70 Infotainment Swing › Mobile device management

Codec type File extension


M3U m3u
PLS pls
WPL wpl
ASX asx
Supported playlists

Mobile device management


Overview

Mobile device management


› In the Telephone main menu , tap on the functional surface Bluetooth paired devices.
In the list of paired mobile devices, the following symbols may appear for the individual devices.
White icon - the device can be connected as a telephone.
Green icon - the device is connected as a telephone.
White icon - the device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.
Green icon - the device is connected as a Bluetooth® player.
Possible functions of the connected mobile device
The functions of a device connected via over the HFP Bluetooth profile depends on the following connection
types.

First device Second device


Main phone Additional phone
incoming / outgoing calls
Telephone contacts Bluetooth® player
Bluetooth® player

With Infotainment only a mobile device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.

Limitations of mobile devices and applications using the following reference or by reading the QR
code.
Availability of features
The availability of certain features depends on the ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
type of mobile device, as well as that of the applica-
tions installed.
Connection restrictions
▶ With Infotainment, a max. of 20 mobile devices are
paired. Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devices
▶ The range of the connection of the mobile device Due to the large number of mobile devices, it is not
to Infotainment is limited to the passenger com- possible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibility
partment. with Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility depends
▶ After reaching the maximum number, the pairing on the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa-
of the next mobile device will replace that of the tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer of
device that has not been used for the longest peri- the mobile device.
od of time. Applications in mobile devices
Compatibility of mobile devices Mobile devices can be used to install applications
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see that allow you to view additional information on the
if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo- Infotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainment
bile device being tested. This check is carried out by system.
Infotainment Swing › Telephone 71

Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on- › Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
going development, the available applications may confirm.
not function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as- › If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
sumes no liability for their proper functioning. select the device to be replaced.
The scope of available applications and their func- Disconnect from a mobile device
tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, as › Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
well as the vehicle and country.
› Tap on the Bluetooth® profile icon of the desired
mobile device.
Connection set-up Delete a paired mobile device
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
› Turn on the ignition. › To delete a mobile device, tap and confirm the
deletion.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment Blue-
› To delete all mobile devices, tap on Delete all and con-
firm the deletion.
tooth Bluetooth.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® visibility of the Infotain-
ment Bluetooth Visibility: Visible. Telephone
› Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de-
vice. Telephone main menu
› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit. Display main menu
The name of the unit can be found by tapping › Tap on .
Bluetooth Name:.
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
The mobile device is connected to the Infotainment
or just paired, depending on the number of devices
that are already connected.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-
vice
› Turn on the ignition.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device. A Name of the connected telephone
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment Blue- ▶ Tap: Show list of previously connected phones
tooth Bluetooth.
B Preset buttons for preferred contacts
› Tap on Bluetooth Search for devices.
C Choice of storage group for the preferred con-
› Select the desired device from the list of Blue- tacts
tooth® devices.
D Name of telephone service providers
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm. Enter telephone number
› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment, Contact list
select the device to be replaced.
Call lists
Connect Infotainment to a mobile device that is
Switch on voice control for the connected tele-
not already paired
phone
The connection with an already coupled mobile de-
vice is made automatically after switching on the ig- Settings
nition; if necessary the device can be connected
manually as follows.
Conditions for connecting a telephone with
› Turn on the ignition.
Infotainment
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment Blue- ✓ The ignition is switched on.
tooth Bluetooth. ✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment and
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices. the telephone needs to be switched on.
› In the device list, select the desired device and the
Bluetooth® profile.
72 Infotainment Swing › Telephone

The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment is Settings for Infotainment telephone functions
switched on in the menu item Bluetooth Blue-
tooth. Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on. › To save the desired preset button, press and hold.
The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on in
› Select a contact from the displayed list.
the menu item Bluetooth Visibility: Visible.
› If the contact contains multiple telephone num-
bers, choose the desired telephone number.
✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info-
tainment's Bluetooth® unit. › To delete tap on Telephone User profile Manage fa-
✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment. vourites in the main menu.
✓ Through Infotainment, no mobile device can be › To delete one preset, tap on the list entry and con-
connected using Apple CarPlay. firm the deletion.
Or:

Telephone operation › To delete all presets, tap on Delete all and confirm the
deletion.
Enter telephone number
Import telephone contacts
› In the Telephone main menu, tap . After first connecting the main telephone with Info-
› Enter the telephone number using the numeric tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-
keypad that is displayed. ted into the Infotainment memory.
The displayed numeric keypad can also be used Infotainment can import up to 2000 telephone con-
for searching for contacts. tacts together with contact pictures. Each contact
If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contacts can include max. 5 telephone numbers.
with the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-
played next to the numeric keypad. Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-
mation may be required.
List of telephone contacts
The list of telephone contacts is imported from the Update telephone contacts
connected main telephone. When re-connecting the telephone with Infotain-
ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out.
› To display the contact list in the telephone main
menu, tap . › For a manual update of the list in the telephone
main menu, tap on User profile Import contacts.
› To find details within the list, tap Find.
› Enter the details you wish to find. Sort contacts in the phone book
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on User profile
› To establish a connection with a contact, tap the Sort by:.
functional area showing the desired contact.
› Select the type by which to sort.
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, select
the telephone number from the displayed list. Ringer
Some phones do not allow the use of the telephone
› To display the details for a contact, tap . ringtone; instead, the Infotainment ringtone is used.
Telephone conversation › To set the Infotainment ringer in the Telephone
Depending on the context of the telephone conver- main menu, tap on User profile Select ringtone.
sation, the following functions can be selected. › Select the ringtone.
End connection / reject incoming call / end call
Simultaneous calls
Answer an incoming call / return to the held call
This applies to some countries.
/ Switch the ringer off / on
Hold a call Depending on the connected telephone, it is possible
/ Switch the microphone off / on to answer the next incoming call and hold the previ-
Show details of the caller ous call.
› To switch the call tone from the speakers to the › To switch on/off simultaneous calls, tap on tele-
telephone, go to the telephone main menu and tap phone Simultaneous calls.
on hands-free.
› To switch the call tone from the telephone to the
speakers, tap .
Infotainment Swing › SmartLink 73

SmartLink Music applications


Display of other available applications as well as
Functionality
the option to return to the SmartLink main menu
SmartLink offers the ability to display and operate Turn on voice control (Google Voice)
certified applications from a connected mobile de-
vice in the Infotainment screen. Apple CarPlay
Certification may be conditional upon the use of the
latest update to the particular SmartLink application.
Applications include, for example, apps for route
guidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.
Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable.
Supported connection types
SmartLink supports the following connection types.
▶ Android Auto.
▶ Apple CarPlay. A List of available applications
▶ MirrorLink.
Depending on the duration of operation:
▶ Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu
Overview of the SmartLink connection ▶ Hold: Switch on voice control (Siri)

Main menu SmartLink MirrorLink


› Tap on .

It is not possible to operate the application while


A Previously connected device driving
B Currently connected device Return to the SmartLink main menu
Display information about SmartLink List of running applications
Separation of the active connection Display of the last running application in connec-
ted mobile devices
Settings for the SmartLink menu
Settings
Android Auto

Connection conditions
General connection conditions
✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar-
tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car-
Play and MirrorLink.
✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar-
tLinkconnection, are supported in the respective
market.
Navigation applications ✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo-
bile device to be “unlocked”.
Telephone applications
Conditions for Android Auto
Overview of running applications, phone calls, in-
✓ The device to be connected must have Android
coming text messages, and more.
AutoSupport.
74 Infotainment Swing › SmartLink

A list of devices, supported regions and applica- device will automatically be connected as the main
tions that the Android Auto connection supports telephone.
can be found on the websites of Google Inc.. ▶ For the duration of the connection, no other Blue-
✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal- tooth® devices can be connected to the Infotain-
led on the mobile device. ment system.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an
the mobile device to be turned on. Apple CarPlay connection
Conditions for Apple CarPlay ▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de-
✓ The device to be connected must have Apple vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
CarPlaySupport. dia menu.
▶ Connecting the device disconnects all currently
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supports connected Bluetooth® devices.
can be found on the websites of Apple Inc.. ▶ For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth®

✓ Siri voice control is on. devices can be connected to the Infotainment sys-
tem.
✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile
device. Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an
MirrorLink connection
Conditions for MirrorLink
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de-
✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror-
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
LinkSupport.
dia menu.
A list of devices and applications that the Mirror- ▶ By connecting the device, all currently connected
Link connection supports can be found on the Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected and the
websites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®. device will automatically be connected as the main
✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installed telephone.
on the mobile device.
Depending on the device to be connected, a con-
✓ Some applications require the data connection in nection confirmation may be required.
the connected mobile device to be turned on.

Settings
Operation
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB
Operation of the running MirrorLink application › Turn on the Infotainment.
Move the functional areas to the left edge of the
screen
› Turn on the mobile device.
Move the functional areas to the right edge of › Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
the screen using a cable.
Move the functional areas to the top of the › Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay.
screen Apple CarPlay – Disconnection
Move the functional areas to the bottom of the › In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO-
screen DA” functional area.
Return to the MirrorLink main menu
› Tap on .
Android Auto - Connection via USB
Restriction › Turn on the Infotainment.
Restriction of SmartLink applications while driving › Turn on the mobile device.
For safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap- › Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
plications while driving is not possible or is restric- using a cable.
ted. › Choose to connect via Android Auto.
Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an Android Auto - Disconnection
Android Auto connection › In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re-
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de- turn to ŠKODA”.
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me- › Tap on .
dia menu.
MirrorLink - Connection via USB
▶ By connecting the device, all currently connected
Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected and the › Turn on the Infotainment.
› Turn on the mobile device.
Infotainment Swing › ŠKODA Connect online services 75

› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input The ŠKODA Connect Portal website is
using a cable. used, for example, for registration, acti-
› Choose to connect through MirrorLink. vation and ordering of online services. It
also provides the option of remote ac-
MirrorLink - Disconnection cess to the vehicle.
› In the MirrorLink main menu, tap .
› Tap on . Information call
The information call may be used in the case of prob-
Change to another device / connection type lems with the online services or for information re-
Infotainment allows you to switch between currently garding the products and services of the ŠKODA
connected devices and the connection type. brand.
› Tap on . ✓ The functional condition represents the active
› Select the desired device or connection type. online ŠKODA Connect services.
› Press the button.

ŠKODA Connect online services


Functionality
ŠKODA Connect online service offer the option of
connecting the vehicle to the online world. They thus
represent an extension of the vehicle and Infotain-
ment functions.
For the functionality of the ŠKODA Connect Online
Services, the vehicle must be within range of a mo- Breakdown call
bile network through which the services are provi- The breakdown call can be used in the event of a
ded. The availability, the connection speed and the breakdown.
technology used in the mobile network can be differ- ✓ The functional condition represents the active
ent in the respective countries and are dependent on online ŠKODA Connect services.
the mobile network operator.
› Press the button.
The ŠKODA Connect online services are not included
in the equipment of the vehicle. They can be ordered
separately on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
in the ŠKODA Connect application.
The offer of ŠKODA Connect online services de-
pends on the type of vehicle and its trim level, Info-
tainment and country. Availability in each country
can be checked on the ŠKODA Connect website.
The rights and obligations of the Parties with respect
to the provision of these services are governed by a ŠKODA Connect Application
separate agreement. Current legal documents re- The ŠKODA Connect application enables remote ac-
garding the online services can be found on the cess to the vehicle using a mobile device. It can also
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the ŠKODA Con- be used for user registration and to activate and
nect application. configure the online services.
ŠKODA Connect website The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-
▶http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect vice after scanning the following QR code or link.
For example, the ŠKODA Connect web- ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp
site contains the latest information
about the online services, a link to the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the
option of downloading the ŠKODA Con-
nect application.
ŠKODA Connect Portal website
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
76 Infotainment Swing › ŠKODA Connect online services

Settings
Registration and activation of online services
User registration, as well as the activation of the
ŠKODA Connect online services, is completed on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
Connect application.
In order to complete user registration, you will need
to access your e-mails.
In order to activate ŠKODA Connect, proceed as fol-
A The ŠKODA Connect online services are availa-
lows.
ble.
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment. At the same time the symbol of the data con-
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration. nection type can be displayed.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN you have re- B The ŠKODA Connect online services are not
ceived during user and vehicle registration on the available.
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
C Localisation services are restricted or disabled.
Connect application.
Detailed information about the online services
› Wait for the registration completion message to
can be viewed in the Online Services Administra-
appear.
tion.
› Confirm any messages on the screen.
D Localisation services are enabled.
Delete user Detailed information about the online services
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment. can be viewed in the Online Services Administra-
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration. tion.
› Tap Delete user Delete.
Localisation services
› Confirm the deletion.
For the complete functionality of some online serv-
By deleting the registered vehicle in the user ac- ices, activated localisation services are required.
count on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal the
user is also deleted in Infotainment. Localisation services include, for example, informa-
tion on the last parking position, area notification or
Changing the user speed notification.
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment. When localisation services are active, the symbol
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration. will be displayed in the status line in the Infotainment
› Tap New owner Change ownership. screen.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN code re- Switch Private mode function on/off
ceived during registration of the new user and dur-
By switching the Private mode function on, the serv-
ing vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect
ices relating to sending vehicle information and per-
Portal website.
sonal data, which are essential for the provision of
› If necessary, confirm the change by tapping the online services, are deactivated.
function surface Change main users.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Management
Management of online services Private mode.
In the service management, it is possible to display
information about the online services, the validity of NOTICE
their licence, or to switch the services on/off. The emergency call remains fully functional after
turning on the private mode feature.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Privacy settings and The functions of the information and breakdown call
manage services. are limited.
› To display the designations and the status of the
services, select the desired service. Switch Care Connect function on/off
By switching the Care Connect services off, the serv-
› For detailed information about the service tap .
ices relating to sending vehicle information and per-
› To switch the services on/off, tap the Checkbox. sonal data, which are essential for the provision of
Connection status of the online services Care Connect online services, are deactivated.
The connection status of the online services of ŠKO- › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Management
DA Connect online services is indicated by an icon in Care Connect.
the status bar on the Infotainment screen.
Infotainment Bolero › Infotainment overview 77

NOTICE Infotainment Bolero


The emergency call remains fully functional after
turning off the Care Connect feature. Infotainment overview
The functions of the information and breakdown call
are limited.
Switch online services on/off
It is possible to have the online services switched
off/on exclusively by a ŠKODA service partner.
After turning off the online services, none of the
ŠKODA Connect online services, including the
emergency calls are functioning.
To inform the vehicle
user that the ŠKODA
Connect online services
are out of order, the
service partner applies
the sticker at a visible A Touchscreen
point in the vehicle (e.g. on the roof cladding). Rotary control on the left
This sticker must not be removedas long as the on- ▶ Press: Switch Infotainment on/off
line services are off. ▶ Turn: Adjust Volume

NOTICE Rotary control on the right


It should be noted that the emergency, information ▶ Press: Confirm menu item
and breakdown calls are not available after switching ▶ Turn: select menu item/set value
off the online services.
Radio menu
For this reason, no automatic emergency call is made
in the event of a serious car accident. Media menu
Phone menu
Voice control
Infotainment settings
SmartLink menu
Information about vehicle settings
Overview of Infotainment menus

System
Infotainment Menus
MENU menu
The MENU menu contains all available Infotainment
menus.
› To Display the menu tap .
The graphic display type for the MENU menu can be
set.
78 Infotainment Bolero › System

Depending on the equipment, the following ad-


vanced sound settings can be set.
▶ Setting space optimisation.
▶ Setting the audio profiles according to genre.
▶ Adjusting the subwoofer volume.
Configuration wizard
The configuration wizard helps to set certain Info-
tainment functions.
Grid display The configuration wizard is automatically displayed
if, after switching on the Infotainment system, there
are at least two menu items that have not been set
or if a new user account has been selected.
› To switch off the automatic display, tap on Don't
show again when the configuration wizard is displayed.
› For manual display, tap on Configuration wiz-
ard.
Setting the MENU
The graphic display type for the MENU menu can be
List set as follows.
Restriction › Screen Menu:
› Select one of the following menu items.
For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainment
functions while driving is not possible or is restricted. ▶ Grid display - Grid display.
▶ Horizont. Display - horizontal display.
The Infotainment system indicates this by means of
a message in the screen. Safely disconnect the connected USB device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected device!
Basic settings To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
Setting basic functions follows.
The following Infotainment functions are set in the › Tap Remove safely:.
menu. › Select the desired device.
▶ Time and date. › Disconnect/remove the device.
▶ Language. Electronic voice amplification for driver and pas-
▶ Units. senger
▶ Restore factory settings. The voice enhancer allows transmission of the driv-
er's and passenger's voice on the speakers in the
Sound settings rear.
The Infotainment sound is set in the menu .
› For volume adjustment of voice amplification
The following menu items can be set. volume, tap Electronic voice enhancement.
▶ Setting the equalizer.
▶ Adjusting the volume ratio.
Troubleshooting
▶ Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment
functions. Infotainment not responding
Some are adjustable, for example the following The Infotainment system must be restarted.
menu items. › Press for more than 10 s.
▶ Volume adjustment of voice commands. › Wait for the restart to complete.
▶ Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment
is turned on.
▶ Speed-dependent volume setting.
System update
▶ Setting the Infotainment to mute with the park- We recommend having the system update carried
ing aid switched on. out by a specialist company.
Infotainment Bolero › Screen 79

The system update ensures optimal function of the Dragging up or down with two fingers
Infotainment system, e.g. compatibility with new
phones. ▶ Quickly review the list
of phone contacts.
Determine system version
› Tap System information.
Manual update
For information on available updates, please refer to
the ŠKODA internet pages.

Pulling apart with two fingers

▶ Enlarge image.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
› Visit available updates.
› Save the update to a USB source.
› Insert the USB source into the front USB input.
› Tap System information Update software.
› Select the connected USB device as the update
source.
› Go to the update file and confirm the update.
› Confirm any messages and wait for the update Pulling together with two fingers
process to be completed.
▶ Minimize image.

Screen
Overview

Settings
The following basic screen functions are set in the
Screen menu.
A Status bar ▶ Brightness level of the screen.
B Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayed ▶ Switch off the screen.
menu ▶ Display the time.
C Other pages of the menu ▶ Confirmation sounds and animations.

Operation Infotainment keyboard

NOTICE Keypad overview


Danger of screen damage! The arrangement of the keypad characters depends
▶ The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it
on the Infotainment language that has been set.
lightly with your finger.
In Infotainment, the following types are used, de-
In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op- pending on the context.
eration of a mobile phone.
▶ Alphanumeric.
The following operating modes are specific to the In- ▶ Numeric.
fotainment system.
▶ Keypad for input.
80 Infotainment Bolero › Voice control

▶ Keypad for search. If context-sensitive, alphanumeric characters can


be entered by holding a functional surface with a
digit.

Operation
The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters,
letters and numbers.
The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-
fotainment prompts for characters.
Keypad example
Find
A Input line During the character input, a search for correspond-
▶ Delete characters before the cursor ing entries takes place.
▶ Tap: delete the last character The entry to be searched can be entered, including
diacritics.
▶ Hold: delete all characters in sequence
▶ Show list of searched entries The keypad will only provide characters that match
the stored entries.
B Keypad functional surfaces
▶ Change to lowercase
› To display the searched entries, tap .

▶ Switch to the first capital letter, followed by Show additional keypad languages
lowercase letters To use the additional keypad languages, the desired
languages must be set first.
▶ / Switch to the language keypad
▶ Switch to the numeric and character key- › Tap or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until the
pad desired language keypad is displayed.
▶ Show additional keypad languages Further character variants
▶ Insert a space › Press and hold the sign with the symbol .
▶ Hold: Show additional character variants › Select the desired symbol.
▶ Move cursor to the left
▶ Move cursor to the right Setting additional keypad languages
▶ Confirm the characters that have been en-
tered
› Tap Additional keypad languages.

Numeric keypad
Voice control
Functionality
Voice control principle
Voice control works according to the principle of
dialogue between the user and the Infotainment sys-
tem.
The user says a voice command. The Infotainment
system responds or executes the voice command.
Keypad example
A Input line Conditions
▶ Delete characters before the cursor ✓ Ignition is switched on.
▶ Tap: delete the last character ✓ Infotainment is switched on.
▶ Hold: delete all characters ✓ No telephone conversation can be held via Info-
B Keypad functional surfaces tainment.

▶ Confirm the characters that have been entered


Infotainment Bolero › Radio 81

Operation You cannot use voice control while a phone call is in


progress.
Voice control process
› To turn on voice control, press the button on
the multifunction steering wheel. Settings
Or:
The following voice control functions are set in the
› Tap on . menu Voice control.
After switching on, the icon is displayed. ▶ Confirmation tones.
› Say a voice command. ▶ Display of sample commands.
During recognition of the voice command, the icon
is displayed. Self-help
The Infotainment system then executes the voice
command or plays the message. During the message, Starting acoustic help
the icon is displayed. › If the Infotainment system is expecting a voice
command, say “Help”.
After the execution of the voice command, voice
control is switched off. The “Help” voice command can be issued repeatedly
for further tips on voice control.
Correcting a voice command
Activate/deactivate the display of example voice
› During voice command input, press the button
on the multifunction steering wheel and say a new commands in the Infotainment screen.
voice command. The system offers the option of displaying example
voice commands after switching on the voice con-
Stopping voice control trol in the Infotainment screen.
Stopping leaves more time for voice command input,
e.g. for searching for a phone contact.
› To turn on/off voice control tap on Example
commands (Infotainment system).
› Move your finger up or down over the Infotain-
ment screen. Activate/deactivate display of example voice com-
mands in the instrument cluster display
Or: The system offers the option of displaying example
› Say the “pause” voice command. voice commands after switching on the voice con-
trol in the Instrument cluster screen.
Resuming stopped voice control
› Press the button on the multifunction steering › To turn on/off voice control tap on Example
wheel. commands (Instrument cluster).
Or:
› Tap on in the Infotainment screen. Radio
Stopping the played back message Overview
› Press the button on the multifunction steering
wheel. Display main menu
› Tap on .
Ending voice control
› Press and hold the button on the multifunction Or:
steering wheel. › Tap on .
Or: Analogue and digital radio reception
› Say the voice command “cancel” during voice com-
mand input.

Restriction
For some Infotainment languages, no voice control is
available. The Infotainment system will indicate this.
The messages are generated by the Infotainment
system. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or city name) can-
not always be guaranteed. A Select frequency range
82 Infotainment Bolero › Radio

B Depending on the frequency range › To search in sequence, tap or next to the dis-
FM: Radio text played frequency range scale.
DAB: Name of the station group Or:
C Preset buttons for preferred stations › Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency range
List of available stations scale and move it to the desired value.

Manual station search Or:

Display information about the station (applies to › Turn the right rotary control .
DAB)
Settings Restriction
Infotainment supports digital radio reception in ▶ Parking garages, tunnels, tall buildings or moun-
DAB and DAB+ formats. tains can restrict radio reception.
List of available stations ▶ In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-
› To display, tap . ceiving the radio signal.
Played station Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-
Station stored on the presets bels may affect the reception of the radio signal.
A traffic radio station is set
DAB signal is not available
The DAB station reception is not stable Settings
To filter the FM stations into alphabetical order, Save the station currently being listened to as a fa-
tap according to group or genre. vourite from the Radio main menu
The prerequisite for the filtering option is ensur- › Hold the desired station key for preferred stations
ing RDS and AF functions are activated. until the station is stored.
Manual update of the station list
Save station to favourites from the list of available
In the FM station list, information about the pro-
stations
gramme type and the type of the regional station
can be displayed.
› Hold the line with the name of the desired station.
› Tap the desired preset button.
Delete favourites
Operation › In the Radio main menu , tap Delete presets.
Select station › To delete one preset button for preferred stations,
tap the desired station button and confirm the de-
letion.
› To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations,
tap All and confirm the deletion.
Buttons
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
The variant for changing stations using buttons
in the Radio main menu is set as follows.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:.
› Tap or at the top of the screen.
› Choose the change variant.
SCAN function
Traffic reception (TP) for FM stations on/off
The function plays receivable stations of the selec-
Applies to the FM frequency range.
ted frequency range in succession for a few seconds
each. › In the Radio main menu, tap Traffic program (TP).
› To start automatic play press Scan or the right Switch traffic reception for DAB stations on/off
rotary control . Applies to the DAB frequency range.
› To end automatic play press or the right rotary › In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item Traf-
control .
fic Radio (TP).
Find stations manually › In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings DAB
› In the Radio main menu, tap . traffic programme announcements (TP) on/off.
Infotainment Bolero › Radio 83

Assign station logo from an external source Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/off
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges. Applies to the FM frequency range.
Infotainment offers the option to assign logos from When the function is switched on and the signal of
the pictures on an external source to the station but- the FM station currently being listened to is weak,
tons. Infotainment automatically sets the same station to
For station logos, images in jpg, gif, png, bmp format a different frequency with a better signal.
with a maximum resolution of 500x500 pixels can be › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
used. Automatic frequency control (AF).
› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos. Automatic change of frequency to a regionally
› Tap the desired preset button. linked FM station
› Select the external source with the logo. Applies to the FM frequency range.
› Find the desired logo and confirm. Infotainment provides the option of automatically
The information for updating station logos is taken switching to a regionally linked FM station in case of
from the ŠKODA web pages. signal loss of the FM station being listened to.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
RDS Regional:.
› Select one of the following menu items.
▶ Fixed - If there is a loss of signal, another station
must be set manually.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
▶ Automatic - automatic selection of the station with
Delete station logos the best signal reception.
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainment
› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:. will automatically set another available region.
› To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and Switch RDS on/off
confirm the deletion.
Applies to the FM frequency range.
› To delete all logos, tap on All and confirm the dele-
tion. The menu item is only available for some countries.

Activating / deactivating automatic station logo › In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Radio
assignment Data System (RDS).
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges. If the RDS function is disabled, the following menu
When the function is switched on, a station logo items in FM station settings are not available.
from the Infotainment memory is assigned when the ▶ Traffic programme (TP).
station is stored on a preset. ▶ Radio text.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings ▶ RDS Regional.
Autostore station logos. ▶ Automatic frequency change (AF).
Regional FM station logo ▶ Regional station logo.
Applies to the FM frequency range. Switch additional DAB announcements on/off
Infotainment provides the option of using country- Applies to the DAB frequency range.
specific FM station logos. When the function is switched on, other announce-
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings ments are received as traffic announcements. For ex-
Region for station logo:. ample, weather news, sports reports, financial news,
etc.
› Choose the country.
Turn on/off radio text reception
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Other DAB announcements.
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on and station pre- Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of a
sets are displayed, detailed information about the DAB station
broadcast content of the FM station being listened Applies to the DAB frequency range.
to, or the name of the station group for the DAB sta- When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion, is displayed. tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes to
the same station with a better signal in a different
› In the Radio main menu, tap Radio text.
DAB station group.
84 Infotainment Bolero › Media

› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings


DAB - DAB station tracking.
Turn on/off automatic switching from a DAB sta-
tion to the same FM station
Applies to the DAB frequency range.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-
cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol
(FM) is displayed after the station name.
When the corresponding DAB station can be re- A Select source
ceived again, the station automatically changes from Manage files / multimedia database
FM to DAB.
Settings
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Automatic DAB - FM switching.
Activating/deactivating reception of DAB trans- Operation
mitter in the L band Operation - Basics
In some countries, the DAB radio reception is only
available as a so-called LBand.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings L-
Band:.
If there is no DAB radio reception available in the
L-band in your country, we recommend turning the
L-band off.
The DAB channel scan is therefore faster.

Media A Album image / symbol of the connected source


Tap: display available albums
What you should be mindful of
Tap: start playback
▶ Do not save any important data or that which has Tap: pause
not been backed up on the connected audio sour-
ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap: play
damaged files or connected audio sources. the previous song
▶ When changing or connecting an audio source, this After 3 seconds from the start of playback, tap
may cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce the to play the current title from the beginning
volume before changing or connecting an audio Hold: fast rewind within the title
source.
Tap: play the next song
▶ When connecting an audio source, the source in-
formation messages can be displayed. These mes- Hold: fast forward within the title
sages must be observed and, if necessary, con-
firmed. Movement within the title is also possible by drag-
ging the finger over the timeline.
▶ The national copyright laws that apply in your
country must be observed. Extended operation
Turn repeat playback of the current track on/off
Turn repeat playback of the current album/fold-
Overview er on/off
Turn random playback of the current album/
Display main menu
folder on/off
› Tap on .
Or:
Settings
› Tap on .
Turn title playback including subfolders on/off
› In the Media main menu, tap on Mix/Repeat including
subfolders.
Infotainment Bolero › Media 85

Traffic › Press on the inserted SD memory card.


› To turn on/off the traffic monitoring during the The SD card moves to the eject position.
playback of media files, go to the Media main menu
and tap on Traffic programme (TP). NOTICE
When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vi-
Safely disconnect the connected device brations might cause the card to fall out of the
NOTICE adapter.
Risk of damage to the data on the connected device! USB device
To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
› To connect, insert the USB device into the appro-
follows. priate port.
› In the Media main menu, tap Safely remove:.
To play audio files, use USB ports that support data
› Select the desired device. transfer.
› Disconnect/remove the device.
› To disconnect disconnect the USB device first. To
Bluetooth® player do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safe-
Infotainment allows audio files of a connected Blue- ly:and select the USB device.
tooth® player to play using the A2DP and AVRCP au-
dio profile.
› Disconnect the USB device.
A USB device can be connected directly to the
With Infotainment, multiple devices can be paired USB port or via a connection cable.
using Bluetooth®, but only one of them can be used We recommend that you use extension cables from
as a Bluetooth® player. ŠKODA Original Accessories.
› For connecting the Bluetooth® player, pair and USB extension cables or reducers may affect the
connect the device via Bluetooth®. playback function of the connected device.
› In the Media main menu , tap on Bluetooth paired Load USB audio source
devices. After connecting the USB device, charging will start
› In the list, choose the device with the symbol . automatically when the following conditions are met.
If a device is connected to Infotainment using ✓ The ignition is switched on.
Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, then it cannot be ✓ The USB device allows charging.
connected using Bluetooth®.
The charging efficiency can be different compared to
SD card the charging from the usual mains power supply.
NOTICE Depending on the type of the connected USB device
Risk of damaging the SD card reader! and the frequency of use, the charging current may
▶ Do not use SD cards with a broken slide for write not be sufficient to charge the battery of the con-
protection. nected device.
› To insert the SD card, with the bevelled corner to Some connected audio sources may not be recog-
the right, push into the slot in the external module nised and cannot be charged.
until it snaps into place.
› To remove, first disconnect the SD card safely. To
do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safely:
and select the SD card.
86 Infotainment Bolero › Media

Supported sources and files

Source Interface Type Specification File system


SD
SD card SD card reader Standard size SDHC
SDXC
USB stick
HDD
(without special soft-
FAT16
MSC ware)
FAT32
USB devices that use
exFAT
the USB mass storage
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x NTFS
support protocol
USB or higher with USB
Devices running the An-
2.x support
droid or Windows Phone
MTP operating system that
support the Media
Transfer Protocol
Devices with an iOS op-
Apple HFS+
erating system
Bluetooth® protocols
Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® - A2DP and AVRCP (1.0 - -
1.5)
Supported sources

The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources are not supported by Infotain-
ment.
Viewing images on the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Apple devices.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobile
device being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility

Compression for- Codec type File exten- Max. bit rate Max. sam- Multi channels
mat sion [kbps] pling rate
[kHz]
Mono, dual mono,
MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48 Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG
MPEG 2 Layer 3 16, 22, 24 Mono,
mp3 8 - 160 Stereo, Joint
MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12
Stereo
Windows Media
8 - 384 8, 11, 12, 16,
Audio 9 and 9.1
22, 32, 44,
Windows Media Mono, Stereo,
WMA wma 8 - 320 48
Audio 9.2 Joint stereo
Windows Media 32, 44, 48,
8 - 768
Audio 10 96
8, 11, 12, 16,
defined by the
22, 24, 32, Mono, Stereo,
FLAC FLAC flac format
44, 48, 64, 5.1, 7.1
Approx. 5.5 Mbps
88, 96
Infotainment Bolero › Images 87

Compression for- Codec type File exten- Max. bit rate Max. sam- Multi channels
mat sion [kbps] pling rate
[kHz]
defined by the 8, 11, 12, 16,
Mono,
OGG-Vorbis OGC-Vorbis ogg format 22, 24, 32,
Stereo
Approx. 5.5 Mbps 44, 48
22, 24, 32,
AAC LC
44, 48 Mono,
ADTS aac 16 - 400
AAC HE 16, 22, 24, Stereo
AAC HEv2 32, 44, 48
8, 11, 12, 16,
Mono,
RIFF WAV wav 64 - 3072 22, 24, 32,
Stereo
44, 48, 96
Supported audio files

Files that are protected by the DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.

Codec type File extension


M3U m3u
M3U8 m3u8
PLS pls
WPL wpl
ASX asx
PLA pls
Supported playlists

Images Operation

Overview Touch operation

Display main menu


› Tap on .

A Look at images
▶ Show the next image
A Select source
▶ Show the previous image
▶ Start slideshow
Manage files
▶ Stop slideshow
Settings
B View image
▶ Turn to the left
▶ Turn to the right
▶ Display in initial size
88 Infotainment Bolero › Images

Gesture control Settings


▶ Show the next image. The following Infotainment functions are set in the
menu.
▶ Display image size.
▶ Display image duration during the slideshow.
▶ Slideshow repeat.

Supported sources and files

Source Interface Specifica- File system


▶ Show the previous im- tion
age. Standard
size
SD card
SD card SD
reader
SDHC FAT16
SDXC FAT32
USB 1.x; 2.x USB stick exFAT
3.x HDD NTFS
USB or higher (without
with USB special
▶ Enlarge view. 2.x support software)
Supported sources

Codec type File extension Max. resolution


[Mpx]
BMP bmp 4
JPG; JPEG jpg; jpeg 4 (Progressive
Mode)
64
GIF gif 4
▶ Zoom out. PNG png 4
Supported files
The maximum supported image size is 20 MB.

▶ Maximize image/
display image size.
Infotainment Bolero › Mobile device management 89

Mobile device management


Overview

Mobile device management


› In the Telephone main menu , tap on the functional surface Bluetooth paired devices.
In the list of paired mobile devices, the following symbols may appear for the individual devices.
Grey icon - the device can be connected as a telephone.
Green icon - the device is connected as a telephone.
Grey icon - the device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.
White icon - the device is connected as a Bluetooth® player.
Possible functions of the connected mobile device
The functions of a device connected via over the HFP Bluetooth profile depends on the following connection
types.

First device Second device


Main phone Additional phone
incoming / outgoing calls
SMS incoming calls
Telephone contacts Bluetooth® player
Bluetooth® player

With Infotainment only a mobile device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.

Limitations of mobile devices and applications


Availability of features
The availability of certain features depends on the
type of mobile device, as well as that of the applica-
tions installed. Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the large number of mobile devices, it is not
Connection restrictions possible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibility
▶ With Infotainment, a max. of 20 mobile devices are
with Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility depends
paired. on the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa-
▶ The range of the connection of the mobile device tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer of
to Infotainment is limited to the passenger com- the mobile device.
partment.
▶ After reaching the maximum number, the pairing
Applications in mobile devices
of the next mobile device will replace that of the Mobile devices can be used to install applications
device that has not been used for the longest peri- that allow you to view additional information on the
od of time. Infotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainment
system.
Compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on-
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see
going development, the available applications may
if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo-
not function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as-
bile device being tested. This check is carried out by
sumes no liability for their proper functioning.
using the following reference or by reading the QR
code. The scope of available applications and their func-
tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, as
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
well as the vehicle and country.
90 Infotainment Bolero › Telephone

Connection set-up Delete a paired mobile device


› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
› To delete a mobile device, tap and confirm the
› Turn on the ignition. deletion.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device. › To delete all mobile devices, tap on Delete all and con-
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment firm the deletion.
Bluetooth Bluetooth.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® visibility of the Infotain-
ment Bluetooth Visibility: Visible. Telephone
› Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de- Telephone main menu
vice.
› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit. Display main menu
The name of the unit can be found by tapping › Tap on .
Bluetooth Name:. Or:
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
› Tap on .
confirm.
The mobile device is connected to the Infotainment
or just paired, depending on the number of devices
that are already connected.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-
vice
› Turn on the ignition.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment
Bluetooth Bluetooth.
A Name of the connected telephone
› Tap on Bluetooth Search for devices.
▶ Tap: Show list of previously connected phones
› Select the desired device from the list of Blue-
tooth® devices. B Preset buttons for preferred contacts

› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then C Choice of storage group for the preferred con-
confirm. tacts
› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment, D Name of telephone service providers
select the device to be replaced. ▶ If the symbol is displayed in front of the name,
Connect Infotainment to a mobile device that is roaming is active.
not already paired E Symbol for the connection type
The connection with an already coupled mobile de-
F Status symbol of the phone
vice is made automatically after switching on the ig-
nition; if necessary the device can be connected Change the main phone to the extension tele-
manually as follows. phone
› Turn on the ignition. Enter the telephone number
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device. Contact list
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment Text messages
Bluetooth Bluetooth.
Call lists
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
Settings
› In the device list, select the desired device and the
Bluetooth® profile.
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
Conditions for connecting a telephone with
confirm.
Infotainment
› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced. ✓ The ignition is switched on.
Disconnect from a mobile device ✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment and
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices. the telephone needs to be switched on.
› Tap on the Bluetooth® profile icon of the desired
mobile device.
Infotainment Bolero › Telephone 91

The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment is › To switch the call tone from the telephone to the
switched on in the menu item Bluetooth speakers, tap .
Bluetooth.
Conference call
✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on. A conference call is a joint telephone conversation
The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on in with a minimum of three and a maximum of six par-
the menu item Bluetooth Visibility:. Visible. ticipants.
✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info- › Make the next call during an ongoing conversation/
tainment's Bluetooth® unit. conference.
✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment.
Or:
✓ Through Infotainment, no mobile device can be
connected using Apple CarPlay. › Accept a new incoming call by tapping the function
area .
› To start a conference call, tap on the functional
Telephone operation area .
Enter telephone number During an ongoing conference call, the following
› In the Telephone main menu, tap . functions can be selected depending on the context.
› Enter the telephone number using the numeric Hold the conference call and leave temporarily
keypad that is displayed. (the conference will continue in the background)
Return to the conference being held
The displayed numeric keypad can also be used
/ Switch the microphone off / on
for searching for contacts.
End the conference
If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contacts
Show details of the conference call
with the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-
played next to the numeric keypad. In the details of the conference call, depending on
the connected telephone, the following functions
List of telephone contacts can be selected.
The list of telephone contacts is imported from the
Show details of the conference call participants
connected main telephone.
End conversation with the conference call par-
› To display the contact list in the telephone main ticipant
menu, tap . Conversation with a participant outside of the
› To find details within the list, tap Find. conference call
› Enter the details you wish to find. Send a text message
› To establish a connection with a contact, tap the › In the Telephone main menu, tap New text mes-
functional area showing the desired contact. sage.
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, select › Write a text message and confirm; a view of the
the telephone number from the displayed list. message is displayed.
The message can be edited when the text area
› To display the details for a contact, tap .
within the view is tapped.
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox num- › Consult or select the recipient of the message, if
ber necessary tap to enter the phone number.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap .
› Add more recipients or confirm selected recipi-
Telephone conversation ents.
Depending on the context of the telephone conver- › Tap on .
sation, the following functions can be selected.
Display received text messages
End connection / reject incoming call / end call › In the Telephone main menu, tap E-mails .
Answer an incoming call / return to the held call
› To display the Message, select the desired mes-
/ Switch the ringer off / on sage.
Hold a call
/ Switch the microphone off / on The message content and the following menu with
Show details of the caller functions is displayed.
Set up a conference call Read the text message using the generated Info-
› To switch the call tone from the speakers to the tainment voice.
telephone, go to the telephone main menu and tap Display the menu with the following functions
on hands-free. of an accepted message.
92 Infotainment Bolero › SmartLink

Option to answer the message by means of a Number for the voice mailbox
template. › To set the voice mailbox number in the Telephone
Delete message. main menu, tap on User profile Mailbox number:.
Recognise phone numbers in the message. › Enter the number of the voice mailbox.
Forward message, with the option to edit the
message before sending. Conference calls
Reply to the sender by sending a message. › To enable/disable the option for conference call
setup in the phone main menu, tap conference.

Settings for Infotainment telephone functions


SmartLink
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
› To save the desired preset button, press and hold. Functionality
› Select a contact from the displayed list. SmartLink offers the ability to display and operate
› If the contact contains multiple telephone num- certified applications from a connected mobile de-
bers, choose the desired telephone number. vice in the Infotainment screen.
› To delete tap on Telephone User profile Manage fa- Certification may be conditional upon the use of the
vourites in the main menu. latest update to the particular SmartLink application.
› To delete one preset, tap on the list entry and con- Applications include, for example, apps for route
firm the deletion. guidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.
Or: Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable.
› To delete all presets, tap on Delete all and confirm the Supported connection types
deletion.
SmartLink supports the following connection types.
Import telephone contacts ▶ Android Auto.
After first connecting the main telephone with Info- Apple CarPlay.

tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-
▶ MirrorLink.
ted into the Infotainment memory.
Infotainment can import up to 2000 telephone con-
tacts together with contact pictures. Each contact Overview of the SmartLink connection
can include max. 5 telephone numbers.
Main menu SmartLink
Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-
mation may be required.
› Tap on .
Or:
Update telephone contacts
When re-connecting the telephone with Infotain- › Tap on .
ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out.
› For a manual update of the list in the telephone
main menu, tap on User profile Import contacts.
Show pictures on phone contacts
› In the Telephone main menu, tap User profile Show
pictures for contacts.
Sort contacts in the phone book
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on User profile
Sort by:.
A Previously connected device
› Select the type by which to sort.
B Currently connected device
Ringer
Display information about SmartLink
Some phones do not allow the use of the telephone
ringtone; instead, the Infotainment ringtone is used. Separation of the active connection
› To set the Infotainment ringer in the Telephone Settings for the SmartLink menu
main menu, tap on User profile Select ringtone.
› Select the ringtone.
Infotainment Bolero › SmartLink 93

Android Auto Connection conditions


General connection conditions
✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar-
tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car-
Play and MirrorLink.
✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar-
tLinkconnection, are supported in the respective
market.
✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo-
bile device to be “unlocked”.
Navigation applications Conditions for Android Auto
Telephone applications ✓ The device to be connected must have Android
AutoSupport.
Overview of running applications, phone calls, in-
coming text messages, and more. A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Android Auto connection supports
Music applications
can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
Display of other available applications as well as ✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal-
the option to return to the SmartLink main menu led on the mobile device.
Turn on voice control (Google Voice) ✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the mobile device to be turned on.
Apple CarPlay
Conditions for Apple CarPlay
✓ The device to be connected must have Apple
CarPlaySupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supports
can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
✓ Siri voice control is on.
✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile
device.

A List of available applications Conditions for MirrorLink


✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror-
Depending on the duration of operation: LinkSupport.
▶ Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu
A list of devices and applications that the Mirror-
▶ Hold: Switch on voice control (Siri)
Link connection supports can be found on the
MirrorLink websites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®.
✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installed
on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the connected mobile device to be turned on.

Operation
Operation of the running MirrorLink application
› To display the following operation surfaces, press
the right rotary control .
It is not possible to operate the application while
driving Display of control surfaces at the bottom
Display of control surfaces at the top
Return to the SmartLink main menu Return to the MirrorLink main menu
List of running applications
Display of the last running application in connec-
ted mobile devices
Settings
94 Infotainment Bolero › ŠKODA Connect online services

Restriction › Connect the mobile device to the front USB input


using a cable.
Restriction of SmartLink applications while driving
For safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap-
› Choose to connect via Android Auto.
plications while driving is not possible or is restric- Android Auto - Disconnection
ted. › In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re-
turn to ŠKODA”.
Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an
Android Auto connection › Tap on .
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de- MirrorLink - Connection via USB
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me- › Turn on the Infotainment.
dia menu. › Turn on the mobile device.
▶ By connecting the device, all currently connected
› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected and the using a cable.
device will automatically be connected as the main
telephone.
› Choose to connect through MirrorLink.
▶ For the duration of the connection, no other Blue- MirrorLink - Disconnection
tooth® devices can be connected to the Infotain- › In the MirrorLink main menu, tap .
ment system. › Tap on .
Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an Change to another device / connection type
Apple CarPlay connection Infotainment allows you to switch between currently
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de- connected devices and the connection type.
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
dia menu.
› Tap on .

▶ Connecting the device disconnects all currently


› Select the desired device or connection type.
connected Bluetooth® devices.
▶ For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth® ŠKODA Connect online services
devices can be connected to the Infotainment sys-
tem. Functionality
Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an ŠKODA Connect online service offer the option of
MirrorLink connection connecting the vehicle to the online world. They thus
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de- represent an extension of the vehicle and Infotain-
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me- ment functions.
dia menu.
For the functionality of the ŠKODA Connect Online
▶ If you wish to use the device to be connected in
Services, the vehicle must be within range of a mo-
the Telephone menu, the device must be paired bile network through which the services are provi-
with and connected to the Infotainment system by ded. The availability, the connection speed and the
Bluetooth® before establishing the MirrorLink con- technology used in the mobile network can be differ-
nection. ent in the respective countries and are dependent on
the mobile network operator.
Settings The ŠKODA Connect online services are not included
in the equipment of the vehicle. They can be ordered
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB separately on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
› Turn on the Infotainment. in the ŠKODA Connect application.
› Turn on the mobile device. The offer of ŠKODA Connect online services de-
› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input pends on the type of vehicle and its trim level, Info-
using a cable. tainment and country. Availability in each country
› Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay. can be checked on the ŠKODA Connect website.
Apple CarPlay – Disconnection The rights and obligations of the Parties with respect
› In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO- to the provision of these services are governed by a
DA” functional area. separate agreement. Current legal documents re-
› Tap on . garding the online services can be found on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the ŠKODA Con-
Android Auto - Connection via USB nect application.
› Turn on the Infotainment.
› Turn on the mobile device.
Infotainment Bolero › ŠKODA Connect online services 95

ŠKODA Connect website ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp


▶ http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect

For example, the ŠKODA Connect web-


site contains the latest information
about the online services, a link to the
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the
option of downloading the ŠKODA Con-
nect application. Settings
ŠKODA Connect Portal website Registration and activation of online services
▶http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal User registration, as well as the activation of the
The ŠKODA Connect Portal website is ŠKODA Connect online services, is completed on the
used, for example, for registration, acti- ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
vation and ordering of online services. It Connect application.
also provides the option of remote ac- In order to complete user registration, you will need
cess to the vehicle. to access your e-mails.
Information call In order to activate ŠKODA Connect, proceed as fol-
The information call may be used in the case of prob- lows.
lems with the online services or for information re-
garding the products and services of the ŠKODA
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
brand. › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN you have re-
✓ The functional condition represents the active ceived during user and vehicle registration on the
online ŠKODA Connect services. ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
› Press the button. Connect application.
› Wait for the registration completion message to
appear.
› Confirm any messages on the screen.
Delete user
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration.
› Tap Delete user Delete.
› Confirm the deletion.
Breakdown call By deleting the registered vehicle in the user ac-
The breakdown call can be used in the event of a count on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal the
breakdown. user is also deleted in Infotainment.
✓ The functional condition represents the active Changing the user
online ŠKODA Connect services.
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
› Press the button. › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration.
› Tap New owner Change ownership.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN code re-
ceived during registration of the new user and dur-
ing vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website.
› If necessary, confirm the change by tapping the
function surface Change main users.
Management of online services
ŠKODA Connect Application In the service management, it is possible to display
The ŠKODA Connect application enables remote ac- information about the online services, the validity of
cess to the vehicle using a mobile device. It can also their licence, or to switch the services on/off.
be used for user registration and to activate and › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Privacy settings
configure the online services. and manage services.
The application can be downloaded to the mobile de- › To display the designations and the status of the
vice after scanning the following QR code or link. services, select the desired service.
96 Infotainment Bolero › ŠKODA Connect online services

› For detailed information about the service tap . sonal data, which are essential for the provision of
› To switch the services on/off, tap the Checkbox. Care Connect online services, are deactivated.

Connection status of the online services › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Manage-
The connection status of the online services of ŠKO- ment Care Connect.
DA Connect online services is indicated by an icon in NOTICE
the status bar on the Infotainment screen. The emergency call remains fully functional after
turning off the Care Connect feature.
The functions of the information and breakdown call
are limited.
Switch online services on/off
It is possible to have the online services switched
off/on exclusively by a ŠKODA service partner.
After turning off the online services, none of the
ŠKODA Connect online services, including the
emergency calls are functioning.
A The ŠKODA Connect online services are availa- To inform the vehicle
ble. user that the ŠKODA
At the same time the symbol of the data con- Connect online services
nection type can be displayed. are out of order, the
service partner applies
B The ŠKODA Connect online services are not
the sticker at a visible
available.
point in the vehicle (e.g. on the roof cladding).
C Localisation services are restricted or disabled.
This sticker must not be removedas long as the on-
Detailed information about the online services line services are off.
can be viewed in the Online Services Administra-
tion. NOTICE
It should be noted that the emergency, information
D Localisation services are enabled.
and breakdown calls are not available after switching
Detailed information about the online services off the online services.
can be viewed in the Online Services Administra- For this reason, no automatic emergency call is made
tion. in the event of a serious car accident.
Localisation services
For the complete functionality of some online serv-
ices, activated localisation services are required.
Localisation services include, for example, informa-
tion on the last parking position, area notification or
speed notification.
When localisation services are active, the symbol
will be displayed in the status line in the Infotainment
screen.
Switching Private mode function on/off
By switching the Private mode function on, the serv-
ices relating to sending vehicle information and per-
sonal data, which are essential for the provision of
online services, are deactivated.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Manage-
ment Private mode.
The emergency call remains fully functional after
turning on the private mode feature.
The functions of the information and breakdown call
are limited.
Switch Care Connect function on/off
By switching the Care Connect services off, the serv-
ices relating to sending vehicle information and per-
Infotainment Amundsen › Infotainment overview 97

Infotainment Amundsen
Infotainment overview

Grid display

A Touchscreen
Rotary control on the left
▶ Press: Switch Infotainment on/off
▶ Turn: Adjust Volume List
Rotary control on the right Restriction
▶ Press: Confirm menu item
▶ Turn: select menu item/set value
For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainment
functions while driving is not possible or is restricted.
Radio menu
The Infotainment system indicates this by means of
Media menu a message in the screen.
Phone menu
Voice control
Basic settings
Navigation menu
Setting basic functions
SmartLink menu
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
Information about vehicle settings menu.
Overview of Infotainment menus ▶ Time and date.
▶ Language.
▶ Units.
System ▶ Restore factory settings.
Infotainment Menus Sound settings
The Infotainment sound is set in the menu .
MENU menu
The MENU menu contains all available Infotainment The following menu items can be set.
menus. ▶ Setting the equalizer.
› To Display the menu tap . ▶ Adjusting the volume ratio.
The graphic display type for the MENU menu can be ▶ Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment
set. functions.
Some are adjustable, for example the following
menu items.
▶ Volume adjustment of voice commands.
▶ Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment
is turned on.
▶ Speed-dependent volume setting.
▶ Setting the Infotainment to mute with the park-
ing aid switched on.
98 Infotainment Amundsen › Screen

Depending on the equipment, the following ad- The system update ensures optimal function of the
vanced sound settings can be set. Infotainment system, e.g. compatibility with new
▶ Setting space optimisation. phones.
▶ Setting the audio profiles according to genre. Determine system version
▶ Adjusting the subwoofer volume. › Tap System information.
Configuration wizard Manual update
The configuration wizard helps to set certain Info- For information on available updates, please refer to
tainment functions. the ŠKODA internet pages.
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed
if, after switching on the Infotainment system, there
are at least two menu items that have not been set
or if a new user account has been selected.
› To switch off the automatic display, tap on Don't ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
show again when the configuration wizard is displayed.
› For manual display, tap on Configuration wiz-
› Visit available updates.
ard. › Save the update to a USB source.
› Insert the USB source into the front USB input.
Setting the MENU
› Tap System information Update software.
The graphic display type for the MENU menu can be
set as follows. › Select the connected USB device as the update
source.
› Screen Menu: › Go to the update file and confirm the update.
› Select one of the following menu items. › Confirm any messages and wait for the update
▶ Grid display - Grid display. process to be completed.
▶ Horizont. Display - horizontal display.
Safely disconnect the connected USB device Screen
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected device!
Overview
To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
follows.
› Tap Remove safely:.
› Select the desired device.
› Disconnect/remove the device.
Electronic voice amplification for driver and pas-
senger
The voice enhancer allows transmission of the driv-
er's and passenger's voice on the speakers in the
rear. A Status bar
› For volume adjustment of voice amplification B Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayed
volume, tap Electronic voice enhancement. menu
C Other pages of the menu
Troubleshooting
Infotainment not responding Operation
The Infotainment system must be restarted.
NOTICE
› Press for more than 10 s. Danger of screen damage!
› Wait for the restart to complete. ▶ The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it
lightly with your finger.
System update In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op-
eration of a mobile phone.
We recommend having the system update carried
out by a specialist company. The following operating modes are specific to the In-
fotainment system.
Infotainment Amundsen › Infotainment keyboard 99

Dragging up or down with two fingers Infotainment keyboard


▶ Quickly review the list Keypad overview
of phone contacts.
The arrangement of the keypad characters depends
on the Infotainment language that has been set.
In Infotainment, the following types are used, de-
pending on the context.
▶ Alphanumeric.
▶ Numeric.
▶ Keypad for input.
Pulling apart with two fingers ▶ Keypad for search.

▶ Enlarge image.
▶ Zoom in to the map.

Keypad example
Pulling together with two fingers
A Input line
▶ Minimize image. ▶ Delete characters before the cursor
▶ Zoom out of the map. ▶ Tap: delete the last character
▶ Hold: delete all characters in sequence
▶ Show list of searched entries
B Keypad functional surfaces
▶ Change to lowercase
▶ Switch to the first capital letter, followed by
lowercase letters
Finger movement ▶ / Switch to the language keypad
▶ Switch to the numeric and character key-
▶ Move the map. pad
▶ Show additional keypad languages
▶ Insert a space
▶ Hold: Show additional character variants
▶ Move cursor to the left
▶ Move cursor to the right
▶ Confirm the characters that have been en-
tered

Settings
The following basic screen functions are set in the
Screen menu.
▶ Brightness level of the screen.
▶ Switch off the screen.
▶ Display the time.
▶ Confirmation sounds and animations.
100 Infotainment Amundsen › Voice control

Numeric keypad Voice control


Functionality
Voice control principle
Voice control works according to the principle of
dialogue between the user and the Infotainment sys-
tem.
The user says a voice command. The Infotainment
system responds or executes the voice command.

Keypad example
Operating conditions
A Input line
▶ Delete characters before the cursor ✓ Ignition is switched on.
✓ Infotainment is switched on.
▶ Tap: delete the last character
✓ No telephone conversation can be held via Info-
▶ Hold: delete all characters
tainment.
B Keypad functional surfaces

▶ Confirm the characters that have been entered Operation


If context-sensitive, alphanumeric characters can
be entered by holding a functional surface with a Voice control process
digit. › To turn on voice control, press the button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Or:
Operation
› Tap on .
The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters, After switching on, the icon is displayed.
letters and numbers.
› Say a voice command.
The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-
During recognition of the voice command, the icon
fotainment prompts for characters.
is displayed.
Find The Infotainment system then executes the voice
During the character input, a search for correspond- command or plays the message. During the message,
ing entries takes place. the icon is displayed.
The entry to be searched can be entered, including After the execution of the voice command, voice
diacritics. control is switched off.
The keypad will only provide characters that match
Correcting a voice command
the stored entries.
› During voice command input, press the button
› To display the searched entries, tap . on the multifunction steering wheel and say a new
Show additional keypad languages voice command.
To use the additional keypad languages, the desired Stopping voice control
languages must be set first. Stopping leaves more time for voice command input,
› Tap or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until the e.g. for searching for a phone contact.
desired language keypad is displayed. › Move your finger up or down over the Infotain-
Further character variants ment screen.
› Press and hold the sign with the symbol . Or:
› Select the desired symbol. › Say the “pause” voice command.
Resuming stopped voice control
Setting additional keypad languages › Press the button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
› Tap Additional keypad languages.
Or:
› Tap on in the Infotainment screen.
Infotainment Amundsen › Radio 101

Stopping the played back message Radio


› Press the button on the multifunction steering
wheel. Overview
Ending voice control Display main menu
› Press and hold the button on the multifunction › Tap on .
steering wheel. Or:
Or:
› Tap on .
› Say the voice command “cancel” during voice com- Analogue and digital radio reception
mand input.

Restriction
For some Infotainment languages, no voice control is
available. The Infotainment system will indicate this.
The messages are generated by the Infotainment
system. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or city name) can-
not always be guaranteed.
You cannot use voice control while a phone call is in
progress. A Select frequency range
B Depending on the frequency range
FM: Radio text
Settings DAB: Name of the station group
The following voice control functions are set in the C Preset buttons for preferred stations
menu Voice control. List of available stations
▶ Confirmation tones. Manual station search
▶ Display of sample commands.
Display information about the station (applies to
DAB)
Self-help Settings
Starting acoustic help Infotainment supports digital radio reception in
› If the Infotainment system is expecting a voice DAB and DAB+ formats.
command, say “Help”.
List of available stations
The “Help” voice command can be issued repeatedly
› To display, tap .
for further tips on voice control.
Played station
Activate/deactivate the display of example voice Station stored on the presets
commands in the Infotainment screen. A traffic radio station is set
The system offers the option of displaying example DAB signal is not available
voice commands after switching on the voice con- The DAB station reception is not stable
trol in the Infotainment screen. To filter the FM stations into alphabetical order,
› To turn on/off voice control tap on Example tap according to group or genre.
commands (Infotainment system). The prerequisite for the filtering option is ensur-
ing RDS and AF functions are activated.
Activate/deactivate display of example voice com- Manual update of the station list
mands in the instrument cluster display
The system offers the option of displaying example In the FM station list, information about the pro-
voice commands after switching on the voice con- gramme type and the type of the regional station
trol in the Instrument cluster screen. can be displayed.

› To turn on/off voice control tap on Example


commands (Instrument cluster).
102 Infotainment Amundsen › Radio

Operation Delete favourites


› In the Radio main menu , tap Delete presets.
Select station
› To delete one preset button for preferred stations,
tap the desired station button and confirm the de-
letion.
› To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations,
tap All and confirm the deletion.
Buttons
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
The variant for changing stations using buttons
in the Radio main menu is set as follows.
› Tap or at the top of the screen. › In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:.
SCAN function › Choose the change variant.
The function plays receivable stations of the selec- Traffic reception (TP) for FM stations on/off
ted frequency range in succession for a few seconds Applies to the FM frequency range.
each.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Traffic program (TP).
› To start automatic play press Scan or the right
rotary control . Switch traffic reception for DAB stations on/off
› To end automatic play press or the right rotary Applies to the DAB frequency range.
control . › In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item Traf-
fic Radio (TP).
Find stations manually
› In the Radio main menu, tap . › In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings DAB
traffic programme announcements (TP) on/off.
› To search in sequence, tap or next to the dis-
played frequency range scale. Assign station logo from an external source
Or: Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.

› Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency range Infotainment offers the option to assign logos from
scale and move it to the desired value. the pictures on an external source to the station but-
tons.
Or:
For station logos, images in jpg, gif, png, bmp format
› Turn the right rotary control . with a maximum resolution of 500x500 pixels can be
used.
Restriction › In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos.
› Tap the desired preset button.
Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains can

restrict radio reception.
› Select the external source with the logo.
In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-
› Find the desired logo and confirm.

ceiving the radio signal. The information for updating station logos is taken
from the ŠKODA web pages.
Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-
bels may affect the reception of the radio signal.

Settings
Save the station currently being listened to as a fa- ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
vourite from the Radio main menu
Delete station logos
› Hold the desired station key for preferred stations Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
until the station is stored.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:.
Save station to favourites from the list of available
stations
› To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and
confirm the deletion.
› Hold the line with the name of the desired station. › To delete all logos, tap on All and confirm the dele-
› Tap the desired preset button. tion.
Infotainment Amundsen › Radio 103

Activating / deactivating automatic station logo › In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Radio
assignment Data System (RDS).
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges. If the RDS function is disabled, the following menu
When the function is switched on, a station logo items in FM station settings are not available.
from the Infotainment memory is assigned when the Traffic programme (TP).

station is stored on a preset.
▶ Radio text.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings ▶ RDS Regional.
Autostore station logos.
▶ Automatic frequency change (AF).
Regional FM station logo ▶ Regional station logo.
Applies to the FM frequency range.
Switch additional DAB announcements on/off
Infotainment provides the option of using country- Applies to the DAB frequency range.
specific FM station logos.
When the function is switched on, other announce-
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings ments are received as traffic announcements. For ex-
Region for station logo:. ample, weather news, sports reports, financial news,
› Choose the country. etc.
Turn on/off radio text reception › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges. Other DAB announcements.
When the function is switched on and station pre- Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of a
sets are displayed, detailed information about the DAB station
broadcast content of the FM station being listened Applies to the DAB frequency range.
to, or the name of the station group for the DAB sta-
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion, is displayed.
tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes to
› In the Radio main menu, tap Radio text. the same station with a better signal in a different
DAB station group.
Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/off
Applies to the FM frequency range. › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
DAB - DAB station tracking.
When the function is switched on and the signal of
the FM station currently being listened to is weak, Turn on/off automatic switching from a DAB sta-
Infotainment automatically sets the same station to tion to the same FM station
a different frequency with a better signal. Applies to the DAB frequency range.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
Automatic frequency control (AF). tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-
cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol
Automatic change of frequency to a regionally
(FM) is displayed after the station name.
linked FM station
Applies to the FM frequency range. When the corresponding DAB station can be re-
ceived again, the station automatically changes from
Infotainment provides the option of automatically
FM to DAB.
switching to a regionally linked FM station in case of
signal loss of the FM station being listened to. › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
Automatic DAB - FM switching.
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
RDS Regional:. Activating/deactivating reception of DAB trans-
› Select one of the following menu items. mitter in the L band
In some countries, the DAB radio reception is only
▶ Fixed - If there is a loss of signal, another station
available as a so-called LBand.
must be set manually.
▶ Automatic - automatic selection of the station with › In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings L-
the best signal reception. Band:.
If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainment If there is no DAB radio reception available in the
will automatically set another available region. L-band in your country, we recommend turning the
L-band off.
Switch RDS on/off The DAB channel scan is therefore faster.
Applies to the FM frequency range.
The menu item is only available for some countries.
104 Infotainment Amundsen › Media

Media Tap: start playback


Tap: pause
What you should be mindful of
Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap: play
▶ Do not save any important data or that which has the previous song
not been backed up on the connected audio sour-
After 3 seconds from the start of playback, tap
ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or
to play the current title from the beginning
damaged files or connected audio sources.
▶ When changing or connecting an audio source, this Hold: fast rewind within the title
may cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce the Tap: play the next song
volume before changing or connecting an audio
Hold: fast forward within the title
source.
▶ When connecting an audio source, the source in- Movement within the title is also possible by drag-
formation messages can be displayed. These mes- ging the finger over the timeline.
sages must be observed and, if necessary, con-
firmed. Extended operation
Turn repeat playback of the current track on/off
▶ The national copyright laws that apply in your
Turn repeat playback of the current album/fold-
country must be observed.
er on/off
Turn random playback of the current album/
Overview folder on/off

Display main menu


› Tap on . Settings
Or: Turn title playback including subfolders on/off
› Tap on . › In the Media main menu, tap on Mix/Repeat including
subfolders.
Traffic
› To turn on/off the traffic monitoring during the
playback of media files, go to the Media main menu
and tap on Traffic programme (TP).
Safely disconnect the connected device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected device!
To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
A Select source follows.
Manage files / multimedia database › In the Media main menu, tap Safely remove:.
Settings
› Select the desired device.
› Disconnect/remove the device.
Bluetooth® player
Operation Infotainment allows audio files of a connected Blue-
tooth® player to play using the A2DP and AVRCP au-
Operation - Basics dio profile.
With Infotainment, multiple devices can be paired
using Bluetooth®, but only one of them can be used
as a Bluetooth® player.
› For connecting the Bluetooth® player, pair and
connect the device via Bluetooth®.
› In the Media main menu , tap on Bluetooth paired
devices.
› In the list, choose the device with the symbol .
If a device is connected to Infotainment using
A Album image / symbol of the connected source Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, then it cannot be
Tap: display available albums connected using Bluetooth®.
Infotainment Amundsen › Media 105

SD card › Disconnect the USB device.


NOTICE A USB device can be connected directly to the
Risk of damaging the SD card reader! USB port or via a connection cable.
▶ Do not use SD cards with a broken slide for write We recommend that you use extension cables from
protection. ŠKODA Original Accessories.
USB extension cables or reducers may affect the
› To insert the SD card, with the bevelled corner to playback function of the connected device.
the right, push into the slot in the external module
until it snaps into place. Load USB audio source
› To remove, first disconnect the SD card safely. To After connecting the USB device, charging will start
do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safely: automatically when the following conditions are met.
and select the SD card. ✓ The ignition is switched on.
› Press on the inserted SD memory card. ✓ The USB device allows charging.
The SD card moves to the eject position. The charging efficiency can be different compared to
NOTICE the charging from the usual mains power supply.
When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vi- Depending on the type of the connected USB device
brations might cause the card to fall out of the and the frequency of use, the charging current may
adapter. not be sufficient to charge the battery of the con-
nected device.
USB device
› To connect, insert the USB device into the appro- Some connected audio sources may not be recog-
priate port. nised and cannot be charged.
To play audio files, use USB ports that support data
transfer.
› To disconnect disconnect the USB device first. To
do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safe-
ly:and select the USB device.

Supported sources and files

Source Interface Type Specification File system


SD
SD card SD card reader Standard size SDHC
SDXC
USB stick
HDD
(without special soft-
FAT16
MSC ware)
FAT32
USB devices that use
exFAT
the USB mass storage
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x NTFS
support protocol
USB or higher with USB
Devices running the An-
2.x support
droid or Windows Phone
MTP operating system that
support the Media
Transfer Protocol
Devices with an iOS op-
Apple HFS+
erating system
Bluetooth® protocols
Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® - A2DP and AVRCP (1.0 - -
1.5)
Supported sources

The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources are not supported by Infotain-
ment.
Viewing images on the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Apple devices.
106 Infotainment Amundsen › Media

Compatibility of mobile devices


It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobile
device being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility

Compression for- Codec type File exten- Max. bit rate Max. sam- Multi channels
mat sion [kbps] pling rate
[kHz]
Mono, dual mono,
MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48 Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG
MPEG 2 Layer 3 16, 22, 24 Mono,
mp3 8 - 160 Stereo, Joint
MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12
Stereo
Windows Media
8 - 384 8, 11, 12, 16,
Audio 9 and 9.1
22, 32, 44,
Windows Media Mono, Stereo,
WMA wma 8 - 320 48
Audio 9.2 Joint stereo
Windows Media 32, 44, 48,
8 - 768
Audio 10 96
8, 11, 12, 16,
defined by the
22, 24, 32, Mono, Stereo,
FLAC FLAC flac format
44, 48, 64, 5.1, 7.1
Approx. 5.5 Mbps
88, 96
defined by the 8, 11, 12, 16,
Mono,
OGG-Vorbis OGC-Vorbis ogg format 22, 24, 32,
Stereo
Approx. 5.5 Mbps 44, 48
22, 24, 32,
AAC LC
44, 48 Mono,
ADTS aac 16 - 400
AAC HE 16, 22, 24, Stereo
AAC HEv2 32, 44, 48
8, 11, 12, 16,
Mono,
RIFF WAV wav 64 - 3072 22, 24, 32,
Stereo
44, 48, 96
Supported audio files

Files that are protected by the DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.

Codec type File extension


M3U m3u
M3U8 m3u8
PLS pls
WPL wpl
ASX asx
PLA pls
Supported playlists
Infotainment Amundsen › Images 107

Images Gesture control

Overview ▶ Show the next image.

Display main menu


› Tap on .

▶ Show the previous im-


age.

A Select source
Manage files
Settings

Operation
▶ Enlarge view.
Touch operation

▶ Zoom out.

A Look at images
▶ Show the next image
▶ Show the previous image
▶ Start slideshow
▶ Stop slideshow
B View image
▶ Turn to the left
▶ Turn to the right ▶ Maximize image/
▶ Display in initial size display image size.
Guidance for GPS coordinates.
The functional area is displayed if the image con-
tains information about GPS.

Settings
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
menu.
108 Infotainment Amundsen › Media Command

▶ Display image size.


▶ Display image duration during the slideshow.
▶ Slideshow repeat.

Supported sources and files

Source Interface Specifica- File system


tion
Standard Main menu for two tablets
size
SD card Choice of connected tablet
SD card SD
reader
SDHC FAT16 Settings
SDXC FAT32
USB 1.x; 2.x USB stick exFAT
3.x HDD NTFS Operating conditions
USB or higher (without
with USB special ✓ Data transfer of Infotainment is switched on.
2.x support software) Switching the transmission on/off takes place in
Supported sources the Data transmission mobile devices Enable data
transfer for ŠKODA apps menu item.
Codec type File extension Max. resolution
[Mpx] ✓ Infotainment operation via the application is ena-
bled.
BMP bmp 4
JPG; JPEG jpg; jpeg 4 (Progressive The adjustment of the operation takes place in
Mode) the Data transmission mobile devices Operation
64 through apps: menu item.
GIF gif 4 One of the following menu items can be selected.
PNG png 4
Deactivate - the operation is deactivated.

Supported files
Confirm - Operation requires confirmation at the

The maximum supported image size is 20 MB. start of the application.
▶ Allow - the operation requires no confirmation.

✓ In the tablet(s), the ŠKODA Media Command ap-


Media Command plication is installed.
Functionality ✓ The tablet(s) are connected to the Infotainment
hotspot.
The Media Commandfunction allows playback of au-
dio files or videos in up to two tablets that are con-
nected to Infotainment via Wi-Fi, to control Infotain- Operation
ment.
Start playback
› For selection of the playback source in the main
Overview menu, tap and select the source tablet.
› For playback select the category and then the title.
Display main menu
› Tap on .
If two tablets are connected, the title playback starts
in the two tablets at the same time.
Playback control
Tap: Start playback
Tap: Pause
Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap:
play the previous song
After 3 seconds, tap from the start of play-
back: to play the current title from the beginning
Tap: play the next song
Main menu for a tablet Increase the audio volume of the tablet
Infotainment Amundsen › Media Command 109

Decrease the audio volume of the tablet ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/service-app


View control options for two tablets
View control options for a tablet
Mute the tablet
Unmute the tablet
Movement within the title is also possible by drag-
ging a finger over the timeline. Connect tablet with Infotainment hotspot
› Turn on the ignition.
› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi hotspot in the
Function restriction menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Mobile Hotspot.

Some tablet types allow playback of audio files or


› Turn on Wi-Fi on the tablet.
videos by an inserted SD card in the tablet. Playback › In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
of these tracks may be limited. tainment Wi-Fi.

If several devices are connected to the Infotainment The name of the Infotainment hotspot refers to
system by means of Wi-Fi, there is the danger of Wi- the menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot
Fi overloading and thus also the inability of Media Settings (Wi-Fi) SSID:.
Command to function properly. › Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re-
quired password.
High-definition video playback may cause playback
problems or problems connecting the tablets to the The password for connecting to the Infotainment
Infotainment system. hotspot is taken from the menu item Wi-
Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi) Network key:.
› Confirm the connection.
Settings › In the tablet, start the application ŠKODA Media
Command.
ŠKODA Media Command application
The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-
vice after reading the following QR code or by refer-
ring to the ŠKODA mobile application website.

Supported files

Format Codec type Android operating system iOS operating system

MPEG-4 Part 2

Video MPEG-4 Part 10 (H264)

Xvid

MPEG-1; 2 and 2.5 Layer 3 (mp3)

aac (4,1+)

m4a (4,1+)
Audio
ogg

flac

wav (4,1+)
110 Infotainment Amundsen › Mobile device management

Mobile device management


Overview

Mobile device management


› In the Telephone main menu , tap on the functional surface Bluetooth paired devices.
In the list of paired mobile devices, the following symbols may appear for the individual devices.
Grey icon - the device can be connected as a telephone.
Green icon - the device is connected as a telephone.
Grey icon - the device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.
White icon - the device is connected as a Bluetooth® player.
Possible functions of the connected mobile device
The functions of a device connected via over the HFP Bluetooth profile depends on the following connection
types.

First device Second device


Main phone Additional phone
incoming / outgoing calls
SMS incoming calls
Telephone contacts Bluetooth® player
Bluetooth® player

With Infotainment only a mobile device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.

Limitations of mobile devices and applications


Availability of features
The availability of certain features depends on the
type of mobile device, as well as that of the applica-
tions installed. Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the large number of mobile devices, it is not
Connection restrictions possible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibility
▶ With Infotainment, a max. of 20 mobile devices are
with Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility depends
paired. on the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa-
▶ The range of the connection of the mobile device tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer of
to Infotainment is limited to the passenger com- the mobile device.
partment.
▶ After reaching the maximum number, the pairing
Applications in mobile devices
of the next mobile device will replace that of the Mobile devices can be used to install applications
device that has not been used for the longest peri- that allow you to view additional information on the
od of time. Infotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainment
system.
Compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on-
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see
going development, the available applications may
if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo-
not function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as-
bile device being tested. This check is carried out by
sumes no liability for their proper functioning.
using the following reference or by reading the QR
code. The scope of available applications and their func-
tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, as
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
well as the vehicle and country.
Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone 111

Connection set-up Delete a paired mobile device


› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
› To delete a mobile device, tap and confirm the
› Turn on the ignition. deletion.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device. › To delete all mobile devices, tap on Delete all and con-
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment firm the deletion.
Bluetooth Bluetooth.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® visibility of the Infotain-
ment Bluetooth Visibility: Visible. Telephone
› Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de- Telephone main menu
vice.
› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit. Display main menu
The name of the unit can be found by tapping › Tap on .
Bluetooth Name:. Or:
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
› Tap on .
confirm.
The mobile device is connected to the Infotainment
or just paired, depending on the number of devices
that are already connected.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-
vice
› Turn on the ignition.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment
Bluetooth Bluetooth.
A Name of the connected telephone
› Tap on Bluetooth Search for devices.
▶ Tap: Show list of previously connected phones
› Select the desired device from the list of Blue-
tooth® devices. B Preset buttons for preferred contacts

› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then C Choice of storage group for the preferred con-
confirm. tacts
› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment, D Name of telephone service providers
select the device to be replaced. ▶ If the symbol is displayed in front of the name,
Connect Infotainment to a mobile device that is roaming is active.
not already paired E Symbol for the connection type
The connection with an already coupled mobile de-
F Status symbol of the phone
vice is made automatically after switching on the ig-
nition; if necessary the device can be connected Change the main phone to the extension tele-
manually as follows. phone
› Turn on the ignition. Enter the telephone number
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device. Contact list
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment Text messages
Bluetooth Bluetooth.
Call lists
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
Settings
› In the device list, select the desired device and the
Bluetooth® profile.
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
Conditions for connecting a telephone with
confirm.
Infotainment
› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced. ✓ The ignition is switched on.
Disconnect from a mobile device ✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment and
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices. the telephone needs to be switched on.
› Tap on the Bluetooth® profile icon of the desired
mobile device.
112 Infotainment Amundsen › Telephone

The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment is › To switch the call tone from the telephone to the
switched on in the menu item Bluetooth speakers, tap .
Bluetooth.
Conference call
✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on. A conference call is a joint telephone conversation
The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on in with a minimum of three and a maximum of six par-
the menu item Bluetooth Visibility:. Visible. ticipants.
✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info- › Make the next call during an ongoing conversation/
tainment's Bluetooth® unit. conference.
✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment.
Or:
✓ Through Infotainment, no mobile device can be
connected using Apple CarPlay. › Accept a new incoming call by tapping the function
area .
› To start a conference call, tap on the functional
Telephone operation area .
Enter telephone number During an ongoing conference call, the following
› In the Telephone main menu, tap . functions can be selected depending on the context.
› Enter the telephone number using the numeric Hold the conference call and leave temporarily
keypad that is displayed. (the conference will continue in the background)
Return to the conference being held
The displayed numeric keypad can also be used
/ Switch the microphone off / on
for searching for contacts.
End the conference
If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contacts
Show details of the conference call
with the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-
played next to the numeric keypad. In the details of the conference call, depending on
the connected telephone, the following functions
List of telephone contacts can be selected.
The list of telephone contacts is imported from the
Show details of the conference call participants
connected main telephone.
End conversation with the conference call par-
› To display the contact list in the telephone main ticipant
menu, tap . Conversation with a participant outside of the
› To find details within the list, tap Find. conference call
› Enter the details you wish to find. Send a text message
› To establish a connection with a contact, tap the › In the Telephone main menu, tap New text mes-
functional area showing the desired contact. sage.
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, select › Write a text message and confirm; a view of the
the telephone number from the displayed list. message is displayed.
The message can be edited when the text area
› To display the details for a contact, tap .
within the view is tapped.
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox num- › Consult or select the recipient of the message, if
ber necessary tap to enter the phone number.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap .
› Add more recipients or confirm selected recipi-
Telephone conversation ents.
Depending on the context of the telephone conver- › Tap on .
sation, the following functions can be selected.
Display received text messages
End connection / reject incoming call / end call › In the Telephone main menu, tap E-mails .
Answer an incoming call / return to the held call
› To display the Message, select the desired mes-
/ Switch the ringer off / on sage.
Hold a call
/ Switch the microphone off / on The message content and the following menu with
Show details of the caller functions is displayed.
Set up a conference call Read the text message using the generated Info-
› To switch the call tone from the speakers to the tainment voice.
telephone, go to the telephone main menu and tap Display the menu with the following functions
on hands-free. of an accepted message.
Infotainment Amundsen › Wi-Fi 113

Option to answer the message by means of a Number for the voice mailbox
template. › To set the voice mailbox number in the Telephone
Delete message. main menu, tap on User profile Mailbox number:.
Recognise phone numbers in the message. › Enter the number of the voice mailbox.
Forward message, with the option to edit the
message before sending. Conference calls
Reply to the sender by sending a message. › To enable/disable the option for conference call
setup in the phone main menu, tap conference.

Settings for Infotainment telephone functions


Wi-Fi
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
› To save the desired preset button, press and hold. Functionality
› Select a contact from the displayed list. Wi-Fi can be used to connect to the Internet, to
› If the contact contains multiple telephone num- playback audio files in the menu media or for operat-
bers, choose the desired telephone number. ing the Infotainment system using an application in
› To delete tap on Telephone User profile Manage fa- the connected device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Com-
vourites in the main menu. mand).
› To delete one preset, tap on the list entry and con- The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 8 mo-
firm the deletion. bile devices. At the same time, the Infotainment can
be connected to another hotspot.
Or:
› To delete all presets, tap on Delete all and confirm the
deletion. Overview of available hotspots
Import telephone contacts Display available hotspots
After first connecting the main telephone with Info- › Tap Wi-Fi Wi-Fi:.
tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-
ted into the Infotainment memory.
Infotainment can import up to 2000 telephone con-
tacts together with contact pictures. Each contact
can include max. 5 telephone numbers.
Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-
mation may be required.
Update telephone contacts
When re-connecting the telephone with Infotain-
ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out. A Previously connected hotspots
› For a manual update of the list in the telephone B Available hotspots
main menu, tap on User profile Import contacts.
C The hotspot supports the WPS connection
Show pictures on phone contacts
D Updating the list of available hotspots
› In the Telephone main menu, tap User profile Show
pictures for contacts. Currently connected hotspot

Sort contacts in the phone book Delete information about the hotspot connection
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on User profile Wi-Fi signal strength of the hotspot
Sort by:. The Wi-Fi signal from the hotspot is not available
› Select the type by which to sort.
Ringer
Some phones do not allow the use of the telephone Function restriction
ringtone; instead, the Infotainment ringtone is used.
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a
› To set the Infotainment ringer in the Telephone hotspot with WPA2 access protection.
main menu, tap on User profile Select ringtone.
› Select the ringtone.
114 Infotainment Amundsen › Data connection

Settings › In the mobile device, switch on the option for con-


nection via WPS.
Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-
spot
› Wait for the connection to be established and, if
necessary, confirm the respective messages.
› Turn on the ignition.
› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi hotspot in the Quick connection of Infotainment to the mobile
menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Mobile Hotspot. device hotspot
› Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device. › Turn on the ignition.
› In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info- › On the mobile device, turn on the hotspot, its visi-
tainment Wi-Fi. bility, and the option for WPS connection.

The name of the Infotainment hotspot refers to


› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi unit in the menu
item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi.
the menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot
Settings (Wi-Fi) SSID:. › Tap WPS quick connection (WPS button).
› Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re- › Wait for the connection to be established and, if
necessary, confirm the respective messages.
quired password.
The password for connecting to the Infotainment Manual connection of Infotainment to the mobile
hotspot is taken from the menu item Wi- device hotspot
Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi) Network key: › Set the hotspot backup of the mobile device to
WPA2.
› Confirm the connection.
› Turn on the ignition.
Connect Infotainment to the mobile device hot- › Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi unit in the menu
spot item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi.
› Turn on the ignition. › Tap Manual settings.
› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi unit in the menu › Enter the name of the hotspot to connect to and
item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi. the access password.
› Select the desired hotspot in the list of available › Tap Connect.
hotspots.
› Wait for the connection to be established and, if
› Enter the password for connecting to mobile devi- necessary, confirm the respective messages.
ces.
Infotainment stores passwords for previously Tips for a perfect connection
▶ Keep only the hotspot to be connected switched
connected hotspots.
on and switch off the other hotspots.
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot ▶ Delete unused hotspots. This shortens the time re-
The security level is factory-set at WPA2 and cannot quired to establish a connection.
be changed. ▶ For some hotspots, the connection takes longer, so
Change the name of the Infotainment hotspot wait for the connection to finish.
› Tap Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi) ▶ If the connection is interrupted, recheck the availa-
SSID:. ble hotspots and repeat the connection.
› Enter the name and confirm.
› Tap Save. Data connection
Change password for connection to Infotainment
hotspot Settings
The password must be a minimum of 8 and a maxi-
Mobile data
mum of 63 characters.
Mobile data for the data connection may be sub-
› Tap Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi) ject to charges according to the mobile network
Network key:. operator's tariff conditions.
› Enter the password and confirm.
Types of data connection setup
› Tap Save. ▶ By connecting the Infotainment with the external
Quick connection of a mobile device to the Info- hotspot via Wi-Fi.
tainment hotspot ▶ Using the CarStick USB device.
› Turn on the ignition. Connecting using the CarStick USB device
› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi hotspot in the The CarStick USB device can be purchased from
menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Mobile Hotspot. Škoda original accessories.
› Tap WPS quick connection (WPS button).
Infotainment Amundsen › SmartLink 115

› Insert a SIM card with activated data services into Overview of the SmartLink connection
the CarStick device.
Main menu SmartLink
The required dimensions of the SIM card, as well as
the correct procedure during insertion can be
› Tap on .
found in the instructions enclosed with the Car- Or:
Stick device. › Tap on .
› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
› Insert the CarStick into the USB input at the front.
› Wait approximately one minute until a light other
than the red indicator light on CarStick is perma-
nently lit.
When the red indicator light comes on, the Car-
Stick can be removed and inserted again.
› If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the
PIN code of the SIM card must be entered.
› Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping . A Previously connected device
Or:
B Currently connected device
› Tap to save and confirm the PIN code. Display information about SmartLink
› If necessary, set the required network of the data Separation of the active connection
service provider.
Settings for the SmartLink menu
NOTICE
If a SIM card is incorrectly sized or if a SIM card is in- Android Auto
serted in the wrong direction, there is a risk of dam-
age to the CarStick USB device.
Set network parameters
› Tap Network.
› Set the desired parameters.
For accurate parameters for setting the network,
contact the data service provider.

SmartLink Navigation applications


Functionality Telephone applications

SmartLink offers the ability to display and operate Overview of running applications, phone calls, in-
certified applications from a connected mobile de- coming text messages, and more.
vice in the Infotainment screen. Music applications
Certification may be conditional upon the use of the Display of other available applications as well as
latest update to the particular SmartLink application. the option to return to the SmartLink main menu
Applications include, for example, apps for route Turn on voice control (Google Voice)
guidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.
Apple CarPlay
Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable.
Supported connection types
SmartLink supports the following connection types.
▶ Android Auto.
▶ Apple CarPlay.
▶ MirrorLink.

A List of available applications


116 Infotainment Amundsen › SmartLink

Depending on the duration of operation: Conditions for MirrorLink


▶ Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu ✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror-
LinkSupport.
▶ Hold: Switch on voice control (Siri)
A list of devices and applications that the Mirror-
MirrorLink Link connection supports can be found on the
websites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®.
✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installed
on the mobile device.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the connected mobile device to be turned on.

Restriction
Restriction of SmartLink applications while driving
It is not possible to operate the application while For safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap-
driving plications while driving is not possible or is restric-
ted.
Return to the SmartLink main menu
Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an
List of running applications
Android Auto connection
Display of the last running application in connec- ▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de-
ted mobile devices vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
Settings dia menu.
▶ By connecting the device, all currently connected
Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected and the
Connection conditions device will automatically be connected as the main
telephone.
General connection conditions ▶ For the duration of the connection, no other Blue-
✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar- tooth® devices can be connected to the Infotain-
tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car- ment system.
Play and MirrorLink.
▶ If route guidance is taking place at this moment in
✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar- Infotainment, then there is the option to start the
tLinkconnection, are supported in the respective route guidance in the Android Auto application.
market. And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking
✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo- place in the Android Auto application, then there is
bile device to be “unlocked”. the possibility that this will be terminated by the
Conditions for Android Auto start of route guidance by the Infotainment sys-
✓ The device to be connected must have Android tem.
AutoSupport. Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an
A list of devices, supported regions and applica- Apple CarPlay connection
tions that the Android Auto connection supports ▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de-
can be found on the websites of Google Inc.. vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal- dia menu.
led on the mobile device. ▶ Connecting the device disconnects all currently

✓ Some applications require the data connection in connected Bluetooth® devices.


the mobile device to be turned on. ▶ For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth®
devices can be connected to the Infotainment sys-
Conditions for Apple CarPlay tem.
✓ The device to be connected must have Apple
▶ If route guidance is taking place at this moment in
CarPlaySupport. Infotainment, then there is the option to start the
A list of devices, supported regions and applica- route guidance in the Apple CarPlay application.
tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supports And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking
can be found on the websites of Apple Inc.. place in the Apple CarPlay application, then there is
✓ Siri voice control is on. the possibility that this will be terminated by the
✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile start of route guidance by the Infotainment sys-
device. tem.
Infotainment Amundsen › ŠKODA Connect online services 117

Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an Change to another device / connection type


MirrorLink connection Infotainment allows you to switch between currently
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de- connected devices and the connection type.
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
dia menu.
› Tap on .
› Select the desired device or connection type.
▶ If you wish to use the device to be connected in
the Telephone menu, the device must be paired
with and connected to the Infotainment system by ŠKODA Connect online services
Bluetooth® before establishing the MirrorLink con-
nection. Functionality
ŠKODA Connect online service offer the option of
Operation connecting the vehicle to the online world. They thus
represent an extension of the vehicle and Infotain-
Operation of the running MirrorLink application ment functions.
› To display the following operation surfaces, press For the functionality of the ŠKODA Connect Online
the right rotary control .
Services, the vehicle must be within range of a mo-
Display of control surfaces at the bottom bile network through which the services are provi-
Display of control surfaces at the top ded. The availability, the connection speed and the
Return to the MirrorLink main menu technology used in the mobile network can be differ-
ent in the respective countries and are dependent on
the mobile network operator.
Settings
The ŠKODA Connect online services are not included
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB in the equipment of the vehicle. They can be ordered
› Turn on the Infotainment. separately on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
› Turn on the mobile device. in the ŠKODA Connect application.
› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input The offer of ŠKODA Connect online services de-
using a cable. pends on the type of vehicle and its trim level, Info-
› Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay. tainment and country. Availability in each country
can be checked on the ŠKODA Connect website.
Apple CarPlay – Disconnection
› In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO- The rights and obligations of the Parties with respect
DA” functional area. to the provision of these services are governed by a
› Tap on . separate agreement. Current legal documents re-
garding the online services can be found on the
Android Auto - Connection via USB ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the ŠKODA Con-
› Turn on the Infotainment. nect application.
› Turn on the mobile device. ŠKODA Connect website
› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input ▶http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect
using a cable.
For example, the ŠKODA Connect web-
› Choose to connect via Android Auto. site contains the latest information
Android Auto - Disconnection about the online services, a link to the
› In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re- ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the
turn to ŠKODA”. option of downloading the ŠKODA Con-
› Tap on . nect application.

MirrorLink - Connection via USB ŠKODA Connect Portal website


› Turn on the Infotainment. ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal

› Turn on the mobile device. The ŠKODA Connect Portal website is


› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input used, for example, for registration, acti-
using a cable. vation and ordering of online services. It
› Choose to connect through MirrorLink. also provides the option of remote ac-
cess to the vehicle.
MirrorLink - Disconnection
› In the MirrorLink main menu, tap . Information call
The information call may be used in the case of prob-
› Tap on . lems with the online services or for information re-
118 Infotainment Amundsen › ŠKODA Connect online services

garding the products and services of the ŠKODA › Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
brand. › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration.
✓ The functional condition represents the active › Enter and confirm the registration PIN you have re-
online ŠKODA Connect services. ceived during user and vehicle registration on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
› Press the button.
Connect application.
› Wait for the registration completion message to
appear.
› Confirm any messages on the screen.
Delete user
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration.
› Tap Delete user Delete.
Breakdown call
› Confirm the deletion.
The breakdown call can be used in the event of a By deleting the registered vehicle in the user ac-
breakdown. count on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal the
user is also deleted in Infotainment.
✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services. Changing the user
› Press the button. › Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration.
› Tap New owner Change ownership.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN code re-
ceived during registration of the new user and dur-
ing vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website.
› If necessary, confirm the change by tapping the
function surface Change main users.
Management of online services
ŠKODA Connect Application In the service management, it is possible to display
The ŠKODA Connect application enables remote ac- information about the online services, the validity of
cess to the vehicle using a mobile device. It can also their licence, or to switch the services on/off.
be used for user registration and to activate and
configure the online services. › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Privacy settings
and manage services.
The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-
vice after scanning the following QR code or link. › To display the designations and the status of the
services, select the desired service.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp › For detailed information about the service tap .
› To switch the services on/off, tap the Checkbox.
Connection status of the online services
The connection status of the online services of ŠKO-
DA Connect online services is indicated by an icon in
the status bar on the Infotainment screen.
Settings
Registration and activation of online services
User registration, as well as the activation of the
ŠKODA Connect online services, is completed on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
Connect application.
In order to complete user registration, you will need
to access your e-mails.
In order to activate ŠKODA Connect, proceed as fol-
A The ŠKODA Connect online services are availa-
lows.
ble.
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation 119

At the same time the symbol of the data con- Switch online services on/off
nection type can be displayed. It is possible to have the online services switched
B The ŠKODA Connect online services are not off/on exclusively by a ŠKODA service partner.
available. After turning off the online services, none of the
C Localisation services are restricted or disabled. ŠKODA Connect online services, including the
emergency calls are functioning.
Detailed information about the online services
can be viewed in the Online Services Administra- To inform the vehicle
tion. user that the ŠKODA
D Localisation services are enabled.
Connect online services
are out of order, the
Detailed information about the online services
service partner applies
can be viewed in the Online Services Administra-
the sticker at a visible
tion.
point in the vehicle (e.g. on the roof cladding).
Localisation services This sticker must not be removedas long as the on-
For the complete functionality of some online serv- line services are off.
ices, activated localisation services are required.
NOTICE
Localisation services include, for example, informa- It should be noted that the emergency, information
tion on the last parking position, area notification or and breakdown calls are not available after switching
speed notification. off the online services.
When localisation services are active, the symbol For this reason, no automatic emergency call is made
will be displayed in the status line in the Infotainment in the event of a serious car accident.
screen.
Switching Private mode function on/off Navigation
By switching the Private mode function on, the serv-
ices relating to sending vehicle information and per- Navigation announcements
sonal data, which are essential for the provision of
online services, are deactivated. Infotainment route guidance takes place using
graphic driving recommendations and navigation an-
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Manage- nouncements.
ment Private mode.
The navigation announcements are generated by the
The emergency call remains fully functional after Infotainment system. Navigation announcement
turning on the private mode feature. clarity (e.g. road or city name) cannot always be
The functions of the information and breakdown call guaranteed.
are limited.
Repeat the last navigation announcement
Switch Care Connect function on/off › Tap on .
By switching the Care Connect services off, the serv-
ices relating to sending vehicle information and per- Turn off navigation announcements
sonal data, which are essential for the provision of › Tap on .
Care Connect online services, are deactivated. Setting navigation announcements
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Manage- › In the navigation main menu, tap Navigation an-
ment Care Connect. nouncements.
NOTICE
The emergency call remains fully functional after
Navigation overviews
turning off the Care Connect feature.
The functions of the information and breakdown call Display main menu
are limited. › Tap on .
Switch on/off Infotainment Online function Or:
By switching off the Infotainment OnlineServices, › Tap on .
the services in relation to the provision of online
services Infotainment Online are switched off.
› ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Management
Infotainment Online.
120 Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation

Map overview Map options

A Vehicle position A Automatic map display in day or night mode (de-


B Route
pending on the currently active vehicle lighting)
B Daytime map display
C Functional surface for the operation of the map
display C Night-time map display
D Function surface of the POI D Switch the split screen display on/off
E Function surface for the POI list If the map display is in the digital instrument
cluster, no additional window display is possible.
F Road sign for the affected route section
E Switching on/ off of the selected POI categories
G Information on the maximum permitted speed display
Show the following menu depending on con-
text Map display in the digital instrument cluster
There is no route guidance - search/enter a new The map can be displayed in the digital instrument
destination cluster or on the Infotainment display.
Route guidance is not taking place › To change the display tap Navigation in the
▶ Show route plan.
main menu.
▶ Set traffic obstruction manually. Map scale
▶ Search for destination/enter.
▶ End route guidance.
Show the following menu
▶ Save current vehicle position as a flag target.
▶ Show list of saved routes.
▶ Display list of stored destinations.
▶ Display list of last destinations.
▶ Route guidance to home address.
POI Search
It is possible to change the map scale manually or to
Map display options turn on the automatic change of scale.
Change the map display between the digital in- › To display the operating surfaces for changing
strument cluster and the Infotainment screen the map scale, tap A .
Display for navigation announcement
Types of manual scale change
Settings › Touch the screen with two fingers and pull them
apart or close them together.
Symbols displayed in the map
Destination position Or:
Intermediate destination position › Rotate the regulator .
Location of home address
Switch on/off the automatic change of scale
Favourite position
When the automatic scale is active, the map scale
changes automatically, depending on the type of
road used and the manoeuvre you are about to un-
dertake.
The automatic scale is only active as long as the map
is centred on the vehicle position.
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation 121

› To turn on navigation in the main menu, tap . B Depending on the search mode, the following
The functional surface is highlighted in green. symbols are displayed
▶ - Display the map as well as the list of the
› To turn off navigation in the main menu, tap
. destinations listed in the navigation database
The functional surface is highlighted in white.
▶ - Display the map as well as the list of online
destinations
The turning off occurs likewise when the map is
C - Select the destination search/destination en-
moved or the map scale is changed manually.
try
Map view in reduced scale
D Context-dependent display of the destination
The map scale is reduced for a few seconds and then
list
restored.
▶ List of last destinations.
› To display, tap . ▶ List of visited destinations.
Map orientation
Select the destination you are looking for
› Enter the details for the destination search.
› Select the desired destination.
Destination details are displayed with the option of
starting route guidance.
Enter a new destination via the address
› Tap on .
A menu will appear with the destination input op-
tions.
› To change the map orientation, tap A. › Select the destination via the address.
The map can be aligned as follows. › Enter the required information.
Destination details are displayed with the option of
The map is oriented to the north
starting route guidance.
The symbol rotates the vehicle position, the map
and the Polarstern Symbol do not rotate. Enter a new destination via the map point
› Tap on .
Map oriented to the direction of travel
A menu will appear with the destination input op-
The map as well as the Polarstern symbol rotate, tions.
the symbol showing the vehicle position does not
rotate.
› Select the destination via the map point.
› Touch the screen to move the desired destination
With a map scale greater than 10 km, the map is into the cross-hair.
automatically oriented towards north.
Or:
Map centring
The moved map can be centred/aligned to the vehi-
› Set the GPS coordinates.
cle, destination or route position. › Confirm the destination input.
Destination details are displayed with the option of
› Tap map centring .
starting route guidance.
Search for a new destination
List of stored destinations
› Tap on .
› Tap Destinations.

A Input line
A Select category of stored destinations
122 Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation

▶ - stored destinations The navigation announcements provided may vary


▶ from the actual situations, e.g. due to out-of-date
- Flag destination
navigation data.
Vehicle position at the time of storing flag
destination. Route overview

During route guidance the display of a route over-
- saved destinations view is possible.
▶ - Favourite
› Route details.
▶ - Favourites
Change route destinations to each other
▶ - Telephone contact destinations
If intermediate routes are included in the route, it is
▶ online destinations in the ŠKODA Connect possible to change them in the route overview and
Portal website or in the ŠKODA Connect appli- thus change their order, add further destinations or
cation delete destinations.
Selecting the stored destination › In order to change the order of the destination,
› Select the category of stored destinations. hold the functional area until the destination be-
› Select the desired destination. comes free.
Destination details are displayed with the option of › Move the destination to the desired position and
release the functional surface.
starting route guidance.
The route is re-calculated.
Selecting destination by tapping the map point
› Tap the desired item or the POI icon in the map. List of traffic reports
› Tap to start the route guidance. The Infotainment enables the reception of traffic re-
ports, which include information regarding traffic
Route calculation congestion, using TMC (Traffic Message Channel) or
A route is created by starting route guidance to a online services Infotainment Online.
destination.
The list of traffic reports will be updated by Infotain-
Additional intermediate destinations can be added to ment on a continuous basis.
the route.
› To display traffic reports, tap .
Route calculation is done on the basis of the set
route options.
› Route options.
› Select the desired list entries.
With selection of alternative routes turned on, the
following menu is displayed after the calculation of a
new route .
› To switch on / off the alternative routes in the
main menu, tap Navigation Route options Suggest 3
alternative routes. A List of traffic reports
Calculate the most economical route with short- B Filtering of traffic reports
est travelling time and distance travelled – the
route is highlighted green. C Symbol for the source of the traffic message
Calculate the fastest route to the destination,
If no route guidance takes place, the traffic ob-
even if a detour is necessary - the route is high-
struction in the map is represented by a red line.
lighted in red.
Calculate the shortest route to the destination, If route guidance takes place, the traffic obstruction
even if a longer travelling time is required - the is shown as follows.
route is highlighted in orange. ▶ Grey line - The traffic obstruction is not on the
Infotainment tries to allow for continued guidance route
even if the navigation data is incomplete or there is ▶ Red line - The traffic obstruction is on the route,
no data at all for the given area. the route will not be recalculated and the route
The route is recalculated if you ignore driving recom- passes through the traffic obstruction
mendations or change the route. ▶ Orange line - The traffic obstruction is on the
route, the route is recalculated and an alternative
route is available
Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation 123

› For switching the traffic flow display off / on in Zoom out of the map
the main menu, tap Navigation Map Settings traffic
flow.
NOTICE
ŠKODA AUTO does not accept responsibility for the
availability, content, up-to-dateness or evaluation of
TMC traffic reports or other data provided by third
parties. ŠKODA AUTO is not entitled to examine or
adapt this data in any way. The data can only be edi-
ted by Infotainment in areas where it is available.

Touch operation
Restriction
Move map
Infotainment may give incorrect driving recommen-
dations if the road conditions or the traffic do not
match the navigation data.
This can lead to the route guidance being carried out
using a different route or proposing a change of di-
rection in a one-way street.

Settings
Avoiding traffic obstructions
Enter destination by tapping the map item If the function is switched on and the Infotainment
receives information about a traffic obstruction on
the route from online traffic information or the TP
traffic announcements, the route is recalculated.
› For switching on/off the function in the main
menu, tap Nvigation Route options Dynamic route.
Showing arrival time information in the destina-
tion / driving time
The status line displays information on the time de-
pending on the following setting.

Zoom into the map


› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Time display:.
Showing information on the destination / waypoint
The status line displays information on the distance
and travel time to the destination, depending on the
following time setting.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
status display:.
Switching display of country-specific speed limits
on / off
When the function is switched on, the country-spe-
cific speed limits are displayed when crossing nation-
al borders.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Note: Country border crossed.
Or:
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Note: Country border crossed.
124 Infotainment Amundsen › Navigation

› For display of speed limits in the main menu, tap Or:


Navigation Top speed.
› Hold down the desired point in the map and
Switching the display of road signs on motorways choose menu item Start point Define demo mode.
and expressways on / off
When the function is switched on, Infotainment dis-
plays traffic and information signs on motorways and Updating the navigation database
expressways. Information on updating the navigation database
› In the navigation main menu, tap Map Show traffic must be requested from a ŠKODA partner, or refer
sign. to the following ŠKODA websites.
Switching the fuel warning on / off ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
When the function is switched on and the fuel sup- Navigation data source Amundsen
ply reaches the reserve area, a warning message ap- The navigation data is stored on an Original SD Card.
pears with the option of going to the nearest petrol
station. In order to ensure the function of the navigation, the
Original SD card, with the navigation data, must be
› In the navigation main menu, tap Tank options Tank inserted in the respective slot in the external mod-
warning. ule.
Towing a trailer If the original SD card is damaged or lost, a new orig-
To calculate the correct route for trailer operation, inal SD card can be purchased from the ŠKODA
switch on trailer inclusion. Original Accessories.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Route options With a non-original SD Card, navigation does not
Consider trailer. work.
Setting navigation announcements Determining the navigation database version
› In the navigation main menu, tap Navigation an- › Tap System information.
nouncements.
› Select and set the desired menu item.
Favourite POI categories
Favourite POI categories are displayed on the map
and provided in the destination search.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Map Show special
destinations Select categories for points of interest.
› Set favourite categories.
Setting home address
The defined destination of the home address is dis-
played in the overview of recommended destina-
tions.
› Home address.
› Define the home address using the current vehicle
position or enter the address.
Switching demo mode on / off
In demo mode, the route guidance from the starting
point of the demo mode to the selected destination
is simulated.
When the function is switched on, Infotainment is-
sues a query before the start of route guidance as to
where whether the route guidance should be carried
out in the normal way or in demo mode.
› For switching on/off in the navigation main menu,
tap Advanced settings Demo mode.
Defining the starting point of the demo mode
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Demo mode Start point Define demo mode.
Infotainment Columbus › Infotainment overview 125

Infotainment Columbus › To display the menu tap .


The graphic display type for the MENU menu can be
Infotainment overview set.

Grid display

A Touchscreen
All menus
Favourite menus
Increase the volume
Decrease the volume
Condition-based:
▶Infotainment switched off
List
▶ Tap: Turn on Infotainment
▶ Infotainment switched on HOME menu
The HOME menu includes three windows for quick
▶ Tap: Switch sound off/on access to selected Infotainment menus.
▶ Hold: Switch off Infotainment
› To display the menu tap .
External module In the left window, the navigation menu is always
displayed.
The menus in the right-hand windows can be individ-
ually adjusted.

Restriction
For safety reasons, operation of some Infotainment
functions while driving is not possible or is restricted.
The Infotainment system indicates this by means of
a message in the screen.
A CD / DVD eject button
B CD / DVD slot
C SD1 card slot
Basic settings
D SIM card slot Setting basic functions
The following Infotainment functions are set in the
E SD2 card slot
menu.
▶ Time and date.
System ▶ Language.
▶ Units.
Infotainment Menus Restore factory settings.

MENU menu Sound settings
The MENU menu contains all available Infotainment The Infotainment sound is set in the menu .
menus.
126 Infotainment Columbus › System

The following menu items can be set. › Disconnect/remove the device.


▶ Setting the equalizer. Electronic voice amplification for driver and pas-
▶ Adjusting the volume ratio. senger
▶ Volume adjustment of individual Infotainment The voice enhancer allows transmission of the driv-
functions. er's and passenger's voice on the speakers in the
rear.
Some are adjustable, for example the following
menu items. The volume setting for voice enhancement is carried
out in the Volume Electronic voice enhancement
▶ Volume adjustment of voice commands.
menu.
▶ Setting the maximum volume when Infotainment
is turned on.
▶ Speed-dependent volume setting. Troubleshooting
▶ Setting the Infotainment to mute with the park-
ing aid switched on. Infotainment not responding
The Infotainment system must be restarted.
Depending on the equipment, the following ad-
vanced sound settings can be set. › Press for more than 10 s.
▶ Setting space optimisation.
› Wait for the restart to complete.
▶ Setting the audio profiles according to genre.
▶ Adjusting the subwoofer volume. System update
Configuration wizard We recommend having the system update carried
The configuration wizard helps to set certain Info- out by a specialist company.
tainment functions.
The system update ensures optimal function of the
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed Infotainment system, e.g. compatibility with new
if, after switching on the Infotainment system, there phones.
are at least two menu items that have not been set
or if a new user account has been selected. Determine system version
› Tap System information.
› To switch off the automatic display, tap on Don't
show again when the configuration wizard is displayed. Manual update
› For manual display, tap on Configuration wiz- For information on available updates, please refer to
ard. the ŠKODA internet pages.

Setting the HOME menu


The menus in the right-hand windows of the menu
HOME can be changed.
› Hold down the symbol of the desired menu in the
right window. ▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
A list of available menus is displayed. › Visit available updates.
› Select the desired menu. › Save the update to a USB source.
Setting the MENU › Insert the USB source into the front USB input.
The graphic display type for the MENU menu can be › Tap System information Update software.
set as follows. › Select the connected USB device as the update
source.
› Screen Menu:.
› Select one of the following menu items. › Go to the update file and confirm the update.
› Confirm any messages and wait for the update
▶ Grid display - Grid display. process to be completed.
▶ Horizontal Display - horizontal display.
Safely disconnect the connected USB device
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the data on the connected device!
To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
follows.
› Tap Remove safely:.
› Select the desired device.
Infotainment Columbus › Screen 127

Screen Pulling together with two fingers

Overview ▶ Minimize image.


▶ Zoom out of the map.

Turn two fingers

▶ Rotate image.
A Status bar
B Bar with the functional surfaces of the displayed
menu
C Other pages of the menu

Operation
NOTICE
Danger of screen damage! Finger movement
▶ The Infotainment screen is operated by touching it
lightly with your finger. ▶ Move the map.

In principle, operation by touch is identical to the op-


eration of a mobile phone.
The following operating modes are specific to the In-
fotainment system.
Dragging up or down with two fingers

▶ Quickly review the list


of phone contacts.
Contactless gesture control
The Infotainment menus marked with the symbol
can be controlled by hand gestures.
› Gesture control is ach-
ieved by slowly moving
the hand back and
forth approximately 8
cm above the lower
Pulling apart with two fingers edge of the screen.
Depending on the set-
▶ Enlarge image.
ting, a recognized ges-
▶ Zoom in to the map. ture can be confirmed
acoustically and anima-
ted.

Settings
The following basic screen functions are set in the
Screen menu.
▶ Brightness level of the screen.
▶ Switch off the screen.
128 Infotainment Columbus › Keypad

▶ Display the time. Numeric keypad


▶ Confirmation sounds and animations.

Keypad
Keypad overview
The arrangement of the keypad characters depends
on the Infotainment language that has been set.
In Infotainment, the following types are used, de-
pending on the context.
Keypad example
▶ Alphanumeric.
▶ Numeric. A Input line
▶ Keypad for input. ▶ Delete characters before the cursor
▶ Keypad for search. ▶ Tap: delete the last character
▶ Hold: delete all characters
B Keypad functional surfaces

▶ Confirm the characters that have been entered


If context-sensitive, alphanumeric characters can
be entered by holding a functional surface with a
digit.

Operation
Keypad example
The Infotainment keypad is used to enter characters,
A Input line letters and numbers.
▶ Delete characters before the cursor The keypad will be automatically displayed when In-
▶ Tap: delete the last character fotainment prompts for characters.
▶ Hold: delete all characters in sequence Find
▶ Show list of searched entries During the character input, a search for correspond-
B Keypad functional surfaces ing entries takes place.
▶ Change to lowercase The entry to be searched can be entered, including
diacritics.
▶ Switch to the first capital letter, followed by
lowercase letters The keypad will only provide characters that match
▶ / Switch to the language keypad the stored entries.
▶ Switch to the numeric and character key- › To display the searched entries, tap .
pad Show additional keypad languages
▶ Show additional keypad languages To use the additional keypad languages, the desired
▶ Insert a space languages must be set first.
▶ Hold: Show additional character variants › Tap or repeatedly tap the flag symbol until the
▶ Move cursor to the left desired language keypad is displayed.
▶ Move cursor to the right Further character variants
▶ Confirm the characters that have been en- › Press and hold the sign with the symbol .
tered › Select the desired symbol.

Setting additional keypad languages


› Tap Additional keypad languages.
Infotainment Columbus › Voice control 129

Voice control Stopping the played back message


› Press the button on the multifunction steering
Functionality wheel.
Voice control principle Ending voice control
Voice control works according to the principle of › Press and hold the button on the multifunction
dialogue between the user and the Infotainment sys- steering wheel.
tem. Or:
The user says a voice command. The Infotainment
› Say the voice command “cancel” during voice com-
system responds or executes the voice command. mand input.

Operating conditions Restriction


✓ Ignition is switched on. For some Infotainment languages, no voice control is
✓ Infotainment is switched on. available. The Infotainment system will indicate this.
✓ No telephone conversation can be held via Info-
The messages are generated by the Infotainment
tainment.
system. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or city name) can-
not always be guaranteed.
Operation You cannot use voice control while a phone call is in
progress.
Voice control process
› To turn on voice control, press the button on
the multifunction steering wheel. Settings
Or: The following voice control functions are set in the
› Tap on . menu Voice control.
After switching on, the icon is displayed. ▶ Confirmation tones.
› Say a voice command. ▶ Display of sample commands.
During recognition of the voice command, the icon
is displayed. Self-help
The Infotainment system then executes the voice
command or plays the message. During the message, Starting acoustic help
the icon is displayed. › If the Infotainment system is expecting a voice
command, say “Help”.
After the execution of the voice command, voice
control is switched off. The “Help” voice command can be issued repeatedly
for further tips on voice control.
Correcting a voice command
Activate/deactivate the display of example voice
› During voice command input, press the button commands in the Infotainment screen.
on the multifunction steering wheel and say a new
voice command. The system offers the option of displaying example
voice commands after switching on the voice con-
Stopping voice control trol in the Infotainment screen.
Stopping leaves more time for voice command input,
e.g. for searching for a phone contact.
› To turn on/off voice control tap on Example
commands (Infotainment system).
› Move your finger up or down over the Infotain- Activate/deactivate display of example voice com-
ment screen.
mands in the instrument cluster display
Or: The system offers the option of displaying example
› Say the “pause” voice command. voice commands after switching on the voice con-
trol in the Instrument cluster screen.
Resuming stopped voice control
› Press the button on the multifunction steering › To turn on/off voice control tap on Example
wheel. commands (Instrument cluster).

Or:
› Tap on in the Infotainment screen.
130 Infotainment Columbus › Radio

Radio Operation

Overview Select station

Display main menu


› Tap on .
Analogue and digital radio reception

› Tap or at the top of the screen.


SCAN function
The function plays receivable stations of the selec-
ted frequency range in succession for a few seconds
A Select frequency range each.
B Depending on the frequency range › To start automatic play , tap Scan.
FM: Radio text › To stop automatic play, tap .
DAB: Name of the station group Find stations manually
C Preset buttons for preferred stations › In the Radio main menu, tap .
List of available stations › To search in sequence, tap or next to the dis-
played frequency range scale.
Manual station search
Or:
Display information about the station (applies to
DAB) › Hold down the scroll mark on the frequency range
scale and move it to the desired value.
Settings

Infotainment supports digital radio reception in


DAB and DAB+ formats. Restriction

List of available stations ▶ Parking garages, tunnels, tall buildings or moun-


› To display, tap . tains can restrict radio reception.
▶ In the rear side windows, there are antennas for re-
Played station
ceiving the radio signal.
Station stored on the presets
A traffic radio station is set Covering the panes with foils or metal-coated la-
DAB signal is not available bels may affect the reception of the radio signal.
Filter the FM stations into alphabetical order, ac-
cording to group or genre
The prerequisite for the filtering option is ensur- Settings
ing RDS and AF functions are activated.
Save the station currently being listened to as a fa-
Manual update of the station list
vourite from the Radio main menu
In the FM station list, information about the pro- › Hold the desired station key for preferred stations
gramme type and the type of the regional station until the station is stored.
can be displayed.
Save station to favourites from the list of available
stations
› Hold the line with the name of the desired station.
› Tap the desired preset button.
Delete favourites
› In the Radio main menu , tap Delete presets.
› To delete one preset button for preferred stations,
tap the desired station button and confirm the de-
letion.
Infotainment Columbus › Radio 131

› To delete all preset buttons for preferred stations, › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
tap All and confirm the deletion. Autostore station logos.
Buttons Regional FM station logo
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges. Applies to the FM frequency range.
The variant for changing stations using buttons Infotainment provides the option of using country-
in the Radio main menu is set as follows. specific FM station logos.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Arrow buttons:. › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
› Choose the change variant. Region for station logo:.

Traffic reception (TP) for FM stations on/off


› Choose the country.
Applies to the FM frequency range. Turn on/off radio text reception
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Traffic program (TP).
When the function is switched on and station pre-
Switch traffic reception for DAB stations on/off sets are displayed, detailed information about the
Applies to the DAB frequency range. broadcast content of the FM station being listened
› In the Radio main menu, turn on menu item Traf- to, or the name of the station group for the DAB sta-
fic Radio (TP). tion, is displayed.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings DAB › In the Radio main menu, tap Radio text.
traffic programme announcements (TP) on/off.
Switch automatic frequency control (AF) on/off
Assign station logo from an external source Applies to the FM frequency range.
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges.
When the function is switched on and the signal of
Infotainment offers the option to assign logos from the FM station currently being listened to is weak,
the pictures on an external source to the station but- Infotainment automatically sets the same station to
tons. a different frequency with a better signal.
For station logos, images in jpg, gif, png, bmp format › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
with a maximum resolution of 500x500 pixels can be Automatic frequency control (AF).
used.
Automatic change of frequency to a regionally
› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos. linked FM station
› Tap the desired preset button. Applies to the FM frequency range.
› Select the external source with the logo. Infotainment provides the option of automatically
› Find the desired logo and confirm. switching to a regionally linked FM station in case of
The information for updating station logos is taken signal loss of the FM station being listened to.
from the ŠKODA web pages. › In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings
RDS Regional:.
› Select one of the following menu items.
▶ Fixed - If there is a loss of signal, another station
must be set manually.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal ▶ Automatic - automatic selection of the station with
the best signal reception.
Delete station logos
Applies to AM, FM and DAB frequency ranges. If reception is lost in the given region, Infotainment
will automatically set another available region.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Station logos:.
› To delete a logo, tap the desired preset button and Switch RDS on/off
confirm the deletion. Applies to the FM frequency range.
› To delete all logos, tap on All and confirm the dele- The menu item is only available for some countries.
tion.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings Radio
Activating / deactivating automatic station logo Data System (RDS).
assignment If the RDS function is disabled, the following menu
Applies to the FM and DAB frequency ranges. items in FM station settings are not available.
When the function is switched on, a station logo ▶ Traffic programme (TP).
from the Infotainment memory is assigned when the ▶ Radio text.
station is stored on a preset.
▶ RDS Regional.
132 Infotainment Columbus › Media

▶ Automatic frequency change (AF). Media


▶ Regional station logo.
What you should be mindful of
Switch additional DAB announcements on/off
Applies to the DAB frequency range. ▶ Do not save any important data or that which has
not been backed up on the connected audio sour-
When the function is switched on, other announce-
ces. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or
ments are received as traffic announcements. For ex-
damaged files or connected audio sources.
ample, weather news, sports reports, financial news,
etc. ▶ When changing or connecting an audio source, this
may cause sudden changes in volume. Reduce the
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings volume before changing or connecting an audio
Other DAB announcements. source.
Enable/disable automatic programme tracking of a ▶ When connecting an audio source, the source in-
DAB station formation messages can be displayed. These mes-
Applies to the DAB frequency range. sages must be observed and, if necessary, con-
firmed.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
tion is lost, Infotainment automatically changes to ▶ The national copyright laws that apply in your
the same station with a better signal in a different country must be observed.
DAB station group. CD/DVD laser product
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings CAUTION
DAB - DAB station tracking. ▶ The CD/DVD-player is a laser product.
Turn on/off automatic switching from a DAB sta- ▶ On the manufacturing date, this unit was classified
tion to the same FM station as a Class 1 laser product in accordance with the
Applies to the DAB frequency range. national/international standards DIN EN 60825-1:
2008-05 and DHHS Rules 21 CFR, Subchapter J.
When the function is switched on and the DAB sta-
The laser used in this Class 1 laser product is so
tion being listened to is lost, Infotainment automati-
weak that there is no risk of danger when operated
cally changes to the same FM station. The symbol
correctly.
(FM) is displayed after the station name.
▶ This product is designed such that the laser is re-
When the corresponding DAB station can be re- stricted to the inside of Infotainment. However,
ceived again, the station automatically changes from the installed laser could be classified in a higher
FM to DAB. class were the housing to be removed. For this rea-
› In the Radio main menu, tap on Advanced settings son, never remove the Infotainment housing.
Automatic DAB - FM switching.
Turn on/off automatic switching to a similar DAB Overview
station
Applies to the DAB frequency range. Display main menu
When the function is switched on and DAB station › Tap on .
being listened to is lost, Infotainment automatically
changes to another DAB station with similar content.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings
Switch to a similar station.
Activating/deactivating reception of DAB trans-
mitter in the L band
In some countries, the DAB radio reception is only
available as a so-called LBand.
› In the Radio main menu, tap Advanced settings L-
Band:. A Select source
If there is no DAB radio reception available in the Manage files / multimedia database
L-band in your country, we recommend turning the
L-band off. Settings
The DAB channel scan is therefore faster.
Infotainment Columbus › Media 133

Video player Settings


Turn title playback including subfolders on/off
› In the Media main menu, tap on Mix/Repeat including
subfolders.
Traffic
› To turn on/off the traffic monitoring during the
playback of media files, go to the Media main menu
and tap on Traffic programme (TP).
Safely disconnect the connected device
NOTICE
Manage files / multimedia database Risk of damage to the data on the connected device!
Shrink image display To safely disconnect/remove the device, proceed as
Enlarge the image display follows.
› In the Media main menu, tap Safely remove:.
Settings
› Select the desired device.
› Disconnect/remove the device.
Operation Manage jukebox
In the Jukebox (in the Infotainment internal memo-
Operation - Basics ry), supported audio files can be imported from con-
nected devices.
› To display jukebox management and the level of
internal Infotainment memory in the main menu,
tap Media Manage jukebox.
› To import the files in the jukebox management,
tapImport.
› Select the desired connected source.
› Select the desired files or folders.
› Press the button.
A Album image / symbol of the connected source › To delete files from the jukebox in the jukebox
Tap: display available albums management, tap Clear.
Tap: Start playback › Select the desired folder or files in the selected
category.
Tap: Pause
› Tap Delete.
Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap: play
Bluetooth® player
the previous song
Infotainment allows audio files of a connected Blue-
After 3 seconds, tap from the start of playback: tooth® player to play using the A2DP and AVRCP au-
to play the current title from the beginning dio profile.
Hold: fast rewind within the title With Infotainment, multiple devices can be paired
Tap: play the next song using Bluetooth®, but only one of them can be used
as a Bluetooth® player.
Hold: fast forward within the title
› For connecting the Bluetooth® player, pair and
Movement within the title is also possible by drag- connect the device via Bluetooth®.
ging a finger over the timeline. › In the Media main menu , tap on Bluetooth paired
Extended operation devices.
Turn repeat playback of the current track on/off › In the list, choose the device with the symbol .
Turn repeat playback of the current album/fold- If a device is connected to Infotainment using
er on/off Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, then it cannot be
Turn random playback of the current album/ connected using Bluetooth®.
folder on/off
134 Infotainment Columbus › Media

SD card ✓ The ignition is switched on.


NOTICE ✓ The USB device allows charging.
Risk of damaging the SD card reader! The charging efficiency can be different compared to
▶ Do not use SD cards with a broken slide for write the charging from the usual mains power supply.
protection.
Depending on the type of the connected USB device
› To insert the SD card, with the bevelled corner to and the frequency of use, the charging current may
the right, push into the slot in the external module not be sufficient to charge the battery of the con-
until it snaps into place. nected device.
› To remove, first disconnect the SD card safely. To Some connected audio sources may not be recog-
do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safely: nised and cannot be charged.
and select the SD card.
CD/DVD
› Press on the inserted SD memory card.
The CD/DVD slot is located in an external module in
The SD card moves to the eject position. the storage compartment on the front passenger
NOTICE side.
When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vi- › To insert a CD/DVD, with the labelled side facing
brations might cause the card to fall out of the up, press into the CD slot until it is automatically
adapter. drawn in.
USB device › To remove, press the button.
› To connect, insert the USB device into the appro- The CD/DVD is moved to the starting position.
priate port.
If the ejected CD/DVD is not removed within 10
To play audio files, use USB ports that support data secs, it is retracted again for safety reasons.
transfer.
Wi-Fi player
› To disconnect disconnect the USB device first. To Infotainment allows audio files to be played from a
do this in the Media main menu, tap Remove safe- device connected to the Infotainment via Wi-Fi.
ly:and select the USB device.
The connected device must meet the following con-
› Disconnect the USB device.
ditions.
A USB device can be connected directly to the
✓ Support DLNA technology.
USB port or via a connection cable.
We recommend that you use extension cables from ✓ The installed UPnP application allows playback.
ŠKODA Original Accessories. › For connecting the wireless player, connect the
USB extension cables or reducers may affect the device via Wi-Fi.
playback function of the connected device. › Start the UPnP application in the connected de-
vice.
Load USB audio source
After connecting the USB device, charging will start › In the main menu, select Media as audio source.
automatically when the following conditions are met.
Infotainment Columbus › Media 135

Supported sources and files

Source Interface Type Specification File system


SD
SD card SD card reader Standard size SDHC
SDXC
USB stick
HDD
(without special soft-
FAT16
MSC ware)
FAT32
USB devices that use
exFAT
the USB mass storage
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x NTFS
support protocol
USB or higher with USB
Devices running the An-
2.x support
droid or Windows
MTP Phone operating system
that support the Media
Transfer Protocol
Devices with an iOS op-
Apple HFS+
erating system
Audio CD (up to 80
min)
ISO9660;
CD-R / RW (Up to
Joliet (Level 1,2,3)
CD/DVD CD/DVD drive 700 MB) -
UDF 1.x
DVD±R/RW
UDF 2.x
DVD-Audio
DVD-Video
Bluetooth® protocols
Bluetooth® player Bluetooth® - A2DP and AVRCP (1.0 - -
1.5)
Supported sources

The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources are not supported by Infotain-
ment.
Compatibility of mobile devices
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mobile
device being tested. This check is carried out by using the following reference or by reading the QR code.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility

Compression for- Codec type File exten- Max. bit rate Max. sam- Multi channels
mat sion [kbps] pling rate
[kHz]
Mono, dual mono,
MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 32 - 320 32, 44, 48 Stereo, Joint
Stereo
MPEG
MPEG 2 Layer 3 16, 22, 24 Mono,
mp3 8 - 160 Stereo, Joint
MPEG 2.5 Layer 3 8, 11, 12
Stereo
136 Infotainment Columbus › Media

Compression for- Codec type File exten- Max. bit rate Max. sam- Multi channels
mat sion [kbps] pling rate
[kHz]
Windows Media
8 - 384 8, 11, 12, 16,
Audio 9 and 9.1
22, 32, 44,
Windows Media Mono, Stereo,
WMA wma 8 - 320 48
Audio 9.2 Joint stereo
Windows Media 32, 44, 48,
8 - 768
Audio 10 96
8, 11, 12, 16,
defined by the
22, 24, 32, Mono, Stereo,
FLAC FLAC flac format
44, 48, 64, 5.1, 7.1
Approx. 5.5 Mbps
88, 96
defined by the 8, 11, 12, 16,
Mono,
OGG-Vorbis OGC-Vorbis ogg format 22, 24, 32,
Stereo
Approx. 5.5 Mbps 44, 48
22, 24, 32,
AAC LC
44, 48 Mono,
ADTS aac 16 - 400
AAC HE 16, 22, 24, Stereo
AAC HEv2 32, 44, 48
8, 11, 12, 16,
Mono,
RIFF WAV wav 64 - 3072 22, 24, 32,
Stereo
44, 48, 96
Supported audio files

Files that are protected by the DRM- and iTunes® methods are not supported by Infotainment.

Codec type File extension Max. recordings per second bit rate
[Mbit/s]
mpg
mpeg
MPEG 1 1.5
m1v
mPV
mpg
mpeg
MPEG 2 15
ps
m2v
MPEG 4 (H.264) m4p
MPJEG mp4
m4v 50
MPEG 4 (ISO) mp4v
mov
Xvid Xvid 20
wmv
WMV9 50
asf
Supported video files

Codec type File extension


M3U m3u
M3U8 m3u8
PLS pls
WPL wpl
ASX asx
PLA pls
Supported playlists
Infotainment Columbus › Images 137

Images Gesture control

Overview ▶ Show the next image.

Display main menu


› Tap on .

▶ Show the previous im-


age.

A Select source
Manage files
Settings

Operation ▶ Enlarge view.


Touch operation

▶ Zoom out.

A Look at images
▶ Show the next image
▶ Show the previous image
▶ Start slideshow
▶ Stop slideshow
B View image
▶ Turn to the left ▶ Turn 90 °.
▶ Turn to the right
▶ Display in initial size
Guidance for GPS coordinates.
The functional area is displayed if the image con-
tains information about GPS.
138 Infotainment Columbus › Video DVD

▶ Maximize image/ Video DVD


display image size.
What you should be mindful of
CD/DVD laser product
CAUTION
▶ The CD/DVD-player is a laser product.
▶ On the manufacturing date, this unit was classified
as a Class 1 laser product in accordance with the
national/international standards DIN EN 60825-1:
2008-05 and DHHS Rules 21 CFR, Subchapter J.
The laser used in this Class 1 laser product is so
Settings weak that there is no risk of danger when operated
The following Infotainment functions are set in the correctly.
menu. ▶ This product is designed such that the laser is re-
stricted to the inside of Infotainment. However,
▶ Display image size. the installed laser could be classified in a higher
▶ Display image duration during the slideshow. class were the housing to be removed. For this rea-
▶ Slideshow repeat. son, never remove the Infotainment housing.

Supported sources and files Overview

Source Interface Specifica- File system Display main menu


tion › To display the main menu, insert a CD / DVD in the
corresponding slot in the external module.
Standard
size Or:
SD card
SD card SD › In the Media main menu, select the video source,
reader
SDHC FAT16 display the folder/track list and start the video file.
SDXC FAT32
USB 1.x; 2.x USB stick exFAT
3.x HDD NTFS
USB or higher (without
with USB special
2.x support software)
Audio CD
(up to 80
min)
CD-R / RW
CD/DVD (Up to 700
CD/DVD -
drive MB) A Select source
DVD
B Playback timeline
±R/RW
DVD-Audio Display the Video DVD menu
DVD-Video Settings
Supported sources

Codec type File extension Max. resolution


[Mpx] Operation
BMP bmp 4 Playback control
JPG; JPEG jpg; jpeg 4 (Progressive Tap: start playback
Mode) Tap: pause
64 Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap:
GIF gif 4 play the previous song
PNG png 4 After 3 seconds from the start of playback,
Supported files tap to play the current title from the beginning
Hold: fast rewind within the title
The maximum supported image size is 20 MB. Tap: play the next song
Infotainment Columbus › Video DVD 139

Hold: fast forward within the title ▶ Main menu - return to the Video DVD main menu
Movement within the title is also possible by drag- B Example of the displayed menu of the DVD
ging the finger over the timeline.
DVD menu
Restriction
For safety reasons, the image display is switched off
at speeds over 5 km/h. Only the sound continues.
The respective message appears on the Infotain-
ment screen.

Settings
› In the Video DVD main menu, tap .

A Operating surface Depending on the DVD, some of the following menu


items are displayed.
▶ - Move the operating surface left / right
▶ Format for setting up the screen width/height ra-
▶ - Move the operating surface left / right
tio.
▶ - Hide full screen display of the operating
▶ Select the audio channel.
surface
▶ Subtitle selection.
▶ - Show the full screen display of the operat-
▶ Enable/disable the parental control settings.
ing surface
▶ Parental control settings.
▶ - Close the operating surface
▶ - Movement in the EPG/teletext

Supported sources and files

Source Interface Type Specification File system


SD
SD card SD card reader Standard size SDHC
SDXC
VFAT
USB stick
FAT16
HDD
FAT32
USB 1.x; 2.x 3.x (without special soft-
exFAT
USB or higher with USB MSC ware)
NTFS
2.x support USB devices that use
the USB mass storage
support protocol
CD-R / RW (Up to
ISO9660;
700 MB)
Joliet (Level 1,2,3)
CD/DVD CD/DVD drive DVD±R/RW -
UDF 1.x
DVD-Video
UDF 2.x
default DVD
Supported sources

The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources are not supported by Infotain-
ment.

Codec type File extension Max. recordings per sec- Max. resolution
ond bit rate [Mbit/s]
MPEG 1 mpeg 1.5 352x288
140 Infotainment Columbus › Media Command

Codec type File extension Max. recordings per sec- Max. resolution
ond bit rate [Mbit/s]
MPEG 2 mpeg
MPEG 4 (H.264) mp4
MPEG 4 (ISO) mov
MPJEG
25 720x576
Xvid .avi
DivX
QuickTime mov
Matroska .mkv
Supported video files

Media Command Switching the transmission on/off takes place in


the Data transmission mobile devices Enable data
Functionality transfer for ŠKODA apps menu item.
✓ Infotainment operation via the application is ena-
The Media Commandfunction allows playback of au-
bled.
dio files or videos in up to two tablets that are con-
nected to Infotainment via Wi-Fi, to control Infotain- The adjustment of the operation takes place in
ment. the Data transmission mobile devices Operation
through apps: menu item.
One of the following menu items can be selected.
Overview
Deactivate - the operation is deactivated.

Display main menu Confirm - Operation requires confirmation at the

› Tap on . start of the application.
▶ Allow - the operation requires no confirmation.

✓ In the tablet(s), the ŠKODA Media Command ap-


plication is installed.
✓ The tablet(s) are connected to the Infotainment
hotspot.

Operation
Start playback
Main menu for a tablet › For selection of the playback source in the main
menu, tap and select the source tablet.
› For playback select the category and then the title.

If two tablets are connected, the title playback starts


in the two tablets at the same time.
Playback control
Tap: Start playback
Tap: Pause
Within 3 seconds of starting playback, tap:
play the previous song
Main menu for two tablets After 3 seconds, tap from the start of play-
Choice of connected tablet back: to play the current title from the beginning
Tap: play the next song
Settings
Increase the audio volume of the tablet
Decrease the audio volume of the tablet
View control options for two tablets
Operating conditions View control options for a tablet
✓ Data transfer of Infotainment is switched on. Mute the tablet
Unmute the tablet
Infotainment Columbus › Mobile device management 141

Movement within the title is also possible by drag-


ging a finger over the timeline.

Function restriction
Connect tablet with Infotainment hotspot
Some tablet types allow playback of audio files or › Turn on the ignition.
videos by an inserted SD card in the tablet. Playback › Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi hotspot in the
of these tracks may be limited. menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Mobile Hotspot.
If several devices are connected to the Infotainment › Turn on Wi-Fi on the tablet.
system by means of Wi-Fi, there is the danger of Wi- › In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
Fi overloading and thus also the inability of Media tainment Wi-Fi.
Command to function properly.
The name of the Infotainment hotspot refers to
High-definition video playback may cause playback the menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot
problems or problems connecting the tablets to the Settings (Wi-Fi) SSID:.
Infotainment system.
› Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re-
quired password.
Settings The password for connecting to the Infotainment
hotspot is taken from the menu item Wi-
ŠKODA Media Command application Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi) Network key:.
The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-
vice after reading the following QR code or by refer-
› Confirm the connection.
ring to the ŠKODA mobile application website. › In the tablet, start the application ŠKODA Media
Command.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/service-app

Supported files

Format Codec type Android operating system iOS operating system

MPEG-4 Part 2

Video MPEG-4 Part 10 (H264)

Xvid

MPEG-1; 2 and 2.5 Layer 3 (mp3)

aac (4,1+)

m4a (4,1+)
Audio
ogg

flac

wav (4,1+)

Mobile device management


Overview

Mobile device management


› In the Telephone main menu , tap on the functional surface Bluetooth paired devices.
142 Infotainment Columbus › Mobile device management

In the list of paired mobile devices, the following symbols may appear for the individual devices.
Grey icon - the device can be connected as a telephone.
Green icon - the device is connected as a telephone.
Grey icon - the device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.
White icon - the device is connected as a Bluetooth® player.
Grey icon - The device can be connected to use telephone contacts and for text message functionality.
Blue icon - The device can be connected to use telephone contacts and for text message functionality.
Possible functions of the connected mobile device
The functions of the device depend on the following connection types.

Connection First device Second device Third device Fourth device


variant Main phone Additional phone
Telephone SIM card in ex- Telephone SIM card in ex-
ternal module ternal module
HFP
incoming /
HFP
outgoing calls
incoming
SMS Data connec- Bluetooth®
1. - calls -
Telephone tion player
Bluetooth®
contacts
player
Bluetooth®
player
rSAP
incoming /
outgoing calls
HFP
SMS
incoming
Telephone Bluetooth®
2. - calls - -
contacts player
Bluetooth®
Data connec-
player
tion
Bluetooth®
player
HFP
incoming /
outgoing calls incoming calls
SMS SMS Bluetooth®
3. - - -
Telephone Data connec- player
contacts tion
Bluetooth®
player
incoming / out-
HFP
going calls
incoming Telephone
SMS
calls contacts Bluetooth®
4. - Telephone con- -
SMS Bluetooth® player
tacts
Bluetooth® player
Data connec-
player
tion

With Infotainment only a mobile device can be connected as a Bluetooth® player.

Limitations of mobile devices and applications Connection restrictions


▶ With Infotainment, a max. of 20 mobile devices are
Availability of features paired.
The availability of certain features depends on the
▶ The range of the connection of the mobile device
type of mobile device, as well as that of the applica- to Infotainment is limited to the passenger com-
tions installed. partment.
Infotainment Columbus › Mobile device management 143

▶ After reaching the maximum number, the pairing The mobile device is connected to the Infotainment
of the next mobile device will replace that of the or just paired, depending on the number of devices
device that has not been used for the longest peri- that are already connected.
od of time.
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile de-
Compatibility of mobile devices vice
It is possible to check the ŠKODA web pages to see › Turn on the ignition.
if Infotainment is compatible with the selected mo- › Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device.
bile device being tested. This check is carried out by › Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment
using the following reference or by reading the QR Bluetooth Bluetooth.
code.
› Tap on Bluetooth Search for devices.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility › Select the desired device from the list of Blue-
tooth® devices.
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
› If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
select the device to be replaced.
Bluetooth® compatibility of mobile devices
Due to the large number of mobile devices, it is not Connect Infotainment to a mobile device that is
possible to guarantee total Bluetooth® compatibility not already paired
with Infotainment. Bluetooth® compatibility depends The connection with an already coupled mobile de-
on the Bluetooth® version as well as the implementa- vice is made automatically after switching on the ig-
tion of Bluetooth® protocols by the manufacturer of nition; if necessary the device can be connected
the mobile device. manually as follows.
Applications in mobile devices › Turn on the ignition.
Mobile devices can be used to install applications › Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device.
that allow you to view additional information on the › Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment
Infotainment screen, or to operate the Infotainment Bluetooth Bluetooth.
system.
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
Due to the variety of applications, as well as their on- › In the device list, select the desired device and the
going development, the available applications may Bluetooth® profile.
not function on all mobile devices. ŠKODA AUTO as-
sumes no liability for their proper functioning.
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then
confirm.
The scope of available applications and their func- › If two devices are connected to the Infotainment,
tionality is dependent on the type of Infotainment, as select the device to be replaced.
well as the vehicle and country.
Disconnect from a mobile device
› Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
Connection set-up › Tap on the Bluetooth® profile icon of the desired
mobile device.
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment
› Turn on the ignition. Delete a paired mobile device
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on the mobile device. › Tap Bluetooth Paired devices.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment › To delete a mobile device, tap and confirm the
Bluetooth Bluetooth. deletion.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® visibility of the Infotain- › To delete all mobile devices, tap on Delete all and con-
ment Bluetooth Visibility: Visible. firm the deletion.
› Find available Bluetooth® devices in the mobile de- Connection via a SIM card in the external module
vice. The SIM card can be used for phone and data serv-
› Select the Infotainment Bluetooth® unit. ices.
The name of the unit can be found by tapping Use a mini-sized SIM card, standard size 25x15 mm.
Bluetooth Name:. › Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
› Confirm the PIN; enter it if necessary and then › Turn on the menu item in Telephone interface
confirm. "Business".
144 Infotainment Columbus › Telephone

› Insert a SIM card into the corresponding slot in the The prerequisite for establishing an Internet con-
external module in the storage compartment on nection is using a telephone with a SIM card with ac-
the passenger's side . tive data services.
Insert the SIM card with the bevelled corner on
the left and the contacts facing downwards until
it locks. Telephone
NOTICE Telephone main menu
When inserting an incorrectly sized SIM card or in
the wrong direction, there is a risk of damage to the Display main menu
external module. › Tap on .

When using the SIM card for the first time, select
one of the following menu items to use the SIM card.
▶ Calls too - enabling data and telephone services.
▶ Only data connections - enabling of data services only.
› If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the
PIN code of the SIM card must be entered.
› Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping .
Or:
› Tap to save and confirm the PIN code. A Name of the connected telephone
› Set the data service provider’s required network ▶ Tap: Show list of previously connected phones
and confirm the Internet connection.
B Preset buttons for preferred contacts
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask
your provider whether one of the displayed provid- C Choice of storage group for the preferred con-
ers can be used. tacts
By using the SIM card for phone services, the con- D Name of telephone service providers
nection to the connected phones is terminated. ▶ If the symbol is displayed in front of the name,
roaming is active.
Remove the SIM card from the external module
› Press on the inserted SIM card until it snaps into E Symbol for the connection type
the delivery position. Then remove it. F List of connected telephones, which are available
Set network parameters as the source of telephone contacts
› Tap Network. G Status symbol of the phone
› Set the desired parameters. Change the main phone to the extension tele-
For accurate parameters for setting the network, phone
contact the data service provider. Enter the telephone number
Set the parameters for the data connection Contact list
› Tap Network Data Connection:. Text messages
› Set the desired parameters. Call lists
Connection to the phone via rSAP Bluetooth® pro- Settings
file
› Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
› Turn on the menu item in Telephone interface Conditions for connecting a telephone with
"Business". Infotainment
› Turn on the Bluetooth® on Infotainment
Bluetooth Bluetooth. ✓ The ignition is switched on.
› Turn on the Bluetooth® visibility of the Infotain- ✓ The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment and
ment Bluetooth Visibility: Turn on Visible. the telephone needs to be switched on.
› Switch on Bluetooth® and its visibility in the phone. The Bluetooth® function of the Infotainment is
› Pair and connect the phone to the Infotainment via switched on in the menu item Bluetooth
the rSAP Bluetooth® profile. Bluetooth.
✓ Visibility of the Infotainment is switched on.
Infotainment Columbus › Telephone 145

The visibility of the Infotainment is switched on in Conference call


the menu item Bluetooth Visibility:. Visible. A conference call is a joint telephone conversation
✓ The telephone is within signal range of the Info- with a minimum of three and a maximum of six par-
tainment's Bluetooth® unit. ticipants.
✓ The telephone is compatible with Infotainment. › Make the next call during an ongoing conversation/
✓ Through Infotainment, no mobile device can be conference.
connected using Apple CarPlay. Or:
› Accept a new incoming call by tapping the function
Telephone operation area .

Enter telephone number


› To start a conference call, tap on the functional
area .
› In the Telephone main menu, tap .
During an ongoing conference call, the following
› Enter the telephone number using the numeric functions can be selected depending on the context.
keypad that is displayed.
Hold the conference call and leave temporarily
The displayed numeric keypad can also be used
(the conference will continue in the background)
for searching for contacts.
Return to the conference being held
If, for example, the digits 32 are entered, contacts
/ Switch the microphone off / on
with the letter sequence DA, FA, EB etc. are dis-
End the conference
played next to the numeric keypad.
Show details of the conference call
List of telephone contacts In the details of the conference call, depending on
The list of telephone contacts is imported from the the connected telephone, the following functions
connected main telephone. can be selected.
› To display the contact list in the telephone main Show details of the conference call participants
menu, tap . End conversation with the conference call par-
› To find details within the list, tap Find. ticipant
Conversation with a participant outside of the
› Enter the details you wish to find. conference call
› To establish a connection with a contact, tap the
functional area showing the desired contact. Send a text message
If a contact has multiple telephone numbers, select
› In the Telephone main menu, tap New text mes-
sage.
the telephone number from the displayed list.
› Write a text message and confirm; a view of the
› To display the details for a contact, tap . message is displayed.
Establish a connection to the voice mailbox num- The message can be edited when the text area
ber within the view is tapped.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap . › Consult or select the recipient of the message, if
Telephone conversation necessary tap to enter the phone number.
Depending on the context of the telephone conver- › Add more recipients or confirm selected recipi-
sation, the following functions can be selected. ents.
End connection / reject incoming call / end call › Tap on .
Answer an incoming call / return to the held call Display received text messages
/ Switch the ringer off / on › In the Telephone main menu, tap E-mails .
Hold a call › To display the Message, select the desired mes-
/ Switch the microphone off / on sage.
Show details of the caller
Set up a conference call The message content and the following menu with
functions is displayed.
› To switch the call tone from the speakers to the
telephone, go to the telephone main menu and tap Read the text message using the generated Info-
on hands-free. tainment voice.
Display the menu with the following functions
› To switch the call tone from the telephone to the of an accepted message.
speakers, tap .
Option to answer the message by means of a
template.
Delete message.
Recognise phone numbers in the message.
146 Infotainment Columbus › Telephone

Forward message, with the option to edit the Conference calls


message before sending. › To enable/disable the option for conference call
Reply to the sender by sending a message. setup in the phone main menu, tap conference.
Prefer services of SIM card in external module
Settings for Infotainment telephone functions › In the Telephone main menu, tap on User profile
Prioritise:.
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts › Select one of the following menu items.
› To save the desired preset button, press and hold. ▶ Automatic - Depending on the telephone service
› Select a contact from the displayed list. provider.
› If the contact contains multiple telephone num- ▶ Telephone call - Telephone calls are preferred.
bers, choose the desired telephone number. ▶ Data transfer - A data connection is preferred.
› To delete tap on Telephone User profile Manage fa-
vourites in the main menu. Rename profile of SIM card in external module
› In the Telephone main menu, tap Profile name: .
› To delete one preset, tap on the list entry and con- › Enter the name and confirm.
firm the deletion.
Or: Select device to use the contacts
› In the Telephone main menu, tap Select device con-
› To delete all presets, tap on Delete all and confirm the tacts.
deletion.
› Select the desired device.
Import telephone contacts
Set telephone functions of SIM card in external
After first connecting the main telephone with Info-
module
tainment, telephone contacts will start to be impor-
ted into the Infotainment memory.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap Call settings.
› Select and set the desired menu item.
Infotainment can import up to 4000 telephone con-
tacts together with contact pictures. Each contact Delete call log
can include max. 5 telephone numbers. Deleting the selected call type by means of a SIM
card inserted in the external module or by means of a
Depending on the type of telephone, import confir-
telephone connected to the Infotainment via the
mation may be required.
rSAP Bluetooth® profile.
Update telephone contacts › In the Telephone main menu, tap Delete calls.
When re-connecting the telephone with Infotain-
ment, an automatic update of the list is carried out.
› Select the desired menu item.
› Confirm the deletion.
› For a manual update of the list in the telephone
main menu, tap on User profile Import contacts. Set the functions of the text messages
Settings for text messages of a SIM card inserted in
Show pictures on phone contacts the external module or in the telephone connected
› In the Telephone main menu, tap User profile Show via the Bluetooth® profile rSAP.
pictures for contacts.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap Text message set-
Sort contacts in the phone book tings.
› In the Telephone main menu, tap on User profile › Select and set the desired menu item.
Sort by:.
Switching telephone functions on / off in the ex-
› Select the type by which to sort. ternal module
Ringer › In the Telephone main menu, tap “Business” telephone
Some phones do not allow the use of the telephone interface.
ringtone; instead, the Infotainment ringtone is used.
Switching SIM card telephone data services on /
› To set the Infotainment ringer in the Telephone off in the external module
main menu, tap on User profile Select ringtone. › In the Telephone main menu, tap Use SIM card only
› Select the ringtone. for data connection.
Number for the voice mailbox By switching on the menu item, the SIM card is used
› To set the voice mailbox number in the Telephone exclusively for data services.
main menu, tap on User profile Mailbox number:. By switching off the menu item, the SIM card is
› Enter the number of the voice mailbox. used for telephone functions and data services.
Infotainment Columbus › Wi-Fi 147

Set PIN code of SIM card in external module Settings


› In the Telephone main menu, tap PIN settings.
Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment hot-
› Set the PIN code and confirm. spot
Redirect incoming SIM card calls in the external › Turn on the ignition.
module › Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi hotspot in the
› In the Telephone main menu, tap Redirect calls. menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Mobile Hotspot.
› Set the desired menu item. › Turn on the Wi-Fi on the mobile device.
› In the list of available Wi-Fi devices, look for Info-
tainment Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi
The name of the Infotainment hotspot refers to
Functionality the menu item Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot
Settings (Wi-Fi) SSID:.
Wi-Fi can be used to connect to the Internet, to
playback audio files in the Media menu or for operat-
› Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the re-
quired password.
ing the Infotainment system using an application in
the connected device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Com- The password for connecting to the Infotainment
mand). hotspot is taken from the menu item Wi-
Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi) Network key:
The Infotainment hotspot can connect up to 8 mo-
bile devices. At the same time, the Infotainment can › Confirm the connection.
be connected to another hotspot. Connect Infotainment to the mobile device hot-
spot
› Turn on the ignition.
Overview of available hotspots
› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi unit in the menu
Display available hotspots item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi.
› Tap Wi-Fi Wi-Fi:. › Select the desired hotspot in the list of available
hotspots.
› Enter the password for connecting to mobile devi-
ces.
Infotainment stores passwords for previously
connected hotspots.
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot
The security level is factory-set at WPA2 and cannot
be changed.
Change the name of the Infotainment hotspot
A Previously connected hotspots › Tap Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi)
SSID:.
B Available hotspots
› Enter the name and confirm.
C Updating the list of available hotspots › Tap Save.
Currently connected hotspot Change password for connection to Infotainment
Delete information about the hotspot connection hotspot
Wi-Fi signal strength of the hotspot The password must be a minimum of 8 and a maxi-
mum of 63 characters.
The Wi-Fi signal from the hotspot is not available
› Tap Wi-Fi Mobile Hotspot Hotspot Settings (Wi-Fi)
Network key:.
Function restriction › Enter the password and confirm.
› Tap Save.
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a
hotspot with WPA2 access protection. Manual connection of Infotainment to the mobile
device hotspot
› Set the hotspot backup of the mobile device to
WPA2.
› Turn on the ignition.
148 Infotainment Columbus › Data connection

› Turn on the Infotainment’s Wi-Fi unit in the menu ▶ Only data connections - enabling of data services only.
item Wi-Fi Wi-Fi: Wi-Fi. › If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the
› Tap Manual settings. PIN code of the SIM card must be entered.
› Enter the name of the hotspot to connect to and › Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping .
the access password. Or:
› Tap Connect.
› Tap to save and confirm the PIN code.
› Wait for the connection to be established and, if
necessary, confirm the respective messages. › Set the data service provider’s required network
and confirm the Internet connection.
Tips for a perfect connection
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask
▶ Keep only the hotspot to be connected switched
your provider whether one of the displayed provid-
on and switch off the other hotspots.
ers can be used.
▶ Delete unused hotspots. This shortens the time re-
quired to establish a connection. Set network parameters
▶ For some hotspots, the connection takes longer, so › Tap Network.
wait for the connection to finish. › Set the desired parameters.
▶ If the connection is interrupted, recheck the availa- For accurate parameters for setting the network,
ble hotspots and repeat the connection. contact the data service provider.
Set the parameters for the data connection
Data connection › Tap Network Data Connection:.
› Set the desired parameters.
Settings
Connection to the phone via rSAP Bluetooth® pro-
Mobile data file
Mobile data for the data connection may be sub- › Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
ject to charges according to the mobile network › Turn on the menu item in Telephone interface
operator's tariff conditions. "Business".
Types of data connection setup › Turn on the Bluetooth® in Infotainment
▶ By connecting the Infotainment with the external Bluetooth Bluetooth.
hotspot via Wi-Fi. › Turn on the Bluetooth® visibility of the Infotain-
▶ By using a SIM card with data services inserted in ment Bluetooth Visibility: Turn on Visible.
the external module of the Infotainment. › Switch on Bluetooth® and its visibility in the phone.
▶ By connecting the Infotainment with a mobile › Pair and connect the phone to the Infotainment via
phone via the Bluetooth® profile rSAP. the rSAP Bluetooth® profile.
Connection via a data SIM card in the external The prerequisite for establishing an Internet con-
module nection is using a telephone with a SIM card with ac-
A SIM card size mini (standard size 25x15 mm) with tive data services.
enabled data services must be used.
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment. SmartLink
› Turn on the menu item in Telephone interface
"Business". Functionality
› Insert a SIM card into the corresponding slot in the SmartLink offers the ability to display and operate
external module in the storage compartment on
certified applications from a connected mobile de-
the passenger's side .
vice in the Infotainment screen.
Insert the SIM card with the bevelled corner on
Certification may be conditional upon the use of the
the left and the contacts facing downwards until
latest update to the particular SmartLink application.
it locks.
Applications include, for example, apps for route
NOTICE guidance, telephoning, listening to music, etc.
When inserting an incorrectly sized SIM card or in
the wrong direction, there is a risk of damage to the Mobile devices can be connected via a USB cable.
external module. Supported connection types
› Select one of the following menu items to use the SmartLink supports the following connection types.
SIM card. ▶ Android Auto.
▶ Calls too - enabling data and telephone services. ▶ Apple CarPlay.
Infotainment Columbus › SmartLink 149

▶ MirrorLink. Apple CarPlay

Overview of the SmartLink connection


Main menu SmartLink
› Tap on .

A List of available applications


Depending on the duration of operation:
▶ Tap: Return to the Apple CarPlay main menu
▶ Hold: Turn on voice control (Siri)

A Previously connected device MirrorLink


B Currently connected device
Display information about SmartLink
Separation of the active connection
Settings for the SmartLink menu

Android Auto

It is not possible to operate the application while


driving
Return to the SmartLink main menu
List of running applications
Display of the last running application in connec-
ted mobile devices
Navigation applications Settings
Telephone applications
Overview of running applications, phone calls, in- Connection conditions
coming text messages, and more.
Music applications General connection conditions
✓ The mobile device supports the following Smar-
Display of other available applications as well as tLink connection types: Android Auto. Apple Car-
the option to return to the SmartLink main menu Play and MirrorLink.
Turn on voice control (Google Voice) ✓ Mobile devices, as well as the type of Smar-
tLinkconnection, are supported in the respective
market.
✓ Some connected mobile devices require the mo-
bile device to be “unlocked”.
Conditions for Android Auto
✓ The device to be connected must have Android
AutoSupport.
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
tions that the Android Auto connection supports
can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
150 Infotainment Columbus › SmartLink

✓ The Android Auto application needs to be instal- place in the Android Auto application, then there is
led on the mobile device. the possibility that this will be terminated by the
✓ Some applications require the data connection in start of route guidance by the Infotainment sys-
the mobile device to be turned on. tem.

Conditions for Apple CarPlay Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an


✓ The device to be connected must have Apple Apple CarPlay connection
CarPlaySupport. ▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de-
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
A list of devices, supported regions and applica-
dia menu.
tions that the Apple CarPlay connection supports
▶ Connecting the device disconnects all currently
can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
connected Bluetooth® devices.
✓ Siri voice control is on.
▶ For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth®
✓ The data connection is switched on in the mobile
devices can be connected to the Infotainment sys-
device.
tem. The SIM card inserted in the external module
Conditions for MirrorLink can only be used for data connection.
✓ The device to be connected must have Mirror- ▶ If route guidance is taking place at this moment in
LinkSupport. Infotainment, then there is the option to start the
A list of devices and applications that the Mirror- route guidance in the Apple CarPlay application.
Link connection supports can be found on the And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking
websites of Car Connectivity Consorcium®. place in the Apple CarPlay application, then there is
the possibility that this will be terminated by the
✓ The MirrorLink application needs to be installed
start of route guidance by the Infotainment sys-
on the mobile device.
tem.
✓ Some applications require the data connection in
the connected mobile device to be turned on. Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an
MirrorLink connection
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de-
Operation vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
dia menu.
Operation of the running MirrorLink application
▶ If you wish to use the device to be connected in
Display of control surfaces at the bottom
the Telephone menu, the device must be paired
Display of control surfaces at the top
with and connected to the Infotainment system by
Return to the MirrorLink main menu
Bluetooth® before establishing the MirrorLink con-
nection.
Restriction
Restriction of SmartLink applications while driving Settings
For safety reasons, operation of some SmartLinkap-
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB
plications while driving is not possible or is restric-
ted. › Turn on the Infotainment.
› Turn on the mobile device.
Functionality restriction of Infotainment with an › Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
Android Auto connection using a cable.
▶ For the duration of the connection, the external de-
vice cannot be used as an audio source in the Me-
› Choose to connect via Apple CarPlay.
dia menu. Apple CarPlay – Disconnection
▶ By connecting the device, all currently connected › In the Apple CarPlay main menu, tap on the “ŠKO-
Bluetooth® devices will be disconnected and the DA” functional area.
device will automatically be connected as the main › Tap on .
telephone.
Android Auto - Connection via USB
▶ For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth®
devices can be connected to the Infotainment sys-
› Turn on the Infotainment.
tem. The SIM card inserted in the external module › Turn on the mobile device.
can only be used for data connection. › Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable.
▶ If route guidance is taking place at this moment in
Infotainment, then there is the option to start the › Choose to connect via Android Auto.
route guidance in the Android Auto application.
And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking
Infotainment Columbus › ŠKODA Connect online services 151

Android Auto - Disconnection For example, the ŠKODA Connect web-


› In the main menu of Android Auto tap on “Re- site contains the latest information
turn to ŠKODA”. about the online services, a link to the
› Tap on . ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the
option of downloading the ŠKODA Con-
MirrorLink - Connection via USB nect application.
› Turn on the Infotainment.
ŠKODA Connect Portal website
› Turn on the mobile device.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
› Connect the mobile device to the front USB input
using a cable. The ŠKODA Connect Portal website is
› Choose to connect through MirrorLink. used, for example, for registration, acti-
vation and ordering of online services. It
MirrorLink - Disconnection also provides the option of remote ac-
› In the MirrorLink main menu, tap . cess to the vehicle.
› Tap on . Information call
Change to another device / connection type The information call may be used in the case of prob-
Infotainment allows you to switch between currently lems with the online services or for information re-
connected devices and the connection type. garding the products and services of the ŠKODA
brand.
› Tap on .
› Select the desired device or connection type. ✓ The functional condition represents the active
online ŠKODA Connect services.
› Press the button.
ŠKODA Connect online services
Functionality
ŠKODA Connect online service offer the option of
connecting the vehicle to the online world. They thus
represent an extension of the vehicle and Infotain-
ment functions.
For the functionality of the ŠKODA Connect Online
Services, the vehicle must be within range of a mo-
bile network through which the services are provi- Breakdown call
ded. The availability, the connection speed and the The breakdown call can be used in the event of a
technology used in the mobile network can be differ- breakdown.
ent in the respective countries and are dependent on ✓ The functional condition represents the active
the mobile network operator. online ŠKODA Connect services.
The ŠKODA Connect online services are not included › Press the button.
in the equipment of the vehicle. They can be ordered
separately on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
in the ŠKODA Connect application.
The offer of ŠKODA Connect online services de-
pends on the type of vehicle and its trim level, Info-
tainment and country. Availability in each country
can be checked on the ŠKODA Connect website.
The rights and obligations of the Parties with respect
to the provision of these services are governed by a
separate agreement. Current legal documents re- ŠKODA Connect Application
garding the online services can be found on the The ŠKODA Connect application enables remote ac-
ŠKODA Connect Portal as well as the ŠKODA Con- cess to the vehicle using a mobile device. It can also
nect application. be used for user registration and to activate and
configure the online services.
ŠKODA Connect website
http://go.skoda.eu/skoda-connect The application can be downloaded to the mobile de-

vice after scanning the following QR code or link.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/skodaconnectapp
152 Infotainment Columbus › ŠKODA Connect online services

› To switch the services on/off, tap the Checkbox.


Connection status of the online services
The connection status of the online services of ŠKO-
DA Connect online services is indicated by an icon in
the status bar on the Infotainment screen.
Settings
Registration and activation of online services
User registration, as well as the activation of the
ŠKODA Connect online services, is completed on the
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA
Connect application.
In order to complete user registration, you will need
to access your e-mails.
In order to activate ŠKODA Connect, proceed as fol-
lows. A The ŠKODA Connect online services are availa-
ble.
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
At the same time the symbol of the data con-
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration.
nection type can be displayed.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN you have re-
ceived during user and vehicle registration on the B The ŠKODA Connect online services are not
ŠKODA Connect Portal website or in the ŠKODA available.
Connect application. C Localisation services are restricted or disabled.
› Wait for the registration completion message to Detailed information about the online services
appear. can be viewed in the Online Services Administra-
› Confirm any messages on the screen. tion.
Delete user D Localisation services are enabled.
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment. Detailed information about the online services
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration. can be viewed in the Online Services Administra-
tion.
› Tap Delete user Delete.
› Confirm the deletion. Localisation services
By deleting the registered vehicle in the user ac- For the complete functionality of some online serv-
count on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal the ices, activated localisation services are required.
user is also deleted in Infotainment. Localisation services include, for example, informa-
Changing the user tion on the last parking position, area notification or
speed notification.
› Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Registration. When localisation services are active, the symbol
› Tap New owner Change ownership. will be displayed in the status line in the Infotainment
screen.
› Enter and confirm the registration PIN code re-
ceived during registration of the new user and dur- Switching Private mode function on/off
ing vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect By switching the Private mode function on, the serv-
Portal website. ices relating to sending vehicle information and per-
› If necessary, confirm the change by tapping the sonal data, which are essential for the provision of
function surface Change main users. online services, are deactivated.
Management of online services › Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Manage-
In the service management, it is possible to display ment Private mode.
information about the online services, the validity of The emergency call remains fully functional after
their licence, or to switch the services on/off. turning on the private mode feature.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Privacy settings The functions of the information and breakdown call
and manage services. are limited.
› To display the designations and the status of the Switch Care Connect function on/off
services, select the desired service. By switching the Care Connect services off, the serv-
› For detailed information about the service tap . ices relating to sending vehicle information and per-
Infotainment Columbus › Navigation 153

sonal data, which are essential for the provision of Setting navigation announcements
Care Connect online services, are deactivated. › In the navigation main menu, tap Navigation an-
nouncements.
› Tap ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Manage-
ment Care Connect.
NOTICE Navigation overviews
The emergency call remains fully functional after
turning off the Care Connect feature. Display main menu
The functions of the information and breakdown call › Tap on .
are limited. Map overview
Switch on/off Infotainment Online function
By switching off the Infotainment OnlineServices,
the services in relation to the provision of online
services Infotainment Online are switched off.
› ŠKODA Connect (online services) Services Management
Infotainment Online.
Switch online services on/off
It is possible to have the online services switched
off/on exclusively by a ŠKODA service partner.
After turning off the online services, none of the
A Vehicle position
ŠKODA Connect online services, including the
emergency calls are functioning. B Route

To inform the vehicle C Functional surface for the operation of the map
user that the ŠKODA display
Connect online services D Function surface for the POI
are out of order, the
E Function surface for the POI list
service partner applies
the sticker at a visible F Road sign for the affected route section
point in the vehicle (e.g. on the roof cladding). G Information on the maximum permitted speed
This sticker must not be removedas long as the on- Show the following menu depending on con-
line services are off. text
NOTICE There is no route guidance - search/enter a new
It should be noted that the emergency, information destination
and breakdown calls are not available after switching Route guidance is not taking place
off the online services. ▶ Show route plan.
For this reason, no automatic emergency call is made
▶ Set traffic obstruction manually.
in the event of a serious car accident.
▶ Search for destination/enter.
▶ End route guidance.
Navigation Tap on show menu
▶ Save current vehicle position as a flag target.
Navigation announcements
▶ Show list of saved routes.
Infotainment route guidance takes place using ▶ Display list of stored destinations.
graphic driving recommendations and navigation an- ▶ Display list of last destinations.
nouncements.
▶ Route guidance to home address.
The navigation announcements are generated by the POI Search
Infotainment system. Navigation announcement
clarity (e.g. road or city name) cannot always be Map display options
guaranteed. Change the map display between the digital in-
Repeat the last navigation announcement strument cluster and the Infotainment screen
› Tap on . Display for navigation announcement
Turn off navigation announcements Settings
› Tap on .
154 Infotainment Columbus › Navigation

Symbols displayed in the map Switch on/off the automatic change of scale
Target position When the automatic scale is active, the map scale
Intermediate destination position changes automatically, depending on the type of
Location of home address road used and the manoeuvre you are about to un-
Favourite position dertake.
Map options The automatic scale is only active as long as the map
is centred on the vehicle position.
› To turn on navigation in the main menu, tap .
The function surface is highlighted in green.
› To turn off navigation in the main menu, tap
.
The function surface is highlighted in white.
The turning off occurs likewise when the map is
moved or the map scale is changed manually.
Map view in reduced scale
A Automatic map display in day or night mode (de- The map scale is reduced for a few seconds and then
pending on the currently active vehicle lighting) restored.
B Daytime map display › To display, tap .
C Night-time map display
Map orientation
D Switch the split screen display on/off
E Switching on/ off of the selected POI categories
display

Map display in the digital instrument cluster


The map can be displayed in the digital instrument
cluster and in infotainment at the same time.
The type of map displayed in the digital instrument
cluster can be selected.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Map Map view in
the station wagon:. › To change the map orientation, tap A.

Map scale The map can be aligned as follows.


The map is oriented to the north
The symbol rotates the vehicle position, the map
and the Polarstern Symbol do not rotate.
Map oriented to the direction of travel
The map as well as the Polarstern symbol rotate,
the symbol showing the vehicle position does not
rotate.
With a map scale greater than 10 km, the map is
automatically oriented towards north.
It is possible to change the map scale manually or to
turn on the automatic change of scale. Map centring
The moved map can be centred/aligned to the vehi-
› To display the operating surfaces for changing cle, destination or route position.
the map scale, tap A .
› Tap map centring .
Types of manual scale change
Search for a new destination
▶ Touch the screen with two fingers and pull them
apart or close them together.
› Tap on .

▶ For slider or functional areas, use and .


Infotainment Columbus › Navigation 155

A Input line A Select category of stored destinations


B Depending on the search mode, the following ▶ - stored destinations
symbols are displayed ▶ - Flag destination
▶ - Display the map as well as the list of the
Vehicle position at the time of storing flag
destinations listed in the navigation database
destination.
▶ - Display the map as well as the list of online ▶ - saved destinations
destinations
▶ - Favourite
C - Select the destination search/destination en-
▶ - Favourites
try
▶ - Telephone contact destinations
D Context-dependent display of the destination
list ▶ online destinations in the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website or in the ŠKODA Connect appli-
▶ List of last destinations.
cation
▶ List of visited destinations.
Selecting the stored destination
Select the destination you are looking for
› Select the category of stored destinations.
› Enter the details for the destination search. › Select the desired destination.
› Select the desired destination.
Destination details are displayed with the option of
Destination details are displayed with the option of starting route guidance.
starting route guidance.
Selecting destination by tapping the map point
Enter a new destination via the address
› Tap the desired item or the POI icon in the map.
› Tap on .
› Tap to start the route guidance.
A menu will appear with the destination input op-
tions. Route calculation
A route is created by starting route guidance to a
› Select the destination via the address.
destination.
› Enter the required information.
Additional intermediate destinations can be added to
Destination details are displayed with the option of
the route.
starting route guidance.
Route calculation is done on the basis of the set
Enter a new destination via the map point route options.
› Tap on .
› Route options.
A menu will appear with the destination input op-
tions.
› Select the desired list entries.
With selection of alternative routes turned on, the
› Select the destination via the map point.
following menu is displayed after the calculation of a
› Touch the screen to move the desired destination
new route .
into the cross-hair.
Or:
› To switch on / off the alternative routes in the
main menu, tap Navigation Route options Suggest 3
› Set the GPS coordinates. alternative routes.
› Confirm the destination input. Calculate the most economical route with short-
Destination details are displayed with the option of est travelling time and distance travelled – the
starting route guidance. route is highlighted green.
Calculate the fastest route to the destination,
List of stored destinations
even if a detour is necessary - the route is high-
› Tap Destinations. lighted in red.
156 Infotainment Columbus › Navigation

Calculate the shortest route to the destination,


even if a longer travelling time is required - the
route is highlighted in orange.
Infotainment tries to allow for continued guidance
even if the navigation data is incomplete or there is
no data at all for the given area.
The route is recalculated if you ignore driving recom-
mendations or change the route.
The navigation announcements provided may vary
from the actual situations, e.g. due to out-of-date
A List of traffic reports
navigation data.
B Filtering of traffic reports
Route overview
During route guidance the display of a route over- C Symbol for the source of the traffic message
view is possible.
If no route guidance takes place, the traffic ob-
› Route details. struction in the map is represented by a red line.
Change route destinations to each other If route guidance takes place, the traffic obstruction
If intermediate routes are included in the route, it is is shown as follows.
possible to change them in the route overview and ▶ Grey line - The traffic obstruction is not on the
thus change their order, add further destinations or route
delete destinations.
▶ Red line - The traffic obstruction is on the route,
› In order to change the order of the destination. the route will not be recalculated and the route
hold the functional area until the destination be- passes through the traffic obstruction
comes free. ▶ Orange line - The traffic obstruction is on the
› Move the destination to the desired position and route, the route is recalculated and an alternative
release the functional surface. route is available
The route is re-calculated. › For switching the traffic flow display off / on in
the main menu, tap Navigation Map Settings traffic
Waypoint mode
flow.
This mode is suitable for off-road navigation or for
areas where maps are not available. NOTICE
ŠKODA AUTO does not accept responsibility for the
Infotainment allows the recording of waypoint tours
availability, content, up-to-dateness or evaluation of
driven using automatic of manually entered way-
TMC traffic reports or other data provided by third
points. Then there is the possibility to start route
parties. ŠKODA AUTO is not entitled to examine or
guidance to the stored waypoint tour or to save the
adapt this data in any way. The data can only be edi-
waypoint tour on the SD card.
ted by Infotainment in areas where it is available.
› To display navigation in the main menu, tap Ena-
ble waypoint mode.
Touch operation
List of traffic reports
The Infotainment enables the reception of traffic re- Move map
ports, which include information regarding traffic
congestion, using TMC (Traffic Message Channel) or
online services Infotainment Online.
The list of traffic reports will be updated by Infotain-
ment on a continuous basis.
› Tap to Display traffic reports .
Infotainment Columbus › Navigation 157

Enter destination by tapping the map item Showing arrival time information in the destina-
tion / driving time
The status line displays information on the time de-
pending on the following setting.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Time display:.
Showing information on the destination / waypoint
The status line displays information on the distance
and travel time to the destination, depending on the
following time setting.

Zoom into the map


› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
status display:.
Switching display of country-specific speed limits
on / off
When the function is switched on, the country-spe-
cific speed limits are displayed when crossing nation-
al borders.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Note: Country border crossed.
Or:
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Zoom out of the map Note: Country border crossed.
› For display of speed limits in the main menu, tap
Navigation Top speed.
Switching the display of road signs on motorways
and expressways on / off
When the function is switched on, Infotainment dis-
plays traffic and information signs on motorways and
expressways.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Map Show traffic
sign.
Switching the fuel warning on / off
Restriction When the function is switched on and the fuel sup-
ply reaches the reserve area, a warning message ap-
Infotainment may give incorrect driving recommen- pears with the option of going to the nearest petrol
dations if the road conditions or the traffic do not station.
match the navigation data.
› In the navigation main menu, tap Tank options Tank
This can lead to the route guidance being carried out warning.
using a different route or proposing a change of di-
rection in a one-way street. Towing a trailer
To calculate the correct route for trailer operation,
switch on trailer inclusion.
Settings › In the navigation main menu, tap Route options
Consider trailer.
Avoiding traffic obstructions
If the function is switched on and the Infotainment Setting navigation announcements
receives information about a traffic obstruction on › In the navigation main menu, tap Navigation an-
the route from online traffic information or the TP nouncements.
traffic announcements, the route is recalculated. › Select and set the desired menu item.
› For switching on/off the function in the main Favourite POI categories
menu, tap Nvigation Route options Dynamic route. Favourite POI categories are displayed on the map
and provided in the destination search.
158 Infotainment Columbus › Navigation

› In the navigation main menu, tap Map Show special Determining the navigation database version
destinations Select categories for points of interest. › Tap System information.
› Set favourite categories.
Setting home address
The defined destination of the home address is dis-
played in the overview of recommended destina-
tions.
› Home address.
› Define the home address using the current vehicle
position or enter the address.
Switching demo mode on / off
In demo mode, the route guidance from the starting
point of the demo mode to the selected destination
is simulated.
When the function is switched on, Infotainment is-
sues a query before the start of route guidance as to
where whether the route guidance should be carried
out in the normal way or in demo mode.
› For switching on/off in the navigation main menu,
tap Advanced settings Demo mode.
Defining the starting point of the demo mode
› In the navigation main menu, tap Advanced settings
Demo mode Start point Define demo mode.
Or:
› Hold down the desired point in the map and
choose menu item Start point Define demo mode.

Updating the navigation database


Information on updating the navigation database
must be requested from a ŠKODA partner, or refer
to the following ŠKODA websites.
▶ http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Manual online update
› In the navigation main menu, tap version information
Update (Online) Recall.
A menu for importing/updating the navigation data
and POI categories is displayed.
› Tap and select the desired menu item.
› Confirm the download.
Automatic online update
Infotainment automatically offers an update option if
the following conditions are met.
✓ The “Infotainment Online” online services are ac-
tivated.
✓ A data connection to the Internet is available,
with the quality allowing an online update.
✓ An update of the navigation database for the cur-
rent vehicle position or route destination is availa-
ble.
Starting and driving › Start at the push of a button 159

Starting and driving Starting issues


Start at the push of a button Troubleshooting

Notes on starting NOTICE


Danger of engine and catalyst damage!
DANGER ▶ Do not start the vehicle by towing.
Danger of poisoning by exhaust gases!
The engine does not start
▶ Do not run the engine in an enclosed space.
› Switch off the ignition.
Operating conditions › Wait 30 seconds and repeat the starting proce-
✓ The vehicle key is located in the vehicle interior. dure.
NOTICE › If the engine does not start, use the jump start ca-
Risk of key loss, possibly of key damage! bles with the battery of another vehicle » page 191
The system can detect the key even if it has been or seek the help of a specialist garage.
forgotten on the vehicle roof. The engine does not start, the display shows a
▶ Always keep the key with you. message regarding the immobilizer
Switching the ignition on and off › Use the other vehicle key.
› Press the starter button. › If the engine does not start, seek the help of a spe-
cialist garage.
Starting is not possible with the starter button, the
system did not detect the key

Starting the vehicle with manual transmission › Press the starter but-
› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake. ton with the key.
› Move the shift lever to the neutral position. › If the engine does not
start, seek the help of a
› Keep the clutch pedal depressed. specialist garage.
› Press the starter button.
Starting the vehicle with automatic transmission
› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
› Keep the brake pedal depressed.
› Move the selector lever to position or .
› Press the starter button. The key might not be detected if the battery in
After switching on the ignition on vehicles with the key is nearly discharged or the signal is faulty.
diesel engines, the indicator light - Preheating
The engine cannot be turned off with the starter
system illuminates. The engine starts after goes
button
out.
› Hold the starter button or press twice.
CAUTION
The radiator fan keeps running even after the en-
Danger of unexpected vehicle movement!
gine has stopped
▶ At temperatures below -10°C, start the vehicle
The radiator fan can continue to run for approxi-
with the selector lever in the position.
mately 10 minutes after the engine is stopped. This is
Stopping the engine not a defect.
› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake. The engine makes noises after the cold start
› Press the starter button. The increased running noise is due to the briefly in-
WARNING creased engine speed. This is not a defect.
Steering lock hazard!
During a journey with the engine stopped, the igni-
tion must always be switched on. START STOP
NOTICE Usage
Risk of engine overheating!
▶ Do not switch the engine off immediately at the The START STOP system reduces environmentally
end of your journey after the engine has been run- damaging emissions, including CO2, and saves fuel.
ning at high loads. Leave it to run at an idling speed
for about 1 minute.
160 Starting and driving › Automatic gearbox

If the system determine that the engine is not nee- When the system is deactivated, the symbol illu-
ded when the vehicle stops, it turns off the engine minates in the button.
and starts it again when moving off. If a system-related engine switch-off occurs and the
system is deactivated, the engine will start.
Functionality
Vehicle with manual transmission Troubleshooting
A system-related engine switch-off occurs when The engine does not switch off when stopping, or
stopping, when switching the gear lever into the it starts before starting up
neutral position, and when releasing the clutch pedal. The system has detected that the engine is running.
A system-related engine start occurs when the
clutch pedal is pressed down.
Vehicle with automatic transmission Operation
A system-related engine switch-off occurs when the
brake pedal is actuated and the engine is stopped. NOTICE
Danger of engine damage!
A system-related engine start occurs when the ac- ▶ Shift to a higher gear before reaching the red area
celerator pedal is pressed down. When the Auto on the tachometer scale.
Hold function is deactivated, a system-related en-
gine start occurs after releasing the brake pedal. NOTICE
Danger of gearbox damage!
Status display in the instrument cluster display ▶ Fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear.
Engine is switched off via the START-STOP ▶ When not shifting gear, do not put your hand on
system the shift lever.
Engine is not switched off via the START-STOP
Engaging reverse gear
system due to operating conditions that are
not met
› Stop the vehicle.
› Fully depress the clutch.
Display of detailed information in the infotainment › Move the shift lever to the neutral position.
screen
Vehicle status
› Push the shift lever down.
› Turn it completely to the left.
Or: › Wait briefly.
Vehicle status › Engage reverse gear.

Operating conditions Automatic gearbox


Some conditions are systemic and can neither be in- Lever positions
fluenced nor recognised. Therefore, the system may
react differently in situations which seem identical Parked vehicle
from the driver's perspective. The drive wheels are
The driver must fulfil the following conditions. locked.
✓ The driver's door is closed. Only set the posi-
tion when the vehi-
✓ The driver has fastened the seat belt.
cle is stationary.
✓ The driving speed was higher than 4 km.h after
Reverse gear
the last stop.
Only set the posi-
tion when the vehi-
Settings cle is stationary.
Neutral
Automatic activation There is no transmission of engine power to the
▶ Upon start-up of the engine. wheels.
▶ By selecting driving mode Eco » page 163, Opera- Forward drive / sports program
tion. The gear is changed automatically.
Deactivate/activate system Choose between and (spring-loaded posi-
› Press the button. tion)
Starting and driving › Automatic gearbox 161

In mode, the gear is changed at higher speeds Acceleration on startup (launch control)
than in mode. This function allows maximum acceleration during
startup.
Moving the selector lever out of the or position
lights up - the selector lever is locked › Select mode or manual shift mode.
› Disable the TCS » page 169.
› Press the brake pedal, › Keep the brake pedal depressed.
and at the same time, › Fully depress the accelerator.
press the button in the › Release the brake pedal.
selector lever.
The vehicle drives with maximum acceleration.
Manually switching gear with the selector lever
› To turn on, put the selector lever in the posi-
tion to the right (to the left for right-hand drive ve-
hicles).
› To turn off, put the selector lever back in the
WARNING position.
Risk of the stationary vehicle rolling away automati- + Changing up a gear
cally!
▶ When the selector lever is in the position, po- - Changing down a
sition or in manual shift mode, secure the vehicle gear
with the brake.

Operation
Starting up
› Keep the brake pedal depressed.
› Start the engine. Manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
the steering wheel
› Press the button in the selector lever and set it to
the desired position. Changing down a
-
› Release the brake pedal and accelerate. gear
+ Changing up a gear
Speeding up while driving (kick-down)
› Fully depress the accelerator. › To switch on the rock-
Stopping temporarily (e.g. at a junction) er switch, press - or
› Leave the selector lever in the position and se- +.
cure the vehicle with the brake pedal.
› To Turn off the rocker
Stopping switch, hold + .
› Keep the brake pedal depressed. If none of the shift pad-
› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake. dles are pressed for a certain time, manual shift
› Press the button in the selector lever and set it to mode turns off automatically.
the position.
If the engine threatens to over-rev
› Turn off the engine. ▶ The gearbox automatically changes to the next
Driving in neutral higher gear.
If the system detects that no gear is engaged while ▶ The transmission prevents changing to the next
driving, it automatically switches to neutral position. lower gear.
in the instrument cluster lights up.
Requirements for driving in neutral position Troubleshooting
✓ Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is
pressed. The selector lever cannot be moved out of posi-
tion in the normal way
✓ Driving speed between 20-130 km/h.
✓ There is no device connected to the trailer sock-
› Unlock the lever like in an emergency » page 162.
et.
162 Starting and driving › Vehicle driving mode

Gearbox overheated › Press on the plastic


or illuminates part in the direction of
Message regarding the gearbox overheating the arrow and at the
same time press the
› You may continue driving, exercising appropriate button on the selector
caution.
lever.
or illuminates › Put the selector lever
Message regarding the gearbox overheating in position.
› Stop driving! Stop the vehicle and stop the engine.
› After the indicator light goes out, your journey can
continue.
› If the warning light does not go out, stop driving!
Seek the help of a specialist garage. Vehicle driving mode
Gearbox impaired Usage
or illuminates
The driving mode offers the possibility of adapting
Message regarding the gearbox in emergency
the driving behaviour to the desired driving style.
mode
› You may continue driving, exercising appropriate
caution. Overview
› Immediately seek the help of a specialist garage. Information about the selected driving mode is dis-
or illuminates played in the status bar in the Infotainment screen as
Message regarding a gearbox fault well as in the digital instrument cluster.
› Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage. Eco mode
Starting up a vehicle that is stuck Eco mode is suitable for a relaxed driving style and
› Adjust the selector lever between and . The helps to save fuel.
vehicle will then start to rock and be easier to free.
Comfort mode
Comfort mode is suitable for driving on roads with
Selector lever emergency unlocking poorer surface or for long motorway journeys.
› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake.
Normal mode
› Open the stowage compartment in the front cen-
tre console. Normal mode is suitable for a normal driving style.
› Insert a flat-head Sports mode
screwdriver or push a
similar tool into the Sport mode is suitable for a sporty driving style.
gap in the area of ar-
row A . Individual mode
› Carefully loosen and Individual mode allows the individual configuration of
lift the quadrant cover. certain vehicle systems.

Offroad mode
Off-road mode is suitable for driving on non-paved
roads. But even with Offroad mode switched on,
your vehicle is never a true SUV.
The following brake and stabilisation systems
change in Offroad mode.
▶ ESC.
▶ TCS.
▶ EDL.
▶ ABS.
Starting and driving › Economical driving style 163

When Offroad mode is switched on, is lit up, ▶ Remove the roof rack when it is not needed.
and in the Instrument cluster ▶ Switch on electric consumers for as long as neces-
sary.
▶ Do not leave the windows open while driving.
Operation
Display of evaluation in the infotainment screen
Select driving mode DriveGreen
› Press the button. Or:
In the Infotainment, a driving mode menu appears.
Drive Green

A Information on the system settings of the cur-


A A driving liquid display
rently selected mode/system settings for the se-
lected Individual mode With the driving is fluid, the display is located
near the green dot.
B Driving mode menu
B Leaf
› Tap the relevant function surface B. The greener the leaf, the more economic the
driving style. Tapping the screen near the leaf
Or:
displays tips for reducing fuel consumption and
› Press the button again. energy consumption.
C Driving efficiency chart
Troubleshooting Each bar indicates driving efficiency in 5 second
increments. The current bar is on the left. The
Adaptive DCC suspension faulty higher the green bars, the more economical the
or illuminates driving style.
› Drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek D Point value (0-100)
the help of a specialist garage. The higher the indicated value, the more eco-
nomical the driving style. Tapping the screen
near the value D displays a rating for the last 30
Economical driving style minutes of driving.
E Average fuel consumption
Tips for economical driving and evaluation of
driving economy Tapping the screen near the value E displays the
average fuel consumption during the last 30 mi-
Tips for economical driving nutes of driving.
▶ Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. F Information about the current driving style
▶ Observe the recommended gear » page 58, Display
▶ Economical driving style
overview and overview of the menu items in the
main menu. ▶ The speed has a negative effect on fuel con-
sumption
▶ Avoid full throttle and too high speeds.
▶ Avoid engine idling during longer periods of sta-
▶ The ride is not smooth
tionary time. ▶ Recommended gear
▶ Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is sta-
In Infotainment it is possible to display up to
tionary. If possible, start your journey as soon as
three consumers that are currently making up the
the engine starts.
largest share of fuel consumption.
▶ Observe the prescribed tyre pressure » page 200,
Comfort users
Sticker with prescribed tyre pressures. Or:
▶ Remove unnecessary ballast. Comfort users
164 Starting and driving › Towing a trailer

Consumption-friendly driving the load in the trailer. The coupled trailer increases
In the following situations, a small reduction in fuel the rear axle load and can therefore reduce the
consumption occurs. in the instrument cluster payload.
lights up. ▶ Adjust the headlight range of the headlights ac-
▶ Active cylinder management has temporarily disa- cording to the load status of the vehicle. The front
bled some cylinders in the engine (applies to cer- of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer is being
tain engine types). towed and the headlights may dazzle other road
A vehicle with automatic transmission, rolls in neu- users.

tral position. ▶ A speed of 100 km/h should not be exceeded.
▶ Reduce the speed by releasing the accelerator
pedal as soon as a pendulum movement of the
Towing a trailer trailer is noticeable. Never attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying by accelerating.
What you should be mindful of ▶ If the traffic area behind the trailer can not be
WARNING viewed, install additional exterior mirrors.
When driving with a trailer, special care is required! ▶ Apply the brakes in good time. If the trailer is fitted
with a trailer brake, apply the brakes gently at first,
NOTICE then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts result-
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loa- ing from the trailer wheels locking.
ded so this must also be checked between service
▶ Select a lower gear before descending to also use
intervals.
the braking force of the engine.
Recommendations for using a trailer
Distribution of the load over the vehicle and trailer
▶ Adjust the tyre pressure on the vehicle for full load.
combination
▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible total
▶ Secure heavy objects against slipping, as close to
weight of the vehicle and the combination weight the trailer axle as possible.
specified in the technical vehicle documentation
▶ Transport small and light objects in the luggage
(e.g. in the vehicle registration documentation, in
compartment.
the COC document) and on the type plate.
▶ For trailer operation, consider the current load con-
dition of the vehicle as well as the distribution of

Permitted trailer loads


The details in the technical vehicle documentation take precedence over the information in this Owner's Man-
ual.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
Do not exceed the permissible trailer load.

Engine type Transmission Permissible trailer load, Permissible trailer load, un-
braked (kg) a) braked (kg)
Superb Superb Com- Superb Superb Com-
bi bi
1.4 l/110 kW TSI Manual gear- 1600 1600 710 720
box
DSG b) 1600 1600 720 730
1.5 l/110 kW TSI Manual gear- - c) - c) - c) - c)
box
DSG b) - c) - c) - c) - c)
2.0 l/140 kW TSI DSG b) 1800 1800 750 750
2.0 l/162 kW TSI DSG b) 2000 2000 750 750
2.0 l/200 kW TSI DSG b) 4x4 2200 2200 750 750
2.0 l/206 kW TSI DSG b) 4x4 2200 2200 750 750
1.6 l/88 kW TDI CR DSG b) 1500 1500 750 750
Starting and driving › Towing eye and towing procedure 165

Engine type Transmission Permissible trailer load, Permissible trailer load, un-
braked (kg) a) braked (kg)
Superb Superb Com- Superb Superb Com-
bi bi
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR Manual gear- - c) - c) - c) - c)
box
DSG b) - c) - c) - c) - c)
2.0 l/130 kW TDI CR DSG b) 2000 2000 750 750
2.0 l/140 kW TDI CR DSG b) 2000 2000 750 750
DSG b) 4x4 2200 2200 750 750
a)
With gradients up to 12%.
b)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
c)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.

Towing eye and towing procedure › Insert the cover cap.


Towing eye
Towing the vehicle
Removing the front cap
› Press on the cap and WARNING
remove it. Risk of an accident!
▶ The tow rope must not be twisted.
▶ When towing, drive at a speed of max. 50 km/h.

Removing the rear cap


› Press on the cap and
remove it.

WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶ Use a braided synthetic fibre rope for towing. Do
not use a twisted tow rope.
NOTICE
▶ Always keep the tow rope taut during the towing
procedure.
Installing the towing eye ▶ Do not exceed a towing distance of 50 km.
› Screw in the towing NOTICE
eye. Danger of gearbox damage!
› Insert the wheel ▶ If the gearbox no longer contains any oil, the vehi-
wrench or similar ob- cle must only be towed with the front axle raised
ject through the tow- clear of the ground or transported on a special
ing eye. breakdown vehicle.
› Tighten the towing ▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be
eye. towed with the rear axle raised.
Where should the tow rope or the tow bar be se-
cured?
After the towing process
▶ At the front towing eye.
› Unscrew the towing eye.
166 Starting and driving › Brakes

▶ At the rear towing eye. If the brake fluid level is too low, this will be indica-
▶ On the ball bar of the factory-installed towing ted in the instrument cluster by the illumination of
hitch. . Nevertheless, we recommend checking the
brake fluid level regularly directly at the reservoir.
Information for the driver of the towing vehicle
› Drive slowly and smoothly. Specification
› Only accelerate when the rope is taut. The brake fluid must comply with the standard VW
501 14 (this standard meets the requirements of the
Information for the driver of the towed vehicle standard FMVSS 116 DOT4).
WARNING Have the brake fluid replaced by a specialist garage.
Risk of an accident!
When the ignition is switched off, the brake booster WARNING
and the power steering do not work. In addition, Danger of brake failure!
there is a risk that the steering lock will engage. ▶ If the brake fluid change date is exceeded, heavy
▶ If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on braking may cause vapour bubbles to form in the
the ignition! brake system.
▶ If the fluid level falls significantly within a short
› Move the shift lever to the neutral position or the
selector lever to the position. time or drops below the mark , the brake sys-
tem may have become leaky.
Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Brakes
What you should be mindful of Troubleshooting
WARNING Brake fluid level is too low
Problems and faults with the brake system can ex- illuminates
tend the braking distance of the vehicle!
› Do not drive the vehicle! Seek the help of a
DANGER specialist garage.
Danger of a functional restriction of the brake boos-
ter! Brake system and anti-lock braking system faulty
▶ When braking in a vehicle with manual transmis- illuminates together with
sion, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs, › Do not drive the vehicle! Seek the help of a
depress the clutch pedal. specialist garage.
DANGER
Danger of the brakes overheating! Worn brake pads
▶ Do not depress the brake pedal unless braking is illuminates
required. › Drive to a specialist garage, exercising ap-
▶ If the standard front spoiler is damaged, ensure the propriate caution.
air supply to the front brakes is guaranteed.
Reduced braking effect
Damp, frozen, salt-affected or corroded brakes can
Checking the brake fluid level impair the braking effect.

Test conditions › Clean the brakes by braking several times if traffic


✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface. conditions allow it.
✓ Engine turned off. When the engine is stopped, the brake booster
does not work
Checking
› Depress the brake pedal more forcefully.
The fill level must be
within the marked range.
› If the level is below the Electric parking brake
mark , do not con-
Operation
tinue.
› Do not refill liquid. WARNING
› Seek the help of a spe- Danger of key locking!
cialist garage. The recessed grip for the fingers in front of the but-
ton must remain empty.
Starting and driving › Auto Hold automatic holding function 167

Switching on Emergency braking in case of faulty brake


› Pull the button and system
hold it.
Switching on
The following symbols
light up.
› Pull the button and
hold it.
▶ in the button.
The vehicle starts to
▶ in the instrument brake sharply and an
cluster. acoustic signal is soun-
ded.

Automatic shut-off
The parking brake switches off automatically when
starting up.
Switching off
If automatic switch-off is to be prevented, e.g. when
starting off on a slope, keep the button pulled.
› Release the button .
Or:
Conditions for automatic shutting down
✓ The driver's door is closed. › Depress the accelerator pedal.
✓ The driver has fastened the seat belt.
Manual shut-down Auto Hold automatic holding function
› Press the brake pedal Usage
and at the same time,
press the button. Auto Hold automatically secures the vehicle from
rolling away when stopped.

Functionality
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
Auto Hold is not able to stop the vehicle under all cir-
cumstances, such as on slippery ground, or on gradi-
ents.
Troubleshooting
Secure and release the vehicle
Parking brake error With Stop, the vehicle is automatically secured us-
illuminates ing Auto Hold. in the instrument cluster lights up.
Message regarding a parking brake error With Start, the vehicle is automatically released us-
ing Auto Hold.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Automatic protection from the parking brake
Parking on a steep slope
Under certain circumstances, the vehicle can be se-
illuminates
cured using the parking brake. in the instrument
Notification regarding parking position on a steep cluster lights up.
slope
› Go to another parking spot where there is less of a Operating conditions
slope.
Noise when using the parking brake ✓ The driver's door is closed.
Noise when using the parking brake is normal. This is ✓ The engine is running or has been switched off by
not a defect. the START-STOP system.
✓ Auto Hold is activated.
The vehicle battery is discharged, the parking
brake cannot be switched off ✓ On vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the selec-
› Connect the vehicle battery to a power source, tor lever is not in mode.
such as the battery of another vehicle.
168 Driver assist systems › Braking and stabilising systems

Settings Driver assist systems


Activation/deactivation
Braking and stabilising systems
› Press the button.
Activation displayed in the button by the illumina- Overview
tion of the symbol.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
NOTICE ESC helps to stabilize the vehicle in borderline situa-
Disable Auto Hold to allow the vehicle to roll if nec- tions (e.g. when the vehicle starts to skid). ESC
essary when driving through a car wash. brakes the individual wheels to maintain the direc-
tion of travel.
flashing - ESC is engaged

ESC Sport
ESC Sport allows for a sportier driving style.
lit up - ESC Sport is activated

Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)


ASR helps to stabilize the vehicle when accelerating
or driving on low-grip roads. ASR reduces the drive
power transmitted to the wheels when the wheels
spin.
flashing - ASR is engaged

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)


ABS helps maintain control of the vehicle during
emergency braking. An ABS intervention is noticea-
ble by pulsating movements of the brake pedal.
Motor Slip Regulation (MSR)
MSR helps to keep control the vehicle when down-
shifting or abruptly decelerating, e.g. on an icy road
surface. If the drive wheels lock, MSR increases the
engine speed. As a result, the braking effect of the
engine is reduced and the wheels can turn freely
again.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL)
EDL helps to stabilize the vehicle when driving on
road surfaces with different grip under the individual
wheels. EDL brakes a spinning wheel and transmits
power to a different drive wheel.
Electronic Differential Lock (XDL+)
XDL + helps to stabilize the vehicle during fast cor-
nering by braking the inside wheel of the driven axle.
Active steering assistance (DSR)
In difficult situations, the DSR provides the driver
with a steering recommendation in order to stabilise
the vehicle.
Hill Hold Control
Hill Hold Control helps when starting off on uphill
gradients by braking the vehicle for about 2 seconds
after the brake pedal is released.
Operating conditions
✓ The gradient is at least 5%.
Driver assist systems › Front Assist 169

✓ The driver's door is closed. goes out when deactivated.


Multi-Collision Brake (MCB)
MCB helps to decelerate and stabilize the vehicle af- Troubleshooting
ter a collision with an obstacle. This reduces the risk
of further collisions. ESC or ASR faulty/deactivated by the system
Operating conditions illuminates
✓ There has been a frontal, side and rear collision of › Stop the engine and start again.
a certain severity. › If the indicator light does not go out after covering
✓ The impact speed was greater than 10 km/h. a short distance, seek the help of a specialist ga-
✓ The brakes, ESC and other required systems re- rage.
mained functional after the impact.
✓ The accelerator pedal is not pressed. ABS faulty
illuminates
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)
TSA helps to stabilize the trailer. As the trailer begins
› You may continue driving, exercising appro-
priate caution. Seek the help of a specialist garage.
to lurch, TSA stabilizes the trailer by slowing down
the individual vehicle wheels. Brake system and anti-lock braking system faulty
Operating conditions illuminates together with
✓ The hitch was supplied from the factory or pur-
chased from ŠKODA Genuine Accessories.
› Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist ga-
rage.
✓ The trailer is connected to the trailer socket.
✓ ASR activated.
✓ The driving speed is higher than 60 km/h. Front Assist
Functionality
Settings
Front Assist monitors the distance to the vehicle
Deactivating/activating ASR ahead and points out when the safety distance is ex-
› Press the button. ceeded. In borderline situations, it helps to avoid a
Or: collision by braking interventions.
› In Infotainment, select the following menu. Status display in the instrument cluster display
- Safety distance too small

Or:
or - Warning in case of collision

When deactivating lights up in the instrument Automatic braking if there is a risk of a collision
cluster. If there is a risk of a collision, the following symbol
goes out on renewed activation. or is displayed as a warning. If you do not re-
spond to the warning, the vehicle will slow down.
Deactivating the ASR may be helpful in the following
situations. At a driving speed of up to 45 km / h, the vehicle is
braked without prior warning.
▶ Driving with snow chains.
▶ Driving in deep snow or on very loose ground.
Automatic braking can be stopped by pressing the
accelerator pedal or by a steering intervention.
▶ Starting up a vehicle that is stuck.
With automatic braking, the pressure in the brake
Activate/deactivate ESC Sport system increases. The brake pedal can not be oper-
› Keep the key pressed down. ated by using the pedal as normal.
Or:
WARNING
› In Infotainment, select the following menu. Risk of an accident!
Front Assist does not respond to crossing or oncom-
ing vehicles.
Or:

When activated, lights up in the instrument clus-


Operating conditions
ter. ✓ ASR activated.
170 Driver assist systems › Pedestrian detection system

✓ The driving speed is higher than 5 km/h. Pedestrian detection system


Functionality
Function restriction
Pedestrian recognition helps to prevent a collision
The function may be restricted or unavailable in the with crossing pedestrians by enabling automatic
following cases. braking interventions.
▶ About 30 seconds after starting. Status display in the instrument cluster display
▶ When driving around a sharp bend. or - Risk of collision
▶ During an ESC intervention.
Risk of collision in a speed range of 5-30 km/h
The system triggers automatic braking.
Settings
Risk of collision in a speed range of 30-60 km/h
Automatic activation The system warns of a collision hazard first. If the
Front Assist is automatically activated when the igni- driver does not respond, the vehicle is automatically
tion is switched on. braked.
Activation/deactivation in the instrument cluster
In the display in the Assist systems menu item
Operating conditions
Activation / deactivation and setting in Infotain-
ment ✓ Front Assist activated.
In the following menu. ✓ Driving speed between 5-60 km/h.

Or: Speed limiter


Functionality
Show system deactivation in the display of the in-
strument cluster The speed limiter controls the maximum driving
or - Front Assist is deactivated speed according to the set speed limit.
If the limit is exceeded when driving downhill, brake
Deactivate Front Assist when handling the vehi- the vehicle with the brake pedal.
cle on a truck, a car ferry etc. Status display in the instrument cluster display
- Speed limiter is activated

Troubleshooting
When the control starts, is highlighted and the
Front Assist is not available set limit is displayed.
› Clean the front radar sensor. illuminated - Control is active
› Stop the engine and start again. flashing - the set limit is exceeded
› If Front Assist is still unavailable, check the brake
lights on the vehicle or on the attached trailer.
Operating conditions
› Replace the defective bulb.
› If the brake lights are working and Front Assist is ✓ The driving speed is higher than 30 km/h.
still unavailable, seek the help of a specialist ga-
rage.
There was an unfounded warning or system inter-
vention
› Clean the front radar sensor.
› If the system is not working properly, disable Front
Assist and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Driver assist systems › Cruise control system 171

Operation Resume control1)/Increase limit in steps of 1


km/h (sprung position)
Variant with GRA
Interrupt control (sprung position)
Deactivate the limiter
Increase limit in steps of 10 km/h
Decrease limit in steps of 10 km/h
Start control/Reduce limit in steps of 1 km/h

Limit exceeded
› Fully depress the accelerator.
Control will continue as soon as the vehicle has de-
celerated to below the set limit.
A Activate GRA (condition for the subsequent
activation of the limiter).
To Enable speed limiter, press the key D and in Troubleshooting
the instrument cluster choose the menu item
Geschw.begr.. Speed limiter faulty
illuminates
Deactivate limiter
Interrupt control (sprung position)
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
B Resume control1)/Increase limit
C Start control with current speed/Reduce Cruise control system
limit
Functionality
D Show menu of assist systems - Possibility of
switching between GRA and speed limiter The cruise control system maintains the set speed
Switching to GRA interrupts the control. without the accelerator pedal having to be operated.
However, this is only done to the extent permitted
Adjusting the speed limit with the buttons B and by engine performance or engine braking.
C
WARNING
By pressing in steps of 1 km/h.
Risk of the cruise control system starting uninten-
By holding in steps of 10 km/h. tionally!
▶ Deactivate cruise control after use.
Variant with ACC
Status display in the instrument cluster display
- the cruise control system is activated

- cruise control is active


When cruise control starts, the set speed is
displayed.

Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is higher than 20 km/h.

Activate ACC (condition for the subsequent


activation of the limiter). To enable the speed
limiter, press the key and in the instru-
ment cluster choose the menu item Geschw.begr..

1) If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
172 Driver assist systems › Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Operation ACC is intended primarily for use on motorways.

Operating with the lever Speed range


Depending on the equipment, ACC allows a speed
setting in the range of 30-160 or 30-210 km/h.
If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/h
on vehicles with an automatic transmission, the
speed is automatically increased to 30 km/h or con-
trolled according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Distance level
The distance from the vehicle ahead can be adjusted
in the range from 1 to 3.6 s in five different levels.
Automatic stop and start
A Activate cruise control (cruise control deacti- A vehicle with an automatic transmission can be de-
vated) celerated to a stop using the ACC and start moving
Deactivate cruise control again. Control is disconnected in case of longer hold-
Interrupt control (sprung position) ing periods.
B Resume cruise control1)/Increase speed › To resume control, depress the accelerator pedal
or move the lever into position .
C Start control with current speed/Reduce
limit Overtaking
If your vehicle changes to the fast lane and no vehi-
D Show menu of assist systems - Possibility of cle is detected in front, ACC accelerates up to the
switching between GRA and speed limiter set speed.
Accelerate temporarily Status display in the instrument cluster display
› Depress the accelerator pedal. - ACC is activated
After you release the accelerator, the speed drops to
the previously stored value. Depending on the equipment:
Interrupting cruise control or along with - Control is active
▶ After pressing the brake pedal. When the control starts, the set speed is dis-
▶ After an ESC intervention.
played.
- ACC controls the driving speed according to
the permissible speed
Troubleshooting
- ACC controls the driving speed according to
Cruise control system faulty the road
illuminates - ACC does not decelerate sufficiently
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. › Depress the brake pedal.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)


Functionality
Control
ACC maintains the set speed. When your vehicle ap-
proaches the vehicle in front, ACC will automatically
start to maintain the set distance to this vehicle.
Maintaining the set speed and the distance will here-
inafter be referred to as Control.
WARNING
ACC does not respond to stationary objects or to
crossing or oncoming objects.

1) If no speed is set, the current speed is adopted.


Driver assist systems › Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 173

Operation Interrupting cruise control


▶ After pressing the brake pedal.
Operating with the lever
▶ By operating the clutch pedal for a long time.
▶ After an ESC intervention.
▶ After deactivation of the ASR.

Resuming control
› If a speed is stored, move the lever to the sprung
position .
The vehicle is controlled at the set speed. The set
speed is shown in the instrument cluster display.

Function restriction
WARNING
▶ Be particularly attentive and alert in the following
situations.
Activate ACC (control inactive) Regulation according to the vehicle in the adjacent
Start or resume control/Increase speed in lane
steps of 1 km/h (sprung position) If your vehicle is moving faster than the vehicle in
the next lane on the driver's side, at a speed of more
Interrupt control (sprung position) than 80 km/h, this may cause your vehicle to be con-
Deactivate ACC trolled according to that vehicle.
Increase speed in steps of 10 km/h When cornering
Reduce speed in steps of 10 km/h
Set distance level
Start control/Reduce speed in steps of 1
km/h

Starting control with the current speed


› Tap on .
Or:
› If no speed is saved, move the lever to the sprung
position . When cornering, a vehicle in the next lane may enter
Set distance level the detected area. Your vehicle will be controlled ac-
› Move the switch to the sprung position cording to this vehicle.
or . Narrow or staggered vehicle
Line A appears in the
display, indicating the
change in distance.
› Use the switch
to set the desired dis-
tance level.

For temporary acceleration ACC detects a narrow or staggered vehicle only


› Depress the accelerator pedal. when it is in the area covered by the radar.
The vehicle accelerates and control is temporarily in-
terrupted. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is
resumed.
174 Driver assist systems › Lane Assist

Lane change by another vehicle Troubleshooting


ACC not available
or is lit up
› Stop the engine and start again.
› If ACC is still unavailable, check the brake lights on
the vehicle or on the attached trailer.
› Replace the defective bulb.
› If the brake lights are working and ACC is still un-
available, seek the help of a specialist garage.

A vehicle that changes to the lane a short distance


away may not be recognized by the ACC in time. Lane Assist
Stationary vehicle Usage
Lane Assist helps to keep the vehicle within the lane.
It is based on the boundaries of a lane. These may in-
clude lane markings, road edges or objects such as
curbs or possibly traffic cones.
The system is intended primarily for use on high-
ways.

Functionality
If a vehicle in front turns and there is a stationary ve- As the vehicle approaches a lane marking, the sys-
hicle in front of this vehicle, the ACC will not respond tem executes a steering movement in the opposite
to the stationary vehicle. direction from the lane marking. The steering inter-
Vehicles with special load or special bodies vention can be overridden manually.
A load or superstructure that protrudes outside the No system intervention occurs when changing lane
vehicle might not be detected by the ACC. with the turn signal on.
Status display in the instrument cluster display
Settings lights up - System is activated and ready to
intervene
In Infotainment, in the following menu. lights up - System is activated and ready to
intervene
Or: lights up - System intervenes

lights up - System intervenes


◼ ACC (Automatic cruise control)
▶ Driving programme: - Setting the vehicle acceleration Adaptive lane guidance functionality
when the ACC is switched on (this setting is This function keeps the driver within the selected
made for vehicles with driving mode selec- position within the lane. or lights up in the in-
tion » page 163) strument cluster display.
▶ Last selected distance - Switch the last selected dis-
tance level on/off
▶ Distance: - Setting the distance to vehicles in front
▶ Take account of the road profile - switch the cruise control
on/off according to the road profile (e.g. reduce
speed before a bend)
▶ Take account of permissible speed - Switch the speed con-
trol on/off according to the permissible speed
Driver assist systems › Traffic jam assistant 175

Display Setting in Infotainment


Lane boundary highligh- In the following menu.
ted on the right: system
intervenes on the right Or:
when approaching the
lane marking.

Troubleshooting
Message regarding system unavailability
› Clean the windscreen in the sensor area.
Both lane boundaries are › Stop the engine and start again.
highlighted: adaptive › If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
lane guidance takes specialist garage.
place.

Traffic jam assistant


Functionality
The traffic jam assist system helps to keep the vehi-
cle within the lane. At the same time, it maintains the
Warning through steering wheel vibrations distance from the vehicle in front.
If the steering wheel vibrates, this means the system
The system is intended primarily for use on high-
is unable to keep the vehicle in the lane.
ways.
› Correct the steering movement. The traffic jam assist system uses the functions of
the automatic gearbox, the Lane Assist and the ACC.
Operating conditions WARNING
Risk of an accident!
✓ The driving speed is higher than 60 km/h. ▶ Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and
✓ The lane markings are clearly visible. be ready to take over the steering.
▶ The notes in the functional description of Lane As-
sist and ACC are to be taken into account.
Function restriction
The system function may be restricted in the follow-
ing cases. Operating conditions
▶ The field of view of the sensor is limited by a dirty ✓ Lane Assist with adaptive guidance is activated
screen or an obstacle or a preceding vehicle. and the boundary lines of the traffic lane are rec-
▶ In the event of unfavourable weather conditions. ognised.
▶ When driving around a sharp bend. ✓ ACC is activated and speed is regulated.
▶ When driving on a steep road or in ruts. ✓ The driving speed is lower than 60 km/h.
▶ Driving lane too narrow.
WARNING Lane change assist system Side Assist
Danger of incorrect steering intervention!
Certain objects or markings on the road may be erro- Usage
neously recognized as lane markings.
Side Assist monitors the area beside and behind the
▶ Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and
vehicle up to a distance of approximately 70 m.
be prepared to override the steering intervention.
The system uses optical signals in the exterior mirror
to alert the driver to vehicles that could be danger-
Settings ous when changing lanes.

Activation/deactivation in the instrument cluster


In the display in the Assist systems menu item
176 Driver assist systems › Traffic sign recognition

Functionality The system can draw attention to objects along the


road, such as high guard rails or noise barriers.
The system warns of an approaching vehicle through
The system might not warn of a vehicle e.g. in the
the illumination of the indicator light in the exteri-
following cases, or a warning may only be issued in-
or mirror cover on the vehicle side where the vehicle
correctly.
is detected.
▶ Unfavourable weather conditions.
Driving situations in which a system warning oc-
▶ A very fast approaching vehicle.
curs
▶ When going round a sharp bend or a roundabout.

Settings
The system settings are made in the display of the
instrument cluster in menu item Assist Systems.
The system settings are made in the infotainment
system in the following menu.

Or:
Your vehicle is overtaken by vehicle A . The faster
vehicle A approaches, the sooner the warning is giv-
en by the indicator light.
Vehicle B is overtaken by your vehicle at a speed Troubleshooting
that is faster by max. 10 km/h. If the speed increases
the overtaking process, no warning will be provided Message regarding system unavailability
by the indicator light. › Stop the engine and start again.
› If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
Indicator light specialist garage.
illuminated - There is another vehicle behind your
vehicle
flashing - There is another vehicle behind your ve- Traffic sign recognition
hicle, and the turn signal on the same side is switch-
ed on Usage
For vehicles with Lane Assist, the indicator light will The road sign recognition shows road signs in the
also flash if your vehicle crosses the lane markings in display of the instrument cluster. This also indicates
the direction of the approaching vehicle. The system exceeding the speed limit.
will trigger a steering wheel vibration in this case.
For this, Lane Assist must be activated and the lane
Functionality
marking between the vehicles must be detected.
Displayed road signs
▶ Speed limit.
Operating conditions ▶ Overtaking prohibited.
✓ The driving speed is higher than 15 km/h. ▶ Driving bans – one-way traffic.
✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock- ▶ Additional characters, e.g. speed limit in wet condi-
et. tions.
WARNING
Road signs on the road always have priority over the
Function restriction road signs shown on the display.
The system cannot detect lane width. For this rea- Towing a trailer
son, it may, for example, draw attention to a vehicle If a trailer or other accessory is connected to the
in a distant lane in the following cases. trailer socket, trailer-relevant road signs are also dis-
▶ Driving on a road with narrow lanes or on the lane played.
edge. Driving on roads without speed limits
▶ Driving round bends. If you are on a road with no speed limits, the road
signs will appear in the display.
Driver assist systems › Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant protection 177

Example of road sign display ▶ Use for route calculation - Activation/deactivation taking
trailers in account for route calculation in naviga-
tion
▶ Maximum speed for trailer - Set the top speed for towing
a trailer

Example of additional characters


Example of several simultaneously rec- Crew Protect Assist proactive occupant
ognised road signs. protection
Usage

Speed units The Crew Protect Assist system increases occupant


The speed indications in the road signs shown refer protection in the front seats if a collision is imminent.
to the speed units that are common in the country.
For example, the display may refer to 30 km/h or Functionality
30 mph depending on the country.
The first level of protection
With a dynamic driving style, the system tightens
Restriction the front seat belts on the body.

The system function may be restricted in the follow- The second level of protection
ing cases. If the system evaluates the situation as critical:
▶ The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traf- ▶ The front seat belts are tightened on the body.
fic. ▶ Open windows are closed except for a small gap.
▶ The field of view of the sensor is limited by an ob- ▶ The sliding/tilting roof is closed.
stacle or a preceding vehicle.
▶ In the event of unfavourable weather conditions.
At high speeds.
Settings

▶ The road signs are hidden, damaged, or are non- Automatic activation
standard. The system is automatically activated when the igni-
▶ The road signs are attached to flashing neon signs. tion is switched on.
▶ Non-current or unavailable map documents for the Deactivation of the first protection level
navigation. The first protection level can be deactivated as fol-
lows.
Settings ▶ By activating ESC Sport.
▶ By deactivating the ASR.
In Infotainment, in the following menu.
▶ By selecting the driving mode Sport.
▶ By selecting the driving mode Offroad.
Or: ▶ In Infotainment, in the following menu.

◼ Road Sign Recognition Or:


▶ Show in instrument cluster - Activation/deactivation of
the additional road signs in the display of the in-
strument cluster
▶ Speed warning: - Configures a warning when the Troubleshooting
speed limit is exceeded
Crew Protect Assist faulty
▶ Warning for exceeding - Increases the speed limit for the
illuminates
warning when exceeding the permitted speed Message concerning unavailability or function-
◼ Trailer recognition al restriction
▶ Show road signs relevant to trailers – Activation/deactivation › Seek the help of a specialist garage.
of the display of road signs relevant to trailers
178 Driver assist systems › Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant

Driver Alert fatigue detection assistant ▶ If, after repeated warnings, the driver does not
take over the steering, the hazard warning lights
Functionality are switched on and the vehicle automatically
brakes.
Driver Alert evaluates the steering behaviour. If it de-
tects fatigue in the driver, a break is recommended. Depending on the equipment:
In the display of the instrument cluster, the lights If possible, taking into account the driving situation
up. and if the following conditions are met, the vehicle
drives to the roadside before braking.
WARNING ✓ The width of the road is sufficient.
There will be no system warning during the so-called
✓ The roadside is limited by crash barriers.
micro-sleep.
Resetting the break recommendation ▶ After the vehicle has come to a standstill, the park-
The break recommendation is reset in the following ing brake is switched on.
cases. Interruption of automatic braking
▶ The vehicle stops and the ignition is switched off. ▶ By pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.

▶ The vehicle stops, the seat belt is removed and the ▶ By actively steering.
driver's door is opened.
▶ The vehicle stops for more than 15 minutes.
Operating conditions
In some situations, the system may erroneously
issue a break recommendation. ✓ Lane Assist is activated and the boundary lines of
the traffic lane are recognised.
✓ ACC is activated and maintains the set speed.
Operating conditions
✓ Driving speed between 60-200 km/h. Hill descent assistant
Functionality
Settings
The hill descent assist system helps to keep a con-
Activation/deactivation stant speed when driving downhill by undertaking
In Infotainment, in the following menu. automatic braking interventions.
The system also works when driving in neutral or
Or: when the reverse gear is engaged.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
The assist system cannot properly fulfil its function
Emergency situation assist on slushy soil due to physical reasons (e.g. ice or
mud).
systemEmergency Assist
Status display in the instrument cluster display
Usage lit up in grey - the system is activated
The assistant for emergencies detects inactivity of lit up in white - the system intervenes
the driver, which, for example, can be caused by a
sudden loss of consciousness. The system then per- Alter the speed
forms measures as safely as possible to decelerate The driving speed can be changed by pressing the
the vehicle to a stop. brake or accelerator pedal. After releasing the pedal,
the assist system maintains the current speed.
The assist systems are only available for vehicles
with an automatic gearbox.
Operating conditions
Functionality ✓ The engine is running.
✓ Offroad mode is enabled.
When the assist system detects inactivity on the
✓ The gradient is at least 10%.
part of the driver
▶ An acoustic warning signal sounds and a message ✓ Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is
appears in the instrument cluster display. pressed.
✓ The vehicle speed is a max. 30 km/h.
Park Assist systems › Park Pilot parking aid 179

Settings Park Assist systems


Automatic activation
Park Pilot parking aid
The system will be automatically activated when you
turn on Offroad mode. Functionality
Activation/deactivation in Infotainment If an obstacle is detected, the Infotainment will dis-
The system is activated or deactivated in the follow- play a visible message and an audible signal will
ing menu. sound. The interval between the signals becomes
shorter as the clearance is reduced. At a distance of
less than 30 cm from the obstacle, a continuous tone
Or:
sounds.
If the driver does not respond to the warning, the
system triggers automatic emergency braking at
speeds below 8 km/h in order to reduce the impact.
Automatic braking can be activated and deactivated
in the infotainment.

Display
The recorded areas vary according to the equipment.

A Route controlled at the current steering angle


Acoustic signals on/off
One-time deactivation/activation of automatic
braking
Change to the rear view camera display
System fault

Obstacle at a distance of less than 30 cm


Obstacle at a distance of more than 30 cm
Obstacle outside the route

Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is lower than 15 km/h.
✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-
et.

Operation
Switching on
› Engage reverse gear.
Or:
180 Park Assist systems › Rear view camera

› Press the button. Rear view camera


Automatic switch-on during forward travel Functionality
When approaching an obstacle at a speed of less
than 10 km/h. When reversing, the area behind the vehicle is dis-
Automatic switch-on does not activate automatic played in the Infotainment screen complete with ori-
braking. entation lines.

Switching off The camera is equipped with a cleaning system.


› Disengage reverse gear. Cleaning takes place automatically when the rear
window is washed.
Or:
The camera is equipped with a cleaning system.
› Press the button.
Cleaning takes place automatically when the rear or
Automatic switch off front window is washed.
The driving speed is higher than 15 km/h.

Orientation lines and functional surfaces


Function restriction
Orientation lines
The system might not warn of an obstacle e.g. in the
following cases, or a warning may only be issued in-
correctly.
▶ Unfavourable weather conditions.
▶ The detected obstacles are moving.
▶ Sensor signals are not reflected by the surface of
the obstacles.
▶ It is a small obstacle, e.g. a stone or a pillar.

A Distance about 40 cm
Settings
B Distance about 100 cm
The system settings are made in the infotainment
C Distance about 200 cm
system in the following menu.
D The lane lines terminate approximately 300 cm
behind the vehicle. The lines indicate the track,
Or: which is controlled at the current steering angle.

The distance between the side lines corresponds ap-


proximately to the vehicle width including mirrors.
Troubleshooting Function surfaces
After switching on, an audible signal sounds for 3
seconds and there is no obstacle near the vehicle
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
After switching on, the symbol flashes in the
button
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
After switching on, not all scanned areas are dis-
played on the Infotainment screen
› Move the vehicle a few meters forwards or back-
wards. A Mode for transverse parking
› If the scanned areas are still not displayed, seek the B Mode for parallel parking
help of a specialist garage. C Mode for driving up to a trailer/distance moni-
toring
D Mode for monitoring the area behind the vehicle
(wide view)
Park Assist systems › Rear view camera 181

E Brightness, contrast and colour settings of the › Hold the steering


screen wheel in the adjusted
position and reverse.
F Parking Assist View
Switch the view on / off
› Stop the vehicle if the
green line overlaps
Full Screen with the lateral boun-
Switch audible parking signals on/off dary of the parking
space (e.g. the curb) or
if is displayed.
Operating conditions › Countersteer until the
yellow lane line crosses
✓ The ignition is switched on. the red line for the required lane orientation.
✓ The driving speed is lower than 15 km/h.
› Hold the steering wheel in the adjusted position
and reverse.
Operation › Stop the vehicle at a safe distance from the obsta-
cle or when is displayed.
Switch on the system
Mode for driving up to a trailer/distance monitor-
› Engage reverse gear. ing
Or: The screen shows the area behind the vehicle in plan
› Press the button. view.
When switching on, an alarm sounds and the symbol On vehicles with a factory fitted tow-bar, this mode
lights up in the button. assists the driver when the vehicle is approaching a
trailer draw bar. A line for approaching the trailer
Mode for transverse parking draw bar and lines for estimating distance are dis-
› Stop the vehicle in played on the screen.
front of a suitable For vehicles without a factory fitted tow bar, a line
parking space. for monitoring the distance to obstacles is displayed
› Reverse so that the on the screen at a distance of 40 cm behind the ve-
yellow lines lead into hicle.
the parking space.
Mode for monitoring behind the vehicle
› At the latest, stop The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the
when the red line screen.
touches the rear boun-
dary (e.g. curb). Switch off the system
Mode for parallel parking
› Press the button.
› In the screen, select the mode for parallel parking. Or:
› Turn on the indicator light for the side on which › For vehicles with an automatic gearbox, put the se-
you want to park. lector lever in the position.
› Stop the vehicle stop Automatic shut-off
so that there are no The automatic system shut-off occurs when driving
obstructions in the gap forward at a speed over 15 km/h.
between the auxiliary
boxes A and the rear
box does not extend Restriction
over the side of the
parking space (e.g. The camera image is distorted in contrast to the nak-
kerb). ed eye. The display may only be used to estimate the
distance.
› Turn the steering
wheel in the recom- Some items may not be displayed properly on the
mended direction B until the red colour of the tra- screen. These include narrow columns, wire mesh
pezoidal border C turns green. fences, grids or road bumps.
182 Park Assist systems › Rear Traffic Alert

Rear Traffic Alert Or:

Functionality
When reversing, the
Rear Traffic Alert warns Troubleshooting
of approaching vehicles. Message regarding system unavailability
If the driver does not re- › Stop the engine and start again.
spond to the warning, › If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
the vehicle is braked au- specialist garage.
tomatically at a speed
below 10 km/h.
Park steering assistant
Vehicle with Park Pilot Usage
If an approaching vehicle is detected in the area be-
Park Assist helps drivers park in parallel and perpen-
hind your vehicle, a graphical warning is displayed in
dicular parking places and to manoeuvre out of par-
the Infotainment. At the same time, a continuous
allel parking spaces.
tone sounds.

What you should be mindful of


Do not use the system in the following cases.
▶ On unpaved or slippery surfaces.
▶ If snow chains or a spare wheel are mounted on
the vehicle.
▶ If the system chooses an inappropriate parking
space for parking.
Vehicle in collision area - danger of collision!
Approaching vehicle Functionality
Vehicle without Park Pilot The system looks for a parking space and only takes
If an approaching vehicle is detected in the area be- over the steering during the parking procedure or
hind your vehicle, the a warning is displayed in the in- when leaving a parking place. The driver operates the
strument cluster display, indicating to the driver to pedals and the shift lever/gear selector.
monitor the traffic behind. At the same time, an
The system displays information and notes on the in-
acoustic signal sounds.
strument cluster display.
If the system detects a risk of collision, automatic
Operating conditions emergency braking takes place to prevent a collision.

✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-


et. Operating conditions
✓ The driving speed is lower than 7 km/h.
Function restriction ✓ The ASR is activated and there is no intervention.
✓ There is no driver intervention in the automatic
Manoeuvre Assist’s functionality may be limited in
steering operation.
unfavourable weather conditions.
✓ No accessories are connected to the trailer sock-
et.
Settings
The system is activated or deactivated in the instru- Operation
ment cluster display in the Assist systems menu item.
Turn on/turn off
The system is activated or deactivated in the follow-
› Press the button.
ing menu in the Infotainment system.
Park Assist systems › Park steering assistant 183

When the system is switched on, the symbol lights ▶ Do not reach between the steering wheel spokes
up in the button . during the parking manoeuvre.
▶ Only operate the pedals and the shift / selector
Select the lane side for the parking procedure
lever.
The system automatically searches for a suitable
parking space on the passenger side. › Observe the area around the vehicle and drive
backwards or forwards in accordance with the ar-
› Press the driver's side indicator to find a parking row in the display.
space on this side of the road.
› As soon as the symbol appears in the display
Operation while searching for a parking space and an audible signal sounds, stop the vehicle. The
› Drive past a number of parked vehicles at a dis- steering wheel is taken over accordingly. The sym-
tance of 0.5–1.5 m. bol goes out.
› To search for a parking space across the road, drive › Travel backwards or forwards in accordance with
slower than 20 km/h. the arrow in the display.
› To search for a parking space along the road, drive As soon as the parking process is completed, the
slower than 40 km/h.
corresponding message is displayed and an audible
If the symbol (km/h) appears in the display, reduce signal sounds.
the driving speed. If the system finds a parking
The parking procedure can be ended at any time by
space, the display will show the recommended park-
pressing the button .
ing mode.
When partially parked in a suitable transverse
Changing the parking mode
parking space forward, press button . The parking
If a suitable parking space is found, the following
process is completed by the system.
Park modes can be shown in the display.
Exiting a parking space
› Press the button.
When the system is switched on, the symbol lights
up in the button .
› Follow the instructions on the screen.
Automatic speed reduction
If a speed of 7 km/h is exceeded during the parking
process, the system will reduce the speed.
Upon the speed being exceeded by 7 km/h a second
time, the parking process is terminated.
Park backwards longitudinally
Park backwards crosswise
Park forwards across Function restriction
If the parking space is too small, it is not possible to
The parking mode can be changed by pressing the
use the system to initiate a parking manoeuvre. A
button .
message is shown on the instrument cluster display.
Press the button again and the system is switch-
ed off.
› To return to the original recommended parking Troubleshooting
mode, press the button again. Message regarding system unavailability
Before the parking process › Stop the engine and start again.
› If a suitable parking space is found, stop and drive › If the system is still not available, seek the help of a
backwards or forwards as indicated by the arrow in specialist garage.
the display.
Incorrect resulting position of the vehicle in the
› When a steering intervention message is displayed, parking space
release the steering wheel. The steering operation The correct parking procedure depends on the size
is taken over by the system. of the wheels. If other wheels approved by ŠKODA
Parking operation AUTO are fitted, have the system readjusted by a
specialist garage.
CAUTION
Risk of injury!
184 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Bonnet

Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in
again.
Bonnet
Opening the bonnet
Before opening
› Make sure the windscreen wiper arms are folded
down onto the windscreen.
› Keep everyone away from the engine compart-
ment.
To open
› Pull the release lever The oil level must be within the marked range.
underneath the dash
panel. NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
▶ The oil level must not be outside the marked range.
If it is not possible to top up the engine oil or if the
oil level is above the marked range, do not continue
driving. Stop the engine and seek the help of a spe-
cialist garage.
▶ Do not use any oil additives.
› Release the lock.
Depending on driving style and operating conditions,
› Lift the bonnet so that
the gas pressure the engine consumes some oil, up to 0.5 l/1000 km.
springs hold it open. Consumption may be higher over the next 5000 km.
Refilling
› Unscrew the cover of the engine oil filler opening.
› Top up the oil to the correct specification in 0.5 li-
tre portions.
› Check the oil level.
› Screw on the cover of the engine oil filler opening.
Closing
› Pull the flap down. Specification
› Close the flap with a slight push from a distance of Ask a specialist garage for the correct engine oil
about 20 cm. specification for your vehicle.
› Check that the bonnet is closed. If no oil of the correct specification is available, max.
0.5 l of oil with the following specifications may be
NOTICE used until the next oil change.
▶ Do not press down on an unclosed bonnet.
▶ Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 508 00,
ACEA C3, ACEA C5.
Engine oil ▶ Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
For vehicles without a particulate filter, VW 505 01
Checking the fill level and topping up can be optionally used.
Test conditions Changing
✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface. Have the oil changed by a specialist garage.
✓ The parked engine is warm.
Checking the level
Troubleshooting
› Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow back
into the oil sump. Engine oil pressure too low
› Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean cloth. or flashes
› Insert the dipstick as far as it will go and pull it out › Check the engine oil level.
again.
The oil level is OK, the warning light continues to
flash:
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Coolant 185

› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist Checking the level
garage. The fill level must be
Engine oil level too low within the marked range.
or illuminates › If the fill level is below
Message regarding required engine oil top up the mark , top up
› Check the engine oil level, top up with oil if re- the coolant.
quired.

Engine oil level too high


or illuminates
Message regarding the need to reduce the
engine oil level NOTICE
Danger of damage to the engine compartment!
› Check the engine oil level.
Do not top up the coolant above the marked area.
The oil level is too high: The coolant could be forced out of the cooling sys-
tem when heated.
› Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. NOTICE
There must be a small quantity of coolant in the tank.
Engine oil level sensor impaired Do not add coolant when the tank is empty.
or illuminates ▶ Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Message regarding the engine oil sensor
Refilling
› Drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. CAUTION
Risk of scalding!
The cooling system is pressurised. Do not open the
cap of the coolant expansion tank while the engine is
Coolant warm. Let the engine cool down.
Coolant temperature gauge › Place a rag on the lid of the tank and carefully un-
screw the lid.
› Refill with coolant of the correct specification.
› Screw on the cap until it clicks into place.
Specification
For refilling, use coolant additive G12evo (TL 774 L)
or G13 (TL 774 J).
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the cooling system and the en-
gine!
Adding coolant that does not conform to the correct
A Cold area specification can reduce the corrosion protection of
› Avoid high engine speed. the cooling system.
B Operating range
C High temperature range Troubleshooting
Coolant level is too low
or illuminates
Checking the fill level and topping up
Message concerning the required coolant
Test conditions check
✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface. › Check the coolant level.
✓ The engine is turned off and cooled.
The coolant level is OK:
› Check the fuse for radiator fan, replace if re-
quired » page 192, Replacing a fuse.
The fuse is OK, the indicator light comes on again:
› Stop driving! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
186 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Engine electronics

Coolant temperature too high Driving in emergency mode is possible - a noticeable


or illuminates reduction in engine performance may occur.
Report regarding the engine overheating
› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
› Stop driving. and seek the help of a specialist garage.
› Stop the engine and allow it to cool.
› Drive on after the indicator light goes out.
Particle filter
Engine fault
Troubleshooting
or lights up.
› Stop driving! Clogged particle filter
› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist or illuminates
garage.
› Clean the filter.
There is no coolant of the correct specification
When the indicator light is on, it must be as-
available
sumed that fuel consumption will be higher, engine
› Top up with distilled or demineralised water. power will be reduced, and the START-STOP func-
› Have the correct coolant mixing ratio corrected by tion will not be available.
a specialist garage as soon as possible.
Another substance was used for topping up, other
than distilled or demineralised water: Filter cleaning
› Have the coolant changed by a specialist garage. Conditions for cleaning
It is not possible to top up with a sufficient amount ✓ The engine is warm.
of coolant Procedure for vehicles with diesel engines
› Stop driving. › Drive at a speed of at least 60 km/h at engine
› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist speeds of at least 2000 rpm.
garage.
If the filter is successfully cleaned, the indicator light
There is a loss of coolant goes off.
› Top up the coolant and seek the help of a specialist If the indicator light does not go off within 40
garage. minutes, no filter cleaning was performed.
› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
Engine electronics and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Procedure for vehicles with petrol engines
Troubleshooting
› Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h at engine
Petrol engine control faulty speeds between 3000-5000 rpm.
illuminates › Release the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle
Driving in emergency mode is possible - a roll with the gear engaged for a few seconds.
noticeable reduction in engine performance may oc- › Repeat this procedure several times.
cur.
If the filter is successfully cleaned, the indicator light
› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution, goes off.
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
If the indicator light does not go off within 30
minutes, no filter cleaning was performed.
Diesel engine control faulty
flashing › Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage.
Driving in emergency mode is possible - a noticeable
reduction in engine performance may occur.
Exhaust control system
› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage. Troubleshooting
Diesel preheating system faulty Emission control system faulty
illuminates, or does not illuminate after the illuminates
ignition is switched on Driving in emergency mode is possible - a no-
ticeable reduction in engine performance may occur.
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Fuel filter 187

› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution, AdBlue® top up quantity can be displayed in the driv-
and seek the help of a specialist garage. ing data in the instrument cluster display.
If the range with the existing AdBlue® tank filling level
drops to 0 km, it is not possible to start the engine.
Fuel filter
› If possible, top up AdBlue® to the maximum level.
Troubleshooting
Requirements for refilling
Water in the diesel fuel filter ✓ Vehicle unlocked.
or illuminates ✓ Ignition switched off.
✓ Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.
› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
and seek the help of a specialist garage. Methods of refilling
▶ With the fuel nozzle at the gas station.
▶ With the refill bottle.
Fuel filler flap ▶ At a specialist garage.

Opening the fuel filler flap We recommend refilling with a refill bottle, using re-
fill bottles from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts. These are
› Press the flap and open equipped with an overfill protection.
it.
Refilling
› Open the tank flap.
› Turn the tank cap in
the direction of the ar-
row and remove it.
› Place the tank cap on
the tank flap.
› Top up AdBlue®.
The AdBlue® tank is full
AdBlue when the fuel nozzle
switches off or as soon
Regulations as no more AdBlue®
flows out of the refill bottle. Do not continue refilling.
Only use AdBlue® that complies with the ISO 22241-1
standard. Do not mix any additives to the AdBlue®. › Place the tank cap on the filler neck and turn it in
the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicks
AdBlue® is a registered trademark of VDA and is also into place.
known as OFF 32 (Aqueous Urea Solution) or DEF
› Close the tank flap and click into place.
(Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
› Before starting the engine, leave the ignition on for
30 seconds to allow the system to detect the refill-
Functionality ing.
NOTICE
In order to reduce pollutant emissions, a urea solu-
Risk of damage to the AdBlue® system!
tion is automatically injected into the exhaust system
▶ Do not exceed the maximum refill quantity speci-
- AdBlue®.
fied in the instrument cluster.
AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below - 11 C. Sys- ▶ The service life of AdBlue® is 4 years. If the tank
tem function is ensured by an automatic heating sys- contents are not consumed within this period, have
tem. them replaced by a specialist garage. For refilling,
do not use any AdBlue® which has passed its expiry
date.
Checking the fill level and topping up
Checking the level
The AdBlue® level is automatically monitored.
Troubleshooting

The range with the existing AdBlue® tank fill level as AdBlue®level too low
well as the indication of the minimum and maximum or or lights up.
› Top up AdBlue®.
188 Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Petrol

AdBlue®system impaired. Prescribed petrol 95 / min. 92 or 93 RON / ROZ


or or lights up We recommend using95 RON petrol.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. 92 or. 93 RON petrol may be used as an option (low
power loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).
In an emergency, 91 RON petrol may be used (low
Technical data power loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).

The AdBlue®tank capacity is approximately 13 litres. Prescribed petrol min. 95 RON / ROZ
Use min. 95 petrol.
Using higher octane petrol than 95 RON may result
Petrol in improved performance and lower fuel consump-
tion.
What you should be mindful of
In an emergency 91. 92 or. 93 RON may be used
DANGER (low power loss, slightly increased fuel consump-
Risk of death! tion).
Fuel and fuel vapours are explosive.
Prescribed petrol 98 / (95) RON / ROZ
NOTICE We recommend using98 RON petrol.
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
95 RON petrol may be used as an option (low power
tem!
loss, slightly increased fuel consumption).
› Never empty the fuel tank completely!
In an emergency 91. 92 or. 93 RON may be used
If you would like to operate your vehicle in a country (low power loss, slightly increased fuel consump-
other than that intended for vehicle operation, tion).
please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will let you
know whether a suitable fuel is offered in the associ- Additive
ated country. NOTICE
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
Regulations ▶ Do not use petrol containing metal-based addi-
Standards tives, e.g. manganese, iron, lead, and do not use, for
Petrol must comply with European standard EN 228 example, any LRP petrol – lead replacement petrol.
(in Russia, GOST 32513-2013). ▶ Do not add any additional additives to the petrol in
accordance with EN 228.
Only use unleaded petrol that contains max 10% bi-
▶ If petrol is not used in accordance with EN 228, we
oethanol (E10).
recommend obtaining information from a specialist
We recommend using petrol with additives, company regarding the possible use of petrol addi-
which is available at petrol stations at the petrol tives approved by ŠKODA AUTO.
pumps.
Octane number
Use the petrol with the octane number prescribed Requirements for refuelling
for your vehicle. ✓ Vehicle unlocked.
Petrol with an octane number that is one higher than ✓ Ignition switched off.
the one prescribed for your vehicle can be used
without restriction.
NOTICE Refilling
Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys- Refilling
tem! › Open the tank flap.
▶ If petrol is used that has an octane number that is
lower than the one prescribed for your vehicle,
then drive at moderate speeds with minimal engine
stress.
▶ Fill up with the prescribed octane number as soon
as possible.
▶ Do not use petrol with an octane number that low-
er than 91!
Engine, exhaust system and fuel › Diesel 189

› Turn the tank cap in NOTICE


the direction of the ar- Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
row and remove it. tem!
› Place the tank cap on › Never empty the fuel tank completely!
the tank flap.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in a country
› Insert the fuel nozzle other than that intended for vehicle operation,
into the fuel filler neck please contact a ŠKODA Partner. They will let you
up to the stop and re- know whether a suitable fuel is offered in the associ-
fuel. ated country.
› Do not continue refuel-
ling after the fuel noz-
zle switches off. Regulations
› Remove the fuel nozzle and put it back on the pet- Standards
rol pump.
The diesel fuel must comply with European standard
› Place the fuel cap on the fuel filler neck and turn it
EN 590 (in Russia, GOST 32511-2013 or GOST R
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicks
55475-2013).
into place.
Only use a diesel fuel that contains a maximum of 7
› Close the tank flap and click into place.
% biodiesel (B7).
We recommend using diesel with additives,
Troubleshooting which is available at petrol stations at the petrol
pumps.
If fuel other than unleaded petrol has been refuel-
led according to the standards applicable to your Operation in different weather conditions
vehicle Only use a diesel fuel according to the current or the
› Do not start the engine or switch on the ignition. expected weather conditions.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. Additive
NOTICE
Technical data Risk of damage to the engine and the exhaust sys-
tem!
The fuel prescribed for your vehicle is indicated on a ▶ Do not use RME biofuel, even as a diesel fuel addi-
sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. tive.
A Unleaded petrol ▶ Do not add any additional additives to the diesel in
accordance with EN 590.
B Organic share as a
▶ If diesel is not used in accordance with EN 590, we
percentage
recommend obtaining information from a specialist
company regarding the possible use of diesel addi-
tives approved by ŠKODA AUTO.

Requirements for refuelling


✓ Vehicle unlocked.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 66 litres, in- ✓ Ignition switched off.
cluding a reserve of approx. 6 litres.
The fuel supply has reached the reserve area.
Refilling
Misfuelling protection
The fuel filler neck on diesel vehicles may be equip-
Diesel
ped with a misfuelling protection device.
What you should be mindful of In some countries, the diameter of the diesel fuel
nozzle may be identical to that of the petrol nozzle.
DANGER
Before driving in these countries, have the protec-
Risk of death!
tion device removed by a specialist garage.
Fuel and fuel vapours are explosive.
Refilling
› Open the tank flap.
190 Vehicle battery and fuses › Vehicle battery

› Turn the tank cap in Vehicle battery and fuses


the direction of the ar-
row and remove it. Vehicle battery
› Place the tank cap on
the tank flap. Functionality - Discharge protection
› Insert the fuel nozzle Possible causes of battery discharge
into the fuel filler neck ▶ Frequent short-distance traffic.
up to the stop and re-
▶ Low temperatures.
fuel.
▶ Vehicle stationary for a long period of time.
› Do not continue refuel-
ling after the fuel noz- System-related discharge protection measures
zle switches off. ▶ Increasing the engine idling speed.
› Remove the fuel nozzle and put it back on the pet- ▶ Switching off certain consumers or limiting their
rol pump. power.
› Place the fuel cap on the fuel filler neck and turn it
Measures to be taken when vehicle stationary for
in the opposite direction to the arrow until it clicks
more than three weeks
into place.
› Disconnect the terminal of the vehicle battery.
› Close the tank flap and click into place.

Checking and charging the vehicle battery


Troubleshooting
Checking the condition
If a fuel other than diesel fuel has been refuelled to The battery condition is checked by a specialist ga-
the appropriate standard rage during servicing.
› Do not start the engine or switch on the ignition.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. Checking the acid level
Applies to a vehicle battery with an acid level indica-
The diesel fuel nozzle cannot be correctly inserted tor.
into the filler neck
› If the fuel nozzle cannot be properly inserted into › Tap on the indicator
before testing, to clear
the fuel filler neck, move it slightly back and forth
air bubbles.
when inserting it.

Technical data
The fuel prescribed for your vehicle is indicated on a
sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
A Diesel
Black colour - the acid level is OK.
B Organic share as a
percentage Colourless or pale yellow colour - acid level is too
low, the battery must be replaced.
Requirements for the charging process
✓ Ignition switched off.
✓ Power consumers switched off.
Vehicle battery charging process
To charge the vehicle battery fully, set a charging
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 66 litres, in- current of max. of 0.1 times the battery capacity.
cluding a reserve of approx. 6 litres.
The fuel supply has reached the reserve area.
Vehicle battery and fuses › Using the jump-starting cable 191

› Connect the termi- Connecting


nal of the charger to › Connect the terminal and then the terminal.
the terminal of the After switching on the ignition, the warning lights
vehicle battery. are lit up. .
› Connect the termi-
nal of the charger to › If, after a short distance, one of the above-men-
tioned indicator lights does not go out, seek the
the earth point A .
help of a specialist garage.
› Plug the charger's
power cable into the Commission these functions after disconnecting
socket and switch on and connecting the vehicle battery
Earth point ▶ Clock setting » page 56.
the device.
› After charging, switch off the charger and unplug ▶ Window operation » page 26.
the power cable from the socket. ▶ Operation of the tilting/sliding sunroof » page 27,
› Disconnect the charger terminals from the vehicle ▶ Sunblind » page 28.
battery.
Changing
WARNING The new vehicle battery must have the same param-
Risk of explosion! eters as the original battery. Have the replacement
▶ During charging, hydrogen is released. An explo- carried out by a specialist garage.
sion can also be caused by sparks, for example,
when disconnecting or loosening the cable con-
nector. Using the jump-starting cable
▶ Never charge a frozen or thawed vehicle battery.
What you should be mindful of
▶ Do not carry out the so-called quick charging of
the vehicle battery yourself, but have it carried out WARNING
by a specialist garage. Risk of explosion and chemical burns!
▶ Do not jump start with the battery of another vehi-
NOTICE
cle under the following conditions.
A discharged vehicle battery can freeze easily. ▶ The discharged vehicle battery is frozen. A dis-
charged vehicle battery can freeze at tempera-
tures just below 0°C.
Troubleshooting
▶ The battery acid level is too low » page 190.
Vehicle battery does not charge while the engine is
Use jump leads with a sufficient cross section and in-
running
sulated terminal clamps.
or is lit up
The rated voltage of both batteries must be 12V. The
› Seek the help of a specialist garage. capacity (in Ah) of the charging battery must not be
Engine fault significantly lower than the capacity of the dis-
or is lit up charged battery.

› Stop driving!
› Stop the engine and seek the help of a specialist Jump-starting with the battery of another
garage. vehicle
WARNING
Risk of injury and danger of vehicle damage!
Disconnecting, connecting and replacing
▶ Lay the jump start cables so that they cannot be-
CAUTION come caught by rotating parts in the engine com-
Risk of fire! partment.
▶ Do not mix up the connection cables. NOTICE
Disconnecting Short circuit!
▶ The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
› Close the electric boot lid, the tilting/sliding sun-
roof, all windows and the electric sunblind. must not touch each other.
▶ The cable connected to the positive pole of the
› Switch off the ignition and any connected power
consumers. battery must not come into contact with electri-
cally conductive vehicle parts.
› Disconnect the terminal and then the termi-
nal. ▶ The vehicles must not touch each other.
192 Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses

Start the engine Functionality


› Connect the terminal clamps of the jump start ca-
bles in the order shown in the legend.

Blown fuse

1
Conditions for the replacing a fuse
pole of the flat battery.
2 pole of the current-giving battery. ✓ Ignition switched off.
✓ Driver door opened.
3 pole of the current-giving battery.
✓ All consumers switched off.
4 Earth point of the engine to be started.
› Start the engine of the Replacing a fuse
current-giving vehicle
and let it idle. › Replace the fuse with
› Start the engine of the the clamp located on
vehicle with the flat the inside of the fuse
battery. box cover in the engine
› If the engine of the ve- compartment.
hicle with the dis- › Use the appropriate
charged battery does end of the clamp ac-
not start within 10 sec- cording to the fuse di-
Earth point onds, repeat the start- mensions.
ing procedure after ap-
proximately 30 seconds.
Disconnecting the cable Fuses in the dash panel
› Disconnect the cables in the reverse order from
connection. Overview
Access to fuses – left-hand drive
Fuses › Open the storage compartment on the driver's
side.
What you should be mindful of
› Grasp the side storage
NOTICE compartment in area
Fire hazard and risk of damage to the electrical sys- A and open it.
tem. › Change the fuse.
▶ Do not repair fuses or replace them with stronger › Close the storage
fuses. compartment.
▶ Replace the defective fuse with a new fuse with
the same amperage.
▶ We recommend using replacement fuses from the
ŠKODA Genuine Accessories range. These guaran-
tee reliable and safe consumer protection. Access to fuses – right-hand drive
▶ If a newly inserted fuse blows again, seek the help
› Open the storage compartment on the passenger's
side.
of a specialist garage.
One fuse may belong to several consumers. One
consumer may have several fuses.
Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses in the dash panel 193

› Loosen the brake rod Fuse Consumer


of the storage com- number
partment.
1 SCR (AdBlue®)
2 Heated steering wheel
3 Not used
4 Alarm system
5 Databus
6 Automatic gearbox
7 Air conditioning, Heating, Auxiliary heat-
ing receiver, Front and rear window
› Press the locking lugs, heating, clock
the storage compart- 8 Light switch, rain sensor, diagnostic
ment folds down. connection, parking brake, ambient
› Change the fuse. lighting, sensor of the alarm system,
› Insert and lock the headlight
brake rod. 9 USB connections
› Close the storage 10 Infotainment screen
compartment. 11 Light - left side
12 Infotainment
13 Left side belt tensioner
Fuses overview 14 Air conditioning, heating
15 Electric steering lock
16 Phonebox
17 Instrument cluster, emergency call
18 Reversing camera
19 KESSY (keyless locking and starting sys-
tem)
20 SCR (AdBlue®)
21 All-wheel drive
22 Tow hitch
23 Panorama sliding/tilting roof
24 Light - right side
25 Central locking (driver's door and rear
left door), external mirror driver's side
(heating, folding function, mirror surface
adjustment)
26 Heating of the front seats
27 Interior lighting
28 Tow hitch
29 Control lever under the steering wheel
30 Not used
31 Opening the boot lid
32 Parking aid (Park Assist)
33 Airbags, switch for hazard warning
lights
34 ESC, ASR, tyre pressure monitor, air
conditioning, reversing light switch, mir-
ror with automatic dimming, START-
STOP, heated rear seats, parking brake,
light switch
35 Diagnostic connection, camera, radar
sensor, "blind spot" detection
36 Not used
Additional fuses for right hand drive 37 Not used
38 Tow hitch
194 Vehicle battery and fuses › Fuses in the engine compartment

Fuse Consumer Fuses overview


number
39 Central locking (front passenger door
and right rear door), front passenger
side exterior mirrors (heating, folding
function, mirror surface adjustment)
40 12-volt power outlets
41 Right side belt tensioner
42 Boot lid, headlight washers, windscreen
washer system
43 Music amplifier
44 Tow hitch
45 Electrically adjustable seats
46 230 volt socket
47 Rear window wiper Fuse Consumer
48 Not used number
49 Engine starting, clutch pedal switch 1 ESC, parking brake
50 Not used 2 ESC
51 Heated rear seats, rear display, rear air 3 Engine control system
conditioning 4 Radiator fan, fuel pressure regulator,
52 Shock absorber adjustment (adaptive electric auxiliary heater, glow plug sys-
suspension) tem, air flow sensor, engine components
53 Heated rear window 5 Ignition, engine components
A Front seat ventilation - left-hand drive 6 Brake sensor
B USB charging - LHD 7 Radiator shutters, coolant pump, crank-
C USB charging - RHD case ventilation, engine components
8 Lambda probe, NOx sensor
D Front seat ventilation - right-hand drive
9 Coolant pump, ignition, engine compo-
nents
10 Fuel pump
Fuses in the engine compartment 11 Electric auxiliary heater
Overview 12 Electric auxiliary heater
13 Oil pump for automatic gearbox
Access to the fuses 14 Heated windscreen
› Simultaneously press 15 Horn
the locking buttons on 16 Ignition
the fuse box cover and 17 ESC, engine control unit, main relay coil
remove the cover. 18 Databus, battery data module
19 Windscreen wiper
› Change the fuse.
20 Brake servo
› Fit the cover and click
21 Automatic gearbox
into place.
22 Engine control system
23 Starter
24 Electric auxiliary heater
31 Not used
NOTICE
32 Not used
Danger of water entering the fuse box.
33 Not used
▶ Fit the cover correctly and click into place secure-
34 Not used
ly.
35 Not used
36 Left headlight
37 Auxiliary heating
38 Right headlight
Wheels › Tyres and rims 195

Wheels load index


The load index indicates the maximum permissible
Tyres and rims load for each individual tyre.
91 615 kg
What you should be mindful of 92 630 kg
NOTICE 93 650 kg
▶ Protect tyres from contact with lubricants and 94 670 kg
fuel. 95 690 kg
96 710 kg
▶ Always store wheels or tyres in a cool, dry and,
97 730 kg
where possible, dark place. Tyres without rims
98 750 kg
should be stored in an upright position.
99 775 kg
▶ Alloy rims can be damaged by grit.
Speed symbol
Causes of uneven tyre wear The speed symbol indicates the maximum permissi-
▶ Improper tyre pressure.
ble speed for a vehicle fitted with tyres in the cate-
▶ Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration gory concerned.
and deceleration).
M 130 km/h
▶ Wheel alignment error.
T 190 km/h
▶ Incorrect wheel balancing. U 200 km/h
Wheel changes H 210 km/h
V 240 km/h
For uniform wear on all W 270 km/h
tyres, we recommend Y 300 km/h
that you change the
wheels every 10,000 km WARNING
according to the sched- ▶ Do not exceed the maximum permissible load bear-
ule. ing capacity and speed for the tyres fitted.
Tread wear indicators
Advice for tyre assembly
Wear indicators are loca-
› Follow the specified running direction, otherwise ted in the profile of the
the driving characteristics may be impaired. The di-
tyres that display the
rection of rotation of the tyres is marked by ar-
permissible minimum
rows on the wall of the tyre.
tread depth.
› Always replace the tyres by the axle.
Markings on the walls of
Additional information the tyres with the letters
Only fit radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling cir- “TWI” or other symbols
cumference) and the same tread pattern on one axle. (e.g. ) indicate the po-
Approved tyre sizes are specified in the technical ve- sition of the wear indica-
hicle documentation and in the declaration of con- tors.
formity (in the so-called COCDocument). A tyre is to be regarded as worn out when this wear
The declaration of conformity can be obtained from indicator is flush with the tread.
a ŠKODA Partner (valid for some countries and some The tread depth can be measured using a tread
models). depth gauge on the ice scraper. The ice scraper is lo-
cated on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Overview of tyre labelling WARNING


Risk of an accident!
Explanation of tyre markings ▶ Do not use worn tyres.
e.g. 216/60 R 16 95 V
Tyre manufacturing date
216 Tyre width in mm The date of manufacture is indicated on the tyre
60 Height/width ratio in % sidewall.
R Code letter for the type of tyre - Radial
For example, DOT ... 10 19 means that the tyres were
16 Diameter of wheel in inches
produced in the 10th week of the year 2019.
95 load index
V Speed symbol
196 Wheels › All-season or winter tires

WARNING Settings
Risk of an accident!
▶ Do not use tyres that are older than 6 years. The speed limit setting for tyres is set in the infotain-
ment in the following menu item.

Troubleshooting
Or:
Help with a flat tyre
▶ Spare and emergency spare wheel » page 197.
▶ Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle.
▶ Breakdown kit » page 198. Snow chains
Change of tyre pressure Usage
Change of tyre pressure
The snow chains improve driving in wintry road con-
› Stop the vehicle. ditions.
› Check the tyres and tyre pressures.
WARNING
The tyre highlighted by the system can be seen in Risk of accident as well as tyre damage!
the infotainment in the following menu item. ▶ Do not use chains on routes that are free from

Vehicle status snow and ice.

Or:
Vehicle status What you should be mindful of
› Before fitting the snow chains, remove the full
wheel trims.
All-season or winter tires
› Only mount the snow chains on the front wheels.
Usage
All-season (or "winter") tyres improve handling in Technical data
winter weather conditions. They are characterised
by ‘M+S’ and a mountaintop and snowflake symbol Permitted rim/tyre combinations for mounting of
. snow chains.

Rim size Tyre size


What you should be mindful of 6.5Jx16 ET41 215/60 R16
6.5Jx17 ET41 215/55 R17
For the best possible handling, use tyres on all four
wheels with a minimum tread depth of 4 mm. Only fit snow chains with links and locks that are no
larger than 13 mm.
Change winter tyres to summer tyres at the appro-
priate time. Summer tyres have better driving and
braking characteristics on snow- and ice-free roads
SEAL tyres
and at temperatures above 7 °C.
Usage
Usage conditions The SEAL tyres have increased resistance to air leak-
age when punctured.
If all-season tyres are installed that have a lower
speed category than the actual specified maximum When replacing SEAL tyres with standard tires, the
vehicle speed, then proceed as follows. vehicle must have one of the following pieces of
equipment.
› In infotainment, set the speed limit according to
the category of tyres fitted. ▶ Spare or emergency spare wheel with correspond-
ing tool for replacing it.
› In the driver's field of view, affix a warning label
with the maximum value of the speed category in- ▶ Breakdown kit.
tended for the tyres fitted (applies only to certain
countries).
Wheels › Spare and emergency spare wheel 197

Spare and emergency spare wheel Changing the wheel and raising the
vehicle
Overview
What you should be mindful of
Spare wheel
▶ A full spare wheel is identical to the wheels moun- Before changing
ted on the vehicle. › Park the vehicle securely and secure it from rolling
▶ A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warn- away.
ing label on the rim. This wheel is intended to ena- › Turn off the engine.
ble you to reach the nearest specialist garage.
› Let all of the occupants get out. During the wheel
Inflate a space saver wheel with the maximum pre- change they should not stand on the road, e.g. be-
scribed pressure. hind the crash barriers.
Emergency wheel › All doors, the luggage compartment and tailgate
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the tempo- close.
rary spare wheel. This wheel is intended to enable › Uncouple any trailers.
you to reach the nearest specialist garage. Raise vehicle
An emergency wheel is significantly narrower than WARNING
the wheels mounted ex-factory. Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack can-
not slip!
▶ Provide a wide and firm base under the jack on
Remove the wheel on vehicles without sound loose surfaces.
system and replace
▶ Create a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber floor mat) un-
The spare wheel or emergency wheel is mounted in a der the jack on a smooth surface.
recess under the floor covering or the variable load- ▶ Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
ing floor in the boot. ▶ Do not insert any body parts under the raised vehi-
cle.
▶ Do not start the engine of the lifted vehicle.

NOTICE
Danger of damage to vehicle!
▶ Make sure that the jack is attached correctly to the
bridge of the sill.
After having been changed
› Check the tyre pressure on the mounted wheel
and adjust if necessary.
Removing › In vehicles with a tyre indicator, save the tyre pres-
sure values in the system.
› Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with
the tool kit. › Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts of
the mounted tyres checked with a torque wrench
› Unscrew the locking screw. as soon as possible.
› Take out the wheel.
The specified tightening torque is 120 Nm.
Inserting
Drive carefully until the tightening torque is checked.
› Insert the wheel into the wheel well with the out-
side facing downwards. Replace the damaged tyre. It is not recommended to
› Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in repair the tyre.
the wheel rim. WARNING
› Screw in the locking screw until it stops. Risk of an accident!
› Replace the box with the tool kit into the wheel ▶ Too low a tightening torque may cause the wheel
and secure it with the tape. to disengage while driving.
▶ Too high a tightening torque can damage the
threads and cause the rim to deform.
WARNING
Risk of an accident!
▶ Do not grease or lubricate screws.
▶ Do not use corroded or damaged screws.
198 Wheels › Breakdown kit

Changing the wheel and raising the vehicle


Release screws
› If the vehicle has covers over the wheel bolts or
wheel trims, remove them.
WARNING
If you step on the key end when loosening the screw,
hold on to the vehicle for better stability.
Some vehicles may have
anti-theft wheel bolts
that protect the wheels › Position the jack at the jacking point closest to the
from theft. wheel to be replaced.
› Insert the upper sec- › Insert the crank into the mount on the car jack.
tion on the anti-theft › Support the base plate of the jack with its full area
wheel bolt until it resting on level ground and ensure that the jack is
stops. located in a vertical position at the jacking point.
› Use the crank to raise the jack until its claw enclo-
ses the bar.
› Place the key on the › Continue to lift the vehicle until the wheel is just
wheel bolt or on the off the floor.
attachment piece.
Changing a wheel
› Turn the screw a maxi-
› Unscrew the screws and place them on a clean
mum of half a turn so
surface.
that the wheel does
not come loose and fall › Remove the wheel carefully.
off. › Attach the wheel.
› Slightly screw in the screws.
› Lower the vehicle.
Jacking points for the jack NOTICE
Applies to wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from
ŠKODA Original Accessories: the anti-theft wheel
bolt should be installed in the position marked on the
back of the wheel trim.
Tighten screws
› Tighten the opposite wheel bolts including the an-
ti-theft wheel bolt one after the other.
› Reinstall the cover caps of the wheel bolts or the
full wheel covers.
Keep the label with the code number of the anti-
A - 16 cm theft wheel bolts. A replacement upper section can
B - 34 cm be acquired from ŠKODA original parts based on
this.
Position the jack and lift the vehicle
Use the jack from the tool kit.
Breakdown kit
Content overview
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in
the luggage compartment.
Wheels › Breakdown kit 199

Once a tyre pressure of 2.0–2.5 bar is achieved, con-


tinue the journey at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph).
› Avoid full accelerations, strong braking and fast
cornering.
Information for driving with repaired tyres
› The pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked
after driving for 10 minutes.
› If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar and less, do not con-
tinue! Seek the help of a specialist garage.
A Sticker with speed indication
› If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, correct
B Valve remover the pressure to the correct value of at least 2 bar
C Inflation hose with plug and continue driving.
D Air compressor (the layout of the controls may NOTICE
be different depending on the type of air com- Danger of damage to the compressor!
pressor) ▶ After the maximum running time of the air com-
E Tyre inflation hose pressor, allow it to cool for a few minutes.
F Button for pressure reduction WARNING
Risk of burns!
G Pressure indicator
The tyre inflation hose and the air compressor may
H 12 volt cable connector become hot when inflated.
I ON and OFF switch ▶ Allow the air compressor and hose to cool for a
few minutes.
J Tyre inflation bottle
K Replacement valve core
Usage restrictions
The declaration of conformity is included with the air
compressor or the log folder. Do not use the kit in the following cases.
▶ The rim is damaged.
▶ The outdoor temperature is below the minimum
Usage conditions temperature indicated in the manual of the tyre fill-
Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all ing bottle.
intended to replace a permanent repair on the tyre. ▶ Tyre punctures are greater than 4 mm.
The purpose of the repair is to get you to the nearest ▶ There is damage to the tyre wall.
specialist garage. ▶ The expiry date stated on the tyre inflation bottle
has expired.
Change the tyre repaired by the breakdown kit as
soon as possible.
Before using the kit Self-help
› Park the vehicle securely and secure it from rolling Seal the tyres
away.
› Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre.
› Turn off the engine.
› Unscrew the valve core with the valve insert and
› Let all of the occupants get out. During the wheel place it on a clean surface.
repair they should not stand on the road, e.g. be-
hind the crash barriers.
› Shake the tyre inflation bottle back and forth with
sealant.
› Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
› Screw the inflation hose onto the tyre inflater bot-
› Uncouple any trailers. tle. The film on the closure is pierced automatically.
After using the kit › Remove the plug from the inflation hose and push
If a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar can not be achieved, the it fully onto the tyre valve.
tyre is too damaged and cannot be sealed with the › Hold the bottle with the bottom facing upwards
puncture set. and fill all of the sealing agent into the tyre.
› Stop driving. Seek the help of a specialist garage. › Remove the filler plug from the valve.
› Screw in the valve insert.
200 Wheels › Tyre pressure

Inflate tyres D Tyre diameter in inches


› Fit the tyre inflation hose of the air compressor to This information only serves as information for
the tyre valve. the prescribed tyre pressure. This is not a listing
› Secure the vehicle with the parking brake. of approved tyre sizes for your vehicle. These
› Start the engine. are listed in the technical vehicle documentation
› Plug the connector into the 12 volt socket . and in the declaration of conformity (in the so-
called COCDocument).
› Turn on the air compressor.
E Tyre pressure reading for the front axle tyres
› Once a tyre pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar is reached, turn
off the air compressor. F Tyre pressure reading for the rear axle tyres
Observe the maximum running time of the air com- G Prescribed tyre pressure value for the emergen-
pressor according to the directions of the repair kit cy wheel
manufacturer.
› If an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar has not been
reached, remove the tyre inflation hose from the Tyre pressure monitoring system
valve.
Functionality
› Drive approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards to
allow the sealing agent to distribute in the tyre. The tyre pressure monitoring indicator indicates a
› Replace the tire inflation hose on the valve and re- change in tyre pressure.
peat the inflation procedure.
Warning when pressure changes
Illuminated - Tyre pressure change
Tyre pressure › Stop the vehicle.
› Check the tyres and tyre pressures.
What you should be mindful of
Show tyres with modified pressure
NOTICE
▶ Always adjust the tyre pressure to the load. › In Infotainment, select the following menu.
▶ Check the pressure in all tyres at least once a Vehicle status
month and before each longer ride. Or:
▶ Check the pressure when the tyres are cold. If nec- Vehicle status
essary, do not reduce the elevated pressure when
the tyres are warm.
▶ After each tyre pressure change, save the new val- Function restriction
ues in the tyre pressure monitoring system.
The system is unable to provide a warning in the
WARNING event of a very rapid tyre pressure loss, e.g. sudden
Risk of an accident! puncture.
If tyre pressure loss is very quick, try to stop the ve-
hicle carefully without heavy steering or heavy brak- The system function may be restricted in the follow-
ing. ing cases.
▶ Uneven loading of the wheels, e.g. with a trailer at-
tached.
Sticker with prescribed tyre pressures ▶ Sporty driving style.
The sticker with prescribed tyre pressures is located ▶ Driving on dirt roads.
on the inside of the fuel filler flap. ▶ Snow chains fitted.
A Inflation pressure for
half load
Saving tyre pressure values
B Inflation pressure for
environmentally Store the tyre pressure values in the infotainment
friendly operation › Inflate the tyres to the prescribed inflation pres-
(slightly lower fuel sure.
consumption and › Turn on the ignition.
emissions) › In Infotainment, select the following menu.
C Inflation pressure for
full load Vehicle status
Or:
Wheels › Tyre pressure monitoring system 201

Vehicle status › Using the functional surfaces choose the Tyre


› Tap on the functional surface . Pressure Monitoring menu item.
Using the functional surfaces select the tyre Instrument cluster / Infotainment
control display menu.
› Then follow the instructions on the screen.
Save the tyre pressures in the following cases.
▶ Change of tyre pressure.
▶ Change of one or more wheels.
▶ Change of position of a wheel on the vehicle.
▶ Always after covering a distance of 10,000 km or
once a year.

A Tyre pressure
Troubleshooting
B Recommended tyre pressure
Tyre pressure monitoring system faulty
C Tyre pressure not available
flashes for about 1 minute and stays on
D Tyre pressure too low
› Stop the vehicle, switch off the ignition and
start the engine. E Adjust the vehicle’s loading condition
If the symbol flashes again after starting the en- The tyres warm up while driving and there is an
gine, there is a system fault. increase in pressure. This is completely normal, it is
› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution, not a defect. If the system indicates an increase in
and seek the help of a specialist garage. pressure while driving, do not reduce the pressure.

Tyre pressure monitoring system Settings

Functionality Tyre type


Select the tyre type in the following menu.
The system measures tyre pressure while driving us-
ing sensors on the wheels.
Or:
For correct system function, you must select the
tyre type as well as the load condition of the vehicle
in the Infotainment. Vehicle loading condition
After switching on the ignition, the last measured › Select the following menu item.
tyre pressure values are displayed. This display will Vehicle status
be updated at the start of the journey.
Or:
Warning when changing the tyre pressure
illuminates Vehicle status

› Stop the vehicle. › Using the functional surfaces choose the Tyre
Pressure Monitoring menu item.
› Check the tyres and tyre pressures.
› Tap the functional area and select the vehicle
load condition.
Overview
Display in the instrument cluster
Troubleshooting
› Select the Vehicle menu item. Functional restriction / system fault
Display in Infotainment flashing
› Select the following menu item. › Stop the engine and start again.
Vehicle status › If the indicator light flashes again after the engine
starts, there is a problem with the system.
Or:
› Continue driving, exercising appropriate caution,
Vehicle status and seek the help of a specialist garage.
202 Storage space and interior equipment › Wheel bolt cover caps

Wheel bolt cover caps Storage space and interior


Remove cover caps and install equipment
Equipment in the boot
Overview

Disconnecting
› Push the pull-off clamp onto the cover cap up to
the stop.
› Remove the cover cap. A Removable light
Installing B Lever for folding forward the rear seat backrests
› Push the cover cap onto the wheel bolt to the stop. C Removable partition of the storage compart-
ment
Full wheel frame Max. load 2.5 kg
D Net
Removing and installing the trim
Max. load 1.5 kg
Applies to factory built or original accessory trims E Removable partition of the storage compart-
from ŠKODA. ment
Disconnecting Max. load 2.5 kg
› Hang the clamps for removing the wheel trims at F 12 volt socket
the edge of one of the openings in the trim.
› Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support
on the tyre and pull off the wheel trim. Emergency equipment
Installing Overview of the emergency equipment
› Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the
designated valve opening. Emergency equipment in the luggage compart-
When using an anti-theft wheel bolt, it must be lo- ment
cated at the location indicated on the bezel.
› Press the trim, starting at the valve, into the rim on
both sides until it engages around the entire cir-
cumference.
NOTICE
▶ Use hand pressure, do not hit the wheel cover.

A Positioning of the first aid kit (depending on


equipment)
B Tool kit
C Positioning of the warning triangle (depending
on equipment)

Storage compartment for the reflective vest


The storage compartment for the reflective vest is in
the storage compartment of the front door.
Storage space and interior equipment › Fasteners in the boot 203

Fire extinguisher under the passenger seat Max. load 7.5 kg


B Fasteners for securing the fastening nets
C Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-
tening nets
Max. load 350 kg

Vehicle with variable loading floor

Tool kit
Depending on the equipment, not all of the following
components may be included in the tool kit.

A Bag hooks
Max. load 7.5 kg
B Fasteners for securing the fastening nets
C Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-
tening nets
Max. load 350 kg
D Lashing eyes for securing the load and the fas-
A Attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts tening nets
B Towing eye Max. load 350 kg
C Bracket for removing the full wheel covers
Other fasteners
D Jack with sign and crank
E Wheel wrench
F Removal clip for the wheel bolt cover caps
G Breakdown kit
H Screwdriver

The declaration of conformity is enclosed with the


jack or the logbook folder.

Fasteners in the boot


Overview
Vehicle without variable loading floor

A Hook for securing the load to the eyelet of the


TOP TETHER system
Max. load 5 kg
B Cargo elements
A Bag hooks
Max. load 8 kg
204 Storage space and interior equipment › Fastening nets

A storage compartment for the cargo elements › Take out the folded pocket in an upwards direc-
is located in the storage compartment or under tion.
the floor covering in the luggage compartment.
Inserting
› Fold up the cargo element and fasten it to the
floor covering in the luggage compartment. › Insert the end of the
strip marked with in-
to the right-hand
mount and the end of
Fastening nets
the strip marked
Overview with into the left-
hand mount.

Stowing the pocket under the variable loading


floor
› Fold the variable loading floor in the upper position.
› Open and remove the side compartments.
› Remove the left cover.

The maximum load of the respective fastening nets


is 1.5 kg.

Multifunctional pocket
Operation
Unfolding
› Insert the pocket into
› Fold down the front the recesses of the
hooks on both sides of side panel.
the luggage compart-
ment. If the multifunction
pocket and the roll-up
› Fit the rear strip on the
cover are stowed at
hooks.
the same time, the roll-
up cover at the back
must cover the multi-
function pocket.
› Replace the left cover and the side compartments.
Folding
› Unfold the variable loading floor in the upper posi-
› Remove the rear strip tion.
from the hooks.
› Place the rear strip
against the front strip
and press them to-
gether at both ends.

Remove and insert


Removing
› Remove the roll-up cover.
Storage space and interior equipment › Net partition 205

Net partition Inserting

Attach the net partition


› Insert the housing into
the supports and move
Attach at the back it.

› Open the lid of the roll-


up cover.

Troubleshooting
Blocked net partition
› Pull out the net parti-
tion. › To unlock, press the
lock button.
› Insert the crossbar into
the mount on one side
and push it forwards.
› Fix the bar in the same
way on the other side.
› Open the lid of the
roll-up cover.

Fasten in the front


The procedure is analogous to the process behind.
Before installing, fold back the rear seat backrests. Double-sided floor covering
Releasing Overview
› Open the lid of the roll-up cover.
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be
› Move the rod first to one side and then to the oth- equipped with a double-sided floor covering in the
er side, and take it out of the supports.
luggage compartment. One side is made of fabric,
› Hold the pole and allow the net partition to slowly the other side is washable.
roll in.
› Open the lid of the roll-up cover.
Flooring in the luggage compartment
Remove housing and insert Folding up and folding down
Removal
› Fold the rear seat backrests forwards.
› Open the door at the right rear.
› Move and swing out
the housing.

Version 1/Version 2
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the hook!
For version 1, the following information applies.
▶ Only hang the floor covering on the hook.
▶ Before closing the luggage compartment flap, re-
move the floor covering from the hook.
206 Storage space and interior equipment › Removable light

The floor covering can be fixed with Version 2 on- Inserting


ly if the variable loading floor is folded in the upper
position.

Removable light
Overview

› Insertion takes place in reverse order.

Replace batteries

A Button for switching on and off


B Light (lights up when the light is in the bracket
and the boot lid is open)
C Light (lights up when the light is outside the
bracket)

The batteries in the light are charged while the


engine is running.
A full charge of the batteries takes about 3 hours.
› Pry off the cover with a narrow, pointed object in
the area of the arrow.
› Replace the batteries.
Remove and insert › Fit the cover and click into place.
NOTICE
NOTICE
New batteries must comply with the specifications
▶ Protect the light from moisture.
of the original battery.
Removing

Rigid boot cover


Remove and insert
The maximum load of the other fastening nets is
1 kg.
Removing
› Unhook the straps.

› Grasp the light in area A and swivel it out.


Thanks to the integrated magnets, the light can
be attached, for example, to the vehicle body.
Storage space and interior equipment › Roll-up luggage compartment cover 207

› Hold the raised cover Retracting


in place and press the
underside of the cover
› Press the cover in the
handle area.
on both sides.
The cover rolls up to
› Remove the cover.
the intermediate posi-
tion A .
Press again to fully
open the cover.
It is possible that the
Inserting cover rolls more slowly
› Insert the holder with during winter weather
part A and then snap conditions.
part B of the recepta-
cle into the recess C Settings
on both sides of the
luggage compartment. Automatic rewinding of the cover to the inter-
› Hook in the retaining mediate position
straps. The cover automatically rolls into the intermediate
position when the boot lid is opened.
The function is activated or deactivated in the fol-
Store the cover behind the rear seats lowing menu in the Infotainment system.
› Insert the cover behind
the rear seats.
Or:

Remove and insert


Take out and insert the roll-up cover
› Press the end of the
crossbar and take out
or insert the cover.
Roll-up luggage compartment cover
Operation
Extending
› Pull out the cover on
the handle until it clicks
into place.
Stowing the cover under the variable loading floor
› Fold the variable loading floor in the upper position.
› Open and remove the side compartments.
› Remove the left cover.
208 Storage space and interior equipment › Variable loading floor in the boot

› Insert the cover into Fold the variable loading floor together
the recesses of the
side panel.
If the roll-up cover and
the multifunction bag
are stowed at the same
time, the roll-up cover
must cover the multi-
function bag at the
back.
› Replace the left cover and the side compartments.
› Unfold the variable loading floor in the upper posi- › Lift the variable load floor and move it forwards.
tion. The variable loading floor is folded down in the
central area.
› Fold the variable loading floor forwards.
Variable loading floor in the boot
Dividing the boot
Setting the position
› Lift the variable loading
The maximum load of the variable loading floor is floor and push the rear
75 kg. edge into the grooves
A.
Set the variable loading floor to the upper position
› Lift the variable loading
floor.
› Pull the variable load-
ing floor towards you
and raise it to the
height of the roll-up
cover until you hear an
audible click. Remove and insert
› Press the variable load- Removing and inserting the partition
ing floor forward and The partition prevents the cargo from slipping.
hang up.
The maximum load of the partition is 10 kg.
Install in the lower position › To Remove, pull the se-
› Lift the variable loading curing tabs on both
floor. sides upwards and out-
› Pull the variable load- wards and remove the
ing floor towards you partition.
until it sinks down into
the lower position.
› Press the variable load-
ing floor forward and
hang up.
› To Insert engage the
partition in the fixing
points A . B or C .
Storage space and interior equipment › Through-loading bag 209

Insert the fastening element and remove


The fastening element prevents the cargo from slip-
ping.
The fastening element is attached to the partition on
the variable loading floor.
The maximum load for the fastening element is
10 kg.
› To Insert, position the
fastening element in an
oblique direction on
the partition and press
› Guide the securing strap B through the opening
around the upper part of the seat backrest.
downwards.
› Fold the seat backrests back until the locking but-
› Removing takes place ton clicks into place.
in reverse order.
› Insert the securing strap into the lock until it clicks
into place.
WARNING
Move the fastening element The maximum weight of the transported skis is 17
kg.
1 Unlocking
NOTICE
2 Moving Risk of damage to the armrest!
▶ Handle the bag and the skis with care.
3 Applying

Overview of passenger compartment


Overview of practical equipment in the front

Through-loading bag
Insert and lock
In the bag, a max. of 4 pairs of skis with poles can be
transported.
› Fold the rear armrest and the cover in the seat
backrest downwards.
› Place the empty bag in the opening in such a way
that the end of the bag with the zip is in the boot.
› Place the skis with the tips facing to the front and
the poles with the tips facing to the rear into the
bag and close the bag.
› Tighten the strap A
around the skis in front
of the bindings.
› Fold the seat backrest
a little forward.

A Make up mirror
B Ticket holder
C Ticket holder
D Spectacles compartment
Max. load 0.25 kg
› To open, press the button.
210 Storage space and interior equipment › Storage compartment under the front seat

E Storage compartment with air outlet nozzle Overview of the practical equipment in the
Max. load 3 kg rear
› Pull the handle to open the compartment.
› Turn the knob to position to open the air
outlet nozzle.
F Storage tray
▶ Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l
▶ Storage compartment for the waste container
▶ Storage compartment for the reflective vest
G Storage tray
In the compartment is a 12-volt power outlet
and a USB connection.
The USB connection can be used for charging
and for data transfer.
› Press the strip to open/close the compart-
ment.
H Openable and adjustable armrest with storage
compartment
There is a USB connection in the compartment.
The USB connection can be used for charging
and for data transfer.
› To open the compartment, lift the armrest.
› Turn the knob to position to open the air A Coat hook
outlet nozzle. Max. load 2 kg
I Storage tray B Storage pocket
Max. load 0.5 kg C Depending on the equipment:
A card holder is located in the compartment. ▶ 230 volt socket and USB connection
› Pull on the handle to open. The USB connection is for charging only.
NOTICE ▶ Storage compartment with 12 volt socket
▶ Do not leave heat-sensitive objects behind in the D Storage tray
glasses compartment D . ▶ Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l
▶ Storage compartment for the reflective vest
E Storage pocket

Storage compartment under the front


seat
Opening the storage compartment
The maximum permissi-
ble load for storage
compartment is 1.5 kg.
Storage space and interior equipment › Storage compartment for an umbrella 211

Storage compartment for an umbrella ✓ There is no object between the pad and the
phone.
Overview

Troubleshooting
A message has been displayed on the Infotainment
screen indicating that the mobile phone cannot be
charged.
▶ Check that there is no object between the pad and
the phone to be charged. If this is the case, remove
the phone and the item. Place the phone centrally
on the phone symbol on the pad again.
▶ Check that the position of the phone to be charged
has not changed. If this is the case, remove the
phone and put it back in the centre of the phone
Phonebox
symbol on the pad.
What you should be mindful of
CAUTION Cup holder
Risk of burns during charging.
▶ The phone may get warm, remove it carefully from Overview
the storage compartment.
Front cup holder
▶ Do not leave any metal objects in the compartment
under the phone. If there is a metallic object in the › Press on the bar to
storage compartment, which has become hot, re- open.
move the phone and let it cool down in the storage In the centre console
compartment! holder area, a bottle can
be opened with one
hand.
Functionality
› Press the bottle into
Functions of the Phonebox the holder and un-
▶ Wireless charging of phones. screw the cap.
▶ Amplification of the telephone signal (only valid for
Rear cup holder
some countries).
The Phonebox is located in the storage compartment
› To open it, open the lid.
in the centre console at the front.
Insert a telephone with a maximum size of 146x80
mm into the storage compartment.
Charging Indicator
When the phone is charging, the in the status bar in
the infotainment screen will light up.
Recommendations for optimal function
✓ The phone is positioned with the screen facing
CAUTION
up.
Risk of scalding!
✓ The protective cover of the phone is removed. ▶ Never put hot beverage containers in the cup hold-
✓ The phone is centred on the phone icon on the er.
pad.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the electrical system and to the
Operating conditions panels due to spilled drinks.

Conditions for wireless charging


✓ Ignition is switched on.
✓ The phone supports the Qi standard.
212 Storage space and interior equipment › Waste container

Waste container Cigarette lighter

Replace bags
› Push in the lighter.
› Wait until the glowing
lighter pops back out.
› Remove the lighter and
use.
› Push the lighter back
in.
The socket of the ciga-
rette lighter serves as a
12 V socket.

Ceiling
Ashtray and cigarette lighter Remove and insert
What you should be mindful of The blanket is in a bag that can be attached to one of
the following locations.
CAUTION
Risk of burning or fire! ▶ On the guide rods of the front headrests.
▶ Do not use the ashtray for storing hot or burning ▶ In the storage pockets on the backs of the front
objects. seats.
▶ Handle the lighter carefully.

Display in rear centre console


Operation
Overview
Removable ashtray
A Set the temperature
The ashtray is inserted in
the cup holder. B Display

NOTICE
When removing, do not hold the ashtray by the lid.
Ashtray with removable insert
Storage space and interior equipment › Tablet holder 213

Tablet holder Removal

Settings
› Press the safety button
and unfold the holder.
Tilt and turn

› Press on the adapter


and remove it.

Adjust size
› Pull out the locking tab
and move the upper
part of the holder to
the desired position.
Set the minimum size of
the empty holder to Insert into the rear armrest
avoid noise while driving.
› Clip the holder into the
opening.

Remove and insert


Fasten behind the headrests
› Place the open adapter
on the front guide rods
of the headrest and
Removal
clip in carefully.
› Press the safety button
and unfold the holder.

› Clip in the holder in the


adapter.

Technical data
The holder is for fixing a tablet with a height of min.
12.2 cm and max. 19.5 cm.
The maximum load for the holder is 0.75 kg.
214 Storage space and interior equipment › Storage compartment for the tablet

Storage compartment for the tablet Troubleshooting

Overview The indicator light flashes red


The socket is switched off for the following reasons.
› Pull A to open at the
▶ Excessive current.
loop.
▶ Low state of charge of the battery.
▶ Overheating of the socket.
› If the reasons given above no longer apply and the
socket is still not switched on automatically, dis-
connect the connected consumer from the socket
and reconnect after a short time.

12-Volt power socket


Operating conditions
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the electrical system of the vehi-
cle!
▶ Use the sockets only for the connection of ap-
proved electrical accessories with a total power
consumption of up to 120 watts.
NOTICE
Danger of damage to the connected consumers!
▶ Switch off the consumers before switching the ig-
nition on or off and before starting the engine.

230-Volt power socket


Functionality
NOTICE
Danger of damage to the connected consumers!
▶ Do not connect a light with fluorescent lamp to the
socket.
▶ Switch off the consumers before switching the ig-
nition on or off and before starting the engine.
Status display
▶ Lit up in green - the socket is switched on.
▶ Blinking green - the socket is still switched on for
about 10 minutes after the engine has been
switched off, as long as a consumer was connected
before the engine was switched off.
The socket has a child safety lock. When insert-
ing the plug, the fuse is unlocked and the socket is
switched on.

Operating conditions
✓ The engine is running.
On vehicles with the START-STOP system, the
socket also works in STOP mode.
Roof rack and hitch › Roof rack 215

Roof rack and hitch › Press the tow bar until


it audibly clicks into
Roof rack place.
Check latching: the in-
Overview dicator light next to
The maximum weight of the load incl. roof rack is the handle lights up
100 kg. green.

Swivel tow bar


NOTICE
▶ No trailer or any other accessory can be connected
to the tow bar.
▶ A socket or adapter may not be plugged into the
socket.
› Pull on the handle. The
Depending on the equipment, the roof bars can be tow bar is unlocked.
attached at the attachment points A and B or to The indicator light next
the roof rail. to the handle flashes
red.
› Slowly retract the han-
Swivelling hitch dle.

What you should be mindful of


WARNING
Risk of an accident! › Swing in the tow bar
▶ Do not manipulate the handle for swinging the tow under the bumper until
bar in and out while a trailer or another accessory it audibly clicks into
is coupled to the tow bar. The tow bar could be un- place.
locked. Check latching: the in-
dicator light next to
CAUTION
the handle lights up
Risk of injury!
green.
▶ Handle the trailer coupling carefully.
▶ When swinging out the tow bar, do not stand in
the middle area of the rear bumper.
NOTICE
Couple or unhitch trailer or accessory
Risk of damage to the trailer coupling!
▶ When not using the towing device, swing the tow The following information describes the procedure
bar under the bumper. for coupling and uncoupling a trailer. The information
also refers to another accessory, e.g. a bike carrier.

Tow bar: swivel out/in WARNING


Risk of an accident!
Swing out the tow bar ▶ Do not use the safety eye for towing.
› Pull on the handle. The ▶ Distribute and fix the load correctly.
tow bar swings out. The trailer has a 13-pin electrical socket. If the
The indicator light next trailer have a 7-pin connector, use a corresponding
to the handle flashes adapter from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
red.
› Slowly retract the han- Coupling
dle. › Swing out the tow bar.
› Put the trailer drawbar onto the ball head.
216 Roof rack and hitch › Swivelling hitch

› Plug the electrical trail- The permissible total weight of the installed acces-
er plug into the socket sory, including its load, corresponds to the maximum
A. load on trailers.
› Hook the tear-off rope If the maximum load in trailer operation is more than
of the trailer onto the 75 kg, then the permissible total weight of the
safety eye B . The mounted accessories including their load must not
tear-off rope must sag exceed 75 kg.
against the vehicle in This value applies if the centre of gravity is at a dis-
all trailer positions. tance of no more than 30 cm from the towing device
ball head.
Uncoupling
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order. If the distance of the centre gravity of the load to
the ball head of the towing device is greater than
Power supply of the trailer power network 30 cm, then the max. permissible total weight of the
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and accessory, including its load, decreases (e.g. at a dis-
trailer, the trailer is powered by the vehicle. tance of 60 cm from the ball head, the permissible
NOTICE weight decreases by half).
Risk of damage to the vehicle electronics! WARNING
The total power consumption of all consumers con- Risk of an accident!
nected to the trailer power supply must not exceed ▶ Do not exceed the maximum vertical load.
350 watts. ▶ The permissible trailer load and the weight of an-
other accessory, e.g. of the bike carrier, is not to be
exceeded.
Troubleshooting
NOTICE
Trailer coupling error Risk of damage to the trailer and the vehicle itself!
The indicator light next to the handle does not light ▶ When using the accessory (e.g. bicycle carrier), ob-
up green, or the tow bar does not lock into place. serve the maximum length and the permissible to-
tal weight of the accessory incl.
› Do not use the trailer coupling.
› Seek the help of a specialist garage.
Tow bar not locked
illuminates
› Engage the tow bar.

Technical data
Maximum vertical load for trailer operation
The maximum vertical load for trailer operation de-
pends on the engine type and the vehicle equipment.
The valid specification for your vehicle can be found
in the technical vehicle documentation, (e.g. vehicle
approval documentation, COC document) or at a
ŠKODA partner.
Other information (e.g. on the nameplate of the trail-
er device) merely provides information on the test
values of the device.
Support load with mounted accessories
When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the
maximum length and the permissible total weight in-
cluding load must be considered.
The maximum length of the mounted accessories
(from the ball of the towing device) may not exceed
70 cm.
Maintaining and cleaning › Service events 217

Maintaining and cleaning and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with
these.
Service events ŠKODA Service Partner
Service intervals All ŠKODA Service Partners operate according to
Compliance with service intervals is crucial for the the most recent guidelines and instructions from
life and value of the vehicle. ŠKODA AUTO. Service and repair work is therefore
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality.
You will be notified about a due service appointment Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps
by the symbol and the corresponding message in ensure road safety and helps keep the vehicle in a
the instrument cluster display. good technical condition.
The specialist garage will inform you of the type of We therefore advise having all modifications, repairs
service interval, the option of changing this and the and technical alterations to the vehicle carried out by
scope of service. a ŠKODA Service Partner.
All services and the replacement or refilling of op-
ŠKODA original parts
erating fluids are chargeable to the customer, even
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Original Parts for
during the warranty period, unless the ŠKODA AUTO
your vehicle, as these parts are approved by ŠKODA
warranty conditions or other binding agreements de-
AUTO. These parts correspond exactly to the ŠKO-
termine otherwise.
DA AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts
Proof of service used in series production.
A specialist garage stores the proof of service in the ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitabili-
information system called Digital Service Plan. ty, and long life of these products.
The proof of service can be printed out. ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of
Show service appointment ŠKODA Genuine Parts for a period of 2 years after
In Infotainment, select the following menu. sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.
Service
ŠKODA original accessories
Or:
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Ac-
Service cessories in your vehicle. With these accessories,
ŠKODA AUTO stands for safety, reliability and the
Resetting information
suitability for your vehicle type.
We recommend that you do not reset the informa-
tion regarding service events on your own. It can ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of
lead to incorrect setting of the service intervals and ŠKODA Genuine Accessories for a period of 2 years
thus also to possible faults in the vehicle. after installation or delivery in accordance with the
materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in
For vehicles with a variable service interval, new
the purchase agreement or any other agreements.
service interval values calculated according to the
previous operating conditions will be displayed after Spoiler
the oil change service indicator is reset. These values
WARNING
will then continue to be adjusted according to the
Risk of an accident!
current operating conditions.
▶ Only use the original spoiler on the front bumper in
combination with the original spoiler on the boot
lid.
Service work, adjustments and technical
▶ The original spoiler on the front bumper cannot be
changes left on its own without the spoiler on the luggage
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO compartment lid or in combination with an unsuita-
must be observed when carrying out any modifica- ble spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
tions, repairs or technical alterations to the vehicle. ▶ We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Serv-
ice Partner for any repairs to or replacement, addi-
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps
tion or removal of spoilers.
ensure road safety and helps keep the vehicle in a
good technical condition. Component protection
We advise only using ŠKODA Original Accessories Some electronic vehicle components (such as the in-
and ŠKODA Original Parts which have been expressly strument cluster) are factory-equipped with compo-
approved for use on your vehicle. Reliability, safety nent protection. This component protection ensures
the functional limitation of these components in a
218 Maintaining and cleaning › Interior

non-legitimate installation in another vehicle (e.g. af- ▶ Do not clean the seats with water or other liquids.
ter a theft) or operation outside the vehicle. ▶ Do not dry the seats by switching on the heating.
Seat belts
Interior NOTICE
Risk of damage to the seat belts.
What you should be mindful of ▶ Do not dry clean the seat belts.

NOTICE ▶ Allow cleaned belts to dry before rolling up.


▶ Use cleaning agents intended for cleaning and care
of the individual materials.
Instructions for cleaning
▶ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical
solvents. Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara® suede /
Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara® suede / material
material › Remove dust and dirt on the surface with a vac-
uum cleaner.
NOTICE
▶ Remove impurities as soon as possible.
› Remove fresh impurities with water, slightly mois-
tened cotton cloth or woolen cloth; if necessary,
▶ Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain use a mild soap solution and wipe with a dry cloth.
remover or similar agents on Alcantara® suede seat
› Remove stubborn stains with a suitable cleaning
upholstery. agent.
Make sure that natural leather is not moistened

› For regular care of natural leather, use the equip-
when cleaning and that no water seeps into the ment provided for this purpose. After each clean,
seams. use a care cream with light protection and impreg-
▶ Do not clean the roof cladding with a brush. nation effect.
NOTICE › When looking after Alcantara®, remove stubborn
Risk of fading to the cover fabric. hair from suede and fabric surfaces with a cleaning
▶ If necessary, do not leave the covers for long peri- brush. Remove pills from materials with a brush.
ods in the blazing sun.
Plastic parts
› Remove impurities with water, slightly moistened
▶ During use, the leather and Alcantara® and suede cloth or sponge with a suitable cleaning agent if
materials may show minor changes (e.g. folds, dis- necessary.
colouration).
Some clothing fabrics, e.g. dark denim, sometimes Windows

do not have sufficient colour fastness. As a result, › Remove impurities with clean water and dry with a
discolouration that is clearly visible on the seat up- cloth provided for this purpose.
holstery can occur. This is not a defect in the fab- Covers of electrically heated seats
ric. › Remove impurities with a suitable cleaning agent.
▶ Sharp-edged zippers, rivets, clamps and similar
Seat belts
garments can damage the upholstery in the vehi-
cle. Such damages cannot be subsequently recog- › Remove impurities with a soft cloth and mild soap
solution.
nised as a justified complaint.
Plastic parts
NOTICE Exterior
Risk of damaging the dash panel. What you should be mindful of
▶ Do not attach fragrances and air fresheners to the
dash panel. WARNING
Risk of an accident!
Windows
After washing the vehicle, the functionality of the
NOTICE brake system may be affected by moisture and, in
Risk of damage to the filaments or the glass antenna. winter, by ice.
▶ Do not stick stickers on the heating filaments. ▶ Dry and clean the brakes by braking several times.

Covers of electrically heated seats


NOTICE
Risk of damaging the heating system.
Maintaining and cleaning › Exterior 219

NOTICE ▶ Foils.
▶ Bird droppings, insect residues, litter and sea salt ▶ Locks.
residues, overflowed fuel, AdBlue® etc. are to be re- ▶ Columns on the vehicle.
moved as soon as possible. ▶ Trailer connection.
▶ Do not use rough sponges, scourers or similar to ▶ Swivelling ball bar.
remove dirt. ▶ Sensors.
▶ Use cleaning agents intended for cleaning and care ▶ Camera lenses.
of the individual materials.
▶ Plastic, chromed and anodised parts.
▶ Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical
solvents. Remove snow and ice
▶ Do not polish the vehicle in a dusty environment. NOTICE
NOTICE ▶ Remove snow and ice with a plastic scraper or a
AdBlue® picks up some materials, e.g. paint and plas- suitable deicing agent.
tics. ▶ Clean the cameras with a hand brush.
▶ Clean the affected area with a damp cloth and cold ▶ Only move the scraper in one direction.
water. ▶ Do not use scratchers or other sharp objects for
▶ Remove any dried solution with warm water and a foils.
sponge. ▶ Do not remove snow and ice with hot or warm wa-
NOTICE ter.
▶ Paint damage should be repaired as soon as possi- ▶ Do not remove snow and ice from surfaces with
ble. coarse dirt.
▶ Do not treat painted parts with or hard waxes.
▶ Do not polish panels.
Instructions for cleaning
▶ Door seals and window guides must not be treated
with anything. Exempted from this are products Handwash
that are ŠKODA Original accessories. These ensure › Wash the vehicle from top to bottom with a soft
that the protective lacquer layer of the seals and sponge or wash glove and plenty of water, if nec-
window guides is not attacked. essary with additional suitable cleaning agents.
▶ Do not use abrasive cleaners to clean the reversing › For foils and headlights, use a mild soap solution
camera. that contains two tablespoons of white neutral
Before driving through a car wash soap to one litre of lukewarm water.
› Observe the usual specifications of the car wash, › Use a glass cleaner for the windscreen wiper
e.g. close all windows, fold the mirrors, etc. blades.
› Move the windscreen wiper lever to position › Wash the cameras with clean water and dry with a
to adjust. suitable clean wipe.
› If there are special attachments on your vehicle, NOTICE
observe the instructions of the car wash operator. ▶ Wash out the sponge or wash mitt regularly.
NOTICE ▶ Use a different sponge for wheels, sills and the
In vehicles with an electric boot lid, this can open au- lower part of the vehicle than that used for the
tomatically due to the pressure of the washing other vehicle parts.
brushes. ▶ Do not wash the vehicle in the blazing sun.
▶ Lock the vehicle, e.g. with the central lock button. ▶ Do not dry the headlights or use sharp objects.
After washing with a wax preservation ▶ Do not put pressure on the bodywork when wash-
ing.
› Wipe off the windscreen wiper blades with a dry
cloth. ▶ The temperature of the washing water may be a
max. 60 °C.
Wash with a pressure washer
After hand washing
NOTICE
Follow the operating instructions for the high-
› Rinse the vehicle and wipe it with a suitable clean

cloth.
pressure cleaner. This particularly applies to infor-
mation with respect to the pressure and spray dis- Vehicle paint
tance from the vehicle surface. › Preserve the varnish at least twice a year with hard
▶ Do not direct the water jet directly at the following wax.
vehicle parts. › Use a polish for matt lacquers.
220 Technical data and specifications › Requirements for the technical data

Foils Technical data and specifications


Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely
normal: this is not an error. Requirements for the technical data
The following factors have a negative effect on the
The emission standard, information on fuel con-
life or colour fastness of the films.
sumption and other information pertaining to your
▶ Sun rays. vehicle can be found listed in the technical vehicle
▶ Moisture. documentation and in the declaration of conformity,
▶ Air pollution. in the so-called COCDocument. The information can
▶ Stones, e.g. the rebound of the cargo during trans- also be requested from a ŠKODA partner.
port on the roof rack. The declaration of conformity can be obtained from
a ŠKODA partner.
Protection of hollow spaces
Corrosion-prone cavities of the vehicle are perma- The details in the technical vehicle documentation
nently protected by preservative wax at the factory. take precedence over the information in this Own-
er's Manual.
› Remove spilled wax with a plastic scraper, clean
stains with mineral spirits. The listed performance values were determined
without performance-reducing equipment, e.g. air
Underbody protection conditioning system.
The underside is permanently protected by the fac-
tory against chemical and mechanical influences. The values listed are for the basic model without any
optional equipment. The values have been deter-
› Have the protective coating checked by a special- mined in accordance with the rules and conditions
ist garage before starting and at the end of the specified in statutory or technical regulations for de-
cold season. termining operational and technical data for motor
Wheels vehicles.
› After washing, preserve the wheels with suitable
means.
Vehicle identification data
NOTICE
Severe dirt on the wheels can result in the wheels Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
unbalancing. The vehicle identification number is found at the fol-
Car jack lowing locations.
› If necessary, treat moving parts with suitable ▶ Directly in the engine compartment on the suspen-
grease. sion turret.
▶ On a plate under the wind shield in the lower left
Trailer towing coupling
corner.
› Coat the ball head of the towing device with a suit-
able grease whenever necessary. ▶ On the rating plate at the bottom of the middle
body pillar on the right side of the vehicle.

Type plate.
A Vehicle manufacturers
B Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The display of the VIN takes place in the infotain-


ment in the following menu item.
Service
Or:
Technical data and specifications › Maximum permissible weights 221

Service Therefore, for every additional 1,000 m in height (or


part), the maximum permissible towed weight must
Engine number
be reduced by 10 %.
The engine number is embossed in the engine block.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights
of the loaded towing vehicle and the loaded trailer.
Maximum permissible weights Payloads
The maximum permissible weights are listed on the It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum
nameplate. payload from the difference between the permissible
total weight and the operating weight.
The type plate is located at the bottom of the middle
body pillar on the right side of the vehicle. The payload consists of the following weights.
▶ The weight of the passengers.
▶ The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
▶ The weight of the roof load including the roof rack
system.
▶ The weight of the equipment that is excluded from
the operating weight.
▶ Trailer bearing load for trailer towing » page 216.
WARNING
Risk of accident and danger of vehicle damage!
▶ Do not exceed the specified values for the maxi-
A Maximum permissible gross weight mum permissible weights.
B Maximum permissible towed weight (towing ve-
hicle and trailer)
Operating weight
C Maximum permissible front axle load
D Maximum permissible rear axle load Information about the operating weight

Maximum permissible towed weight The specification corresponds to the lowest possible
The specified value is valid for altitudes up to 1000 operating weight without additional weight-increas-
m above sea level. ing equipment. This includes 75 kg driver's weight,
the weight of the operating fluids and the on-board
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does tool kit and a fuel tank filled to min. 90%.
the vehicle's climbing power.

Operating weight

Engine type Transmission Operating weight (kg)


Superb Superb Combi
1.4 l/110 kW TSI Manual gearbox 1428 1450
DSG a) 1443 1465
1.5 l/110 kW TSI Manual gearbox - b) - b)
DSG a) - b) - b)
2.0 l/140 kW TSI DSG a) 1535 1557
2.0 l/162 kW TSI DSG a) 1510 1532
2.0 l/200 kW TSI DSG a) 4X4 1645 1667
2.0 l/206 kW TSI DSG a) 4X4 1620 1642
1.6 l/88 kW TDI CR DSG a) 1530 1552
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR Manual gearbox - b) - b)
DSG a) - b) - b)
2.0 l/130 kW TDI CR DSG a) 1535 1557
2.0 l/140 kW TDI CR DSG a) 1589 1611
DSG a) 4x4 1665 1687
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
222 Technical data and specifications › Vehicle dimensions

Engine type Transmission Operating weight (kg)


Superb Superb Combi
b)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.

Ask about the exact vehicle weight in a specialist garage.

Vehicle dimensions
Dimensions

Specification Value (in mm)


Superb Superb Combi
Vehicle height 1469/1468 a) 1477/1476 a)
Vehicle width with folded-in mirrors 1864 1864
Vehicle width with folded-out mir- 2031 2031
rors
Ground clearance of the vehicle - b) - b)
Vehicle length 4869 4862/4863 c)
a)
Applies to the following vehicles: Superb 4x4 / Superb Combi 4x4.
b)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
c)
Applies to the following vehicles: Superb Combi Scout.

Engine specifications ▶ 2.0 l/200 kW TSI » page 224.


▶ 2.0 l/206 kW TSI » page 224.
Overview ▶ 1.6 l/88 kW TDI » page 224.
▶ 1.4 l/110 kW TSI » page 222. ▶ 2.0 l/110 kW TDI » page 224.
▶ 1.5 l/110 kW TSI » page 223. ▶ 2.0 l/130 kW TDI » page 225.
▶ 2.0 l/140 kW TSI » page 223. ▶ 2.0 l/140 kW TDI » page 225.
▶ 2.0 l/162 kW TSI » page 223.

1.4 l/110 kW TSI engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 110/5000-6000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1395
(cm3)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Transmission Manual gearbox DSG a) Manual gearbox DSG a)
Maximum speed (km/h) 220 219 212 211
With specified gear engaged 5 5 5 5
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.6 8.9 8.8 9.0
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
Technical data and specifications › Engine specifications 223

1.5 l/110 kW TSI engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 110/5000-6000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1498
(cm3)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Transmission Manual gearbox DSG a) Manual gearbox DSG a)
Maximum speed (km/h) - b) - b) - b) - b)
With specified gear engaged - b) - b) - b) - b)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) - b) - b) - b) - b)
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
b)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.

2.0 l/140 kW TSI engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 140/4200-6000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 320/1500-4100 (1450-4200) a)
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1984
(cm3)
Transmission DSG b)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Maximum speed (km/h) 240/239 a) 230/229 a)
With specified gear engaged 6 5
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.7 7.7/7.8 a)
a)
Applies to cars with the EU4 emission standard.
b)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

2.0 l/162 kW TSI engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 162/4200-6000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 350/1500-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1984
(cm3)
Transmission DSG a)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Maximum speed (km/h) 247 238
With specified gear engaged 5 5
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.0 7.1
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
224 Technical data and specifications › Engine specifications

2.0 l/200 kW TSI engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 200/5500-6500
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 350/2000-5400
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1984
(cm3)
Transmission DSG a) 4x4
Body Superb Superb Combi
Maximum speed (km/h) 250 250
With specified gear engaged 6 6
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 5.6 5.7
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

2.0 l/206 kW TSI engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 206/5600-6500
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 350/1700-5600
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1984
(cm3)
Transmission DSG a) 4x4
Body Superb Superb Combi
Maximum speed (km/h) 250 250
With specified gear engaged 6 6
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 6.0 6.1
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

1.6 l/88 kW TDI CR engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 88/3500-4000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1500-3250
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1598
(cm3)
Transmission DSG a)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Maximum speed (km/h) 205 197
With specified gear engaged 7 7
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.1 11.3
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 110/3000-4200
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1968
(cm3)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Transmission Manual gearbox DSG a) Manual gearbox DSG a)
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 340/1700-2750 360/1700-2750 340/1700-2750 360/1700-2750
Maximum speed (km/h) - b) - b) - b) - b)
With specified gear engaged - b) - b) - b) - b)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) - b) - b) - b) - b)
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.
b)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
Technical data and specifications › Event Data Recorder 225

2.0 l/130 kW TDI CR engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 130/3600-4000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 350/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1968
(cm3)
Transmission DSG a)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Maximum speed (km/h) 232 223
With specified gear engaged 6 6
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.5 8.6
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

2.0 l/140 kW TDI CR engine


Power (kW at 1/min) 140/3500-4000
Highest torque (Nm at 1/min) 400/1900-3300
Number of cylinders/displacement 4/1968
(cm3)
Body Superb Superb Combi
Transmission DSG a) DSG a) 4x4 DSG a) DSG a) 4x4
Maximum speed (km/h) 240 232 230 223
With specified gear engaged 7 7 7 7
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.3 8.0 8.4 8.1
a)
Automatic dual-clutch transmission.

Event Data Recorder off at the relevant time, whether these were only
partially available or were inactive, it is also possible
The vehicle is equipped with a device that acts as an to track whether these vehicle functions controlled,
event data recorder (hereinafter referred to solely as accelerated or braked the vehicle during the acci-
“EDR”). The main purpose of the EDR is to record da- dent. Depending on the equipment, these functions
ta during a traffic accident or other exceptional traf- are, e.g:
fic situation (hereinafter referred to solely as “acci- ▶ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).
dent”) during which the restraint systems are activa-
▶ Lane Assist.
ted.
▶ Park Assist.
The EDR records the accident in a short time (ap-
▶ Emergency brake function (Front Assist).
proximately 10 seconds), including the following in-
formation, for example: EDR data is only recorded if an accident causes the
restraint systems to be activated. Under normal driv-
▶ The function of certain systems in the vehicle.
ing conditions no data is recorded and there is no au-
▶ The seat belt status of the driver and front passen-
dio or video recording of the vehicle interior or the
ger. vehicle environment. Personal data such as name,
▶ The actuation of the brake and accelerator pedals. gender, age or location at which the accident occur-
▶ The speed of the vehicle at the time of the acci- red is also not stored in the EDR. However, third par-
dent. ties such as law enforcement authorities may use
The recorded data helps with the analysis of how the certain resources to connect EDR content to other
vehicle systems were behaving shortly before, dur- data sources, and therefore deduce the identification
ing and shortly after the accident, thereby ensuring of some of the people involved in the accident when
better information regarding the circumstances un- investigating the causes of the accident.
der which the accident occurred, resulting in materi- Reading out the EDR data requires special equip-
al damage and possibly personal injury. ment with specific access authorisation, a legally
The data relating to assist systems in the vehicle is prescribed diagnostic connection in the vehicle (“on-
then also recorded. In addition to the information on board diagnostics”) and the ignition to be switched
whether the affected systems were switched on or on.
226 Technical data and specifications › Information about the radio systems in the vehicle

ŠKODA AUTO will not read or otherwise process any Rights arising from defective
accident data from the EDR without the approval of performance, ŠKODA Warranty for new
the vehicle owner or other person authorised for use
of the vehicle. Exceptions are specified in the con- cars, ŠKODA Mobility Warranty and
tractual arrangements, or are subject to generally Optional ŠKODA Extended Warranty
binding regulations.
Rights arising from defective performance
Due to legal requirements, ŠKODA AUTO is required Your ŠKODA Partner, as a seller, is liable to you for
to monitor the quality and safety of its products, material defects in your new ŠKODA vehicle, ŠKODA
meaning that it is only entitled to use data from the Genuine Parts and ŠKODA Genuine Accessories, in
EDR to monitor the product on the market, for fur- accordance with the legal requirements and the pur-
ther research and development, and to improve the chase contract.
quality of the vehicle's safety systems. For the pur-
The buyer is entitled to assert the rights arising from
pose of research and development, ŠKODA AUTO
defective performance with the responsible ŠKODA
will also make data available to third parties. This is
partner from the time of vehicle handover. The date
done exclusively in anonymous form, i.e. without any
of the vehicle handover is properly documented to-
connection to the specific vehicle, the vehicle owner
gether with the vehicle identification number (VIN) in
or any other authorised user.
the chapter "Documentation of vehicle handover" in
this Owner's Manual.
Information about the radio systems in ŠKODA warranty for new cars
the vehicle Beyond the rights arising from defective perform-
ance under the law, the company ŠKODA AUTO
Your vehicle has various radio systems. grants you the ŠKODA warranty for new cars (here-
Manufacturers of this radio equipment declare that inafter referred to as ŠKODA Warranty), according
this equipment complies with the requirements of to the conditions described below.
Directive 2014/53 / EU and the Technical Regula- Under the ŠKODA Warranty, the company ŠKODA
tion on Radio Equipment, approved by the Deci- AUTO shall provide the following services.
sion of the Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine of 25
▶ Free repair of damage due to a defect that occurs
May 2017 no. 355. in your vehicle within two years of the start of the
ŠKODA Warranty.
▶ Free repair of damage due to paintwork flaws that
occur on your vehicle within three years of the
start of the ŠKODA Warranty.
▶ Free repair of rust corrosion on the body, which
To display information about Directive 2014/53 /
EUon the approximation of the laws of the Member occurs on your vehicle within twelve years of the
States relating to the marketing of radio equipment, start of the warranty. In terms of rust corrosion on
Technical regulation on radio equipment, approved the body, the ŠKODA Warranty shall cover only
by the decision of the Cabinet of Ministers of Uk- rust corrosion through body panels from the inside
raine of May 25, 2017 No. 355 as well as regarding to the outside.
declaration of conformity ,proceed as follows. The start of the ŠKODA Warranty is the day on
1. Import the QR code or enter the following ad- which the new car is handed over for use by a ŠKO-
dress in the web browser. DA partner to the first buyer who is not a ŠKODA
Partner1).
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
2. Click on “Choose your manual”. The ŠKODA Partner enters this date into the corre-
sponding systems of the manufacturer. Any one
3. Select the desired model - a menu with the in-
ŠKODA Partner can notify you of this date on re-
structions will be displayed.
quest.
4. Select the construction period and the language.
5. Choose the Information on Directive 2014/53 / Vehicle repairs under the ŠKODA Warranty can be
EU or Information on the Technical Regulations carried out by means of a replacement or repair of
on Radio Systems No. 355 file in PDF format. the defective parts. The ŠKODA Service Partner de-
cides about the type of vehicle repair. The vehicle re-
pair takes place in accordance with the availability of
the ŠKODA Service partners and within a reasonable

1) Due to the requirements of the generally binding country-specific legal regulations, the date of the first
registration can be specified instead of the date of the vehicle handover.
Technical data and specifications › Rights arising from defective performance, ŠKODA Warranty for new cars, ŠKODA Mobility Warranty and Optional ŠKODA Extended Warranty 227

period of time. Replaced parts become the property are on the move, you can access services to ensure
of the ŠKODA service partner. your continued mobility. These services include the
There shall be no entitlement to further claims from following: Breakdown service at the breakdown lo-
the ŠKODA Warranty. In particular, no claim for re- cation and towing to the ŠKODA Service Partner,
placement, no right of withdrawal, no claim to provi- technical assistance by phone or on-site operation.
sion of a replacement car for the duration of repair If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, then
and compensation. the ŠKODA service partner may, if necessary, ar-
The ŠKODA Warranty can be claimed at any ŠKODA range additional subsequent services, such as re-
service partner. placement transport (bus, train, etc.), the provision of
a replacement vehicle, and the like.
There are no claims under the ŠKODA warranty if
vehicle damage has occurred in causal connection Claims for free provision of services under the ŠKO-
with one of the following circumstances. DA Mobility Warranty only exist if your vehicle has
remained in a causal connection with a defect which
▶ The service work was not carried out on time and
is to be remedied on the basis of fulfilment under the
professionally according to the specifications of
ŠKODA Warranty.
ŠKODA AUTO, or its execution was not proven by
the customer when asserting claims under the Check the conditions for provision of the Mobility
ŠKODA Warranty. Warranty for your vehicle with your ŠKODA Partner.
▶ Damage refers to parts that are subject to natural
They will also inform you of the detailed terms and
wear, such as tyres, spark plugs, wiper blades, conditions of the Mobility Warranty in relation to
brake pads and brake discs, clutch, bulbs, syn- your vehicle. In the event that your vehicle is not
chronizer rings, batteries, etc. covered by a mobility warranty, he will inform you of
the possibilities for subsequent conclusion.
▶ The damage refers to third-party superstructures,
third-party installations and third-party installa- Optional ŠKODA Extended Warranty
tions as well as defects in the vehicle caused by If you also purchased a ŠKODA warranty extension
these. when purchasing your new car, ŠKODA AUTO will
▶ The same applies to accessories that were not in- provide you with a free repair of vehicle damage
stalled and/or delivered by the factory. caused by a defect in the vehicle during the warranty
▶ On/in the vehicle, parts have been attached, instal- period.
led or connected, the use of which has not been The ŠKODA Extended Warranty for your vehicle is
approved by ŠKODA AUTO, or the vehicle has valid for the agreed period or until the agreed mile-
been modified in a manner not approved by ŠKO- age limit is reached, whichever comes first.
DA AUTO (e.g. tuning).
For the evaluation of claims under the ŠKODA Exten-
▶ Unauthorized use, improper handling (e.g. use in ded Warranty, the same rules apply as for the ŠKO-
motor sport competitions or overloading), improp- DA Warranty.
er care and maintenance or unauthorized modifica-
tions to your vehicle. The vehicle repair under the ŠKODA Extended War-
ranty can therefore only be carried out by replace-
▶ Failure to comply with regulations in the Owner's
ment or repair of the defective parts, whereby the
Manual or in other factory-supplied instructions.
ŠKODA service partner decides on the type of vehi-
▶ External impact or influences (e.g. accident, hail,
cle repair. The vehicle repair takes place in accord-
flood, etc.). ance with the availability of the ŠKODA Service part-
▶ Damage has not been reported immediately to a ners and within a reasonable period of time.
specialist company or has not been properly rem-
There shall in any case be no entitlement to further
edied.
claims from the ŠKODA Extended Warranty. In par-
The customer shall prove the lack of causation. ticular, no claim for replacement, no right of with-
The present ŠKODA Warranty shall not affect the drawal, no claim to provision of a replacement car
purchaser's statutory rights arising from unsatisfac- for the duration of repair and compensation.
tory performance in respect of the seller of the vehi- The ŠKODA Extended Warranty does not apply to
cle and possible claims arising from product liability exterior and interior foils.
laws.
Your ŠKODA partner will provide you with informa-
ŠKODA Mobility warranty tion about the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA Ex-
The Mobility Warranty provides you with a sense of tended Warranty.
certainty for journeys in your vehicle.
The ŠKODA Mobility Warranty and the ŠKODA
As part of the mobility warranty, if your car breaks Extended Warranty are only available in some coun-
down as a result of an unexpected fault when you tries.
228 Index

Index Analogue instrument panel 56


Android Auto
A Infotainment Amundsen 115
Infotainment Bolero 92
ABS Infotainment Columbus 149
Functionality 168 Infotainment Swing 73
Troubleshooting 169 see electronic version of the manual 5
ACC 172 Anti-lock Braking System
Automatic stop and start 172 see ABS 168
Distance adjustment 173 Anti-Slip Regulation
Functionality 172 see ASR 168
Indicator light 172 Apple CarPlay
Interruption of cruise control 173 Infotainment Amundsen 115
Lever 173 Infotainment Bolero 92
Operation 173 Infotainment Columbus 149
Restriction 173 Infotainment Swing 73
Setting in Infotainment 174 see electronic version of the manual 5
Troubleshooting 174 Armrest
Accident data recorder 225 Front 35
Active steering assistance Rear 35
DSR 168 Ashtray 212
Adaptive Cruise Control ASR
see ACC 172 Deactivation and activation 169
AdBlue 187 Functionality 168
Check 187 Troubleshooting 169
functionality 187 Assist system for emergency situations
Indicator light 187 Functionality 178
Refilling 187 Operating conditions 178
Safety 15 Usage 178
standard 187 Assist systems
tank capacity 188 Driver assist 168
Air bag Park Assist 179
Switch off 43 Assistance systems
Air conditioning system Safety 17
see Climatronic 53 Auto Hold 167
Airbag 43 Activation/deactivation 168
Deployment 43 Functionality 167
Functionality 43 Operating conditions 167
Overview 43 Automatic drive
Safety 16 Launch control 161
Switching off front passenger airbag 44 Automatic gearbox 160
Troubleshooting 44 Driving in neutral 161
Alarm system 23 indicator light 162
Conditions 24 Kick-down 161
Deactivation 24 Lever positions 160
Functionality 23 Manually changing gear with the selector lever
Setting 24 161
Trailer 24 manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
All-season tyres the steering wheel 161
Conditions 196 Operation 161
Settings 196 Releasing selector lever 161
Usage 196 Selector lever emergency unlocking 162
What you should be mindful of 196 Starting up 161
Ambient lighting 50 Stopping 161
Analogue Troubleshooting 161
instrument panel 56 Automatic gearbox modes 160
Analogue instrument cluster Automatic headlights system
Overview 56 Setting 46
Setting 56 Automatic transmission
Index 229

Starting 159 Infotainment Columbus 151


Auxiliary heating and ventilation Infotainment Swing 75
Change the battery in the remote control 56 Breakdown kit
Operating conditions 55 Conditions 199
Operation 55 Overview 198
Settings 55 Purpose 199
Troubleshooting 56 Restriction 199
Usage 54 Bulbs 48
what you should be mindful of 54 Front turn signal - Replacing 49
Rear turn signal - Replacing 49
B Reversing light - Replacing 49
Backup camera Safety 48
Functional surfaces 180 C
Orientation 180
Battery Car adaptations
see vehicle battery 190 Recommendations 217
Battery acid 190 Car wash
Blinker Outside 219
see flashing light 45 Cargo elements 203
Bluetooth CarStick 114
see electronic version of the manual 5 CD/DVD
Bluetooth® player Infotainment Columbus 133
Infotainment Columbus 133 Central locking 21
Bonnet 184 Central locking system
Boot 202 Button 22
12 volt socket 202 Fault 22
Double-sided floor covering 205 Functionality 21
Fasteners 203 Operation 22
Rigid cover 206 SAFE function 21
Storage compartments 202 Setting 22
Transporting objects safely 17 Centre console 9
Variable loading floor 208 Changing gear
Boot cover 206, 207 Manually changing gear with the selector lever
Boot lid 161
Automatic locking 29 manually changing gear with the shift paddles on
Conditions for contactless operation 30 the steering wheel 161
Contactless operation 31 Changing gear with a
electrical operation 29 manual gearbox 160
manual operation 29 Changing gears with an
Restriction of contactless operation 31 automatic gearbox 160
Setting non-contact operation 31 Charging your phone wirelessly 211
Boot storage Check the vehicle before your journey 15
see boot compartment lid 29 Child lock 25
Brake fluid 166 Child seat 40
Checking 166 Child seat fastened with a belt 42
Indicator light 166 Grouping 41
Safety 15 i-Size 42
Specification 166 Installation 42
Brakes 166 ISOFIX 41, 42
Brake fluid 166 Keyword child seat 40
Brake pads 166 On the passenger seat 40
Parking brake 166 Recommended child seats 41
Troubleshooting 166 Safety 16
What you should be mindful of 166 Securing children properly 16
Braking systems 168 TOP TETHER 42
Breakdown call What you should be mindful of 40
Infotainment Amundsen 117 Cigarette lighter 212
Infotainment Bolero 94 Cleaning the vehicle
230 Index

Outside 218 Misfuelling protection 189


Climatronic Prescribed fuel 190
Automatic mode 53 Refilling 189
Climatronic Display 53 Requirements for refuelling 189
Display in the centre console at the back 212 Standards 189
Operating conditions for the cooling system 53 Tank capacity 190
Operation 53 Troubleshooting 190
Recirculated air mode 53 Digital
Setting 54 instrument cluster 57
Troubleshooting 54 Digital instrument cluster 57
What you should be mindful of 53 Additional Information 57, 58
COMING HOME 47 Overview 57
functionality 47 Presentation 57
Operating conditions 47 Setting 57
Setting 47 Display of the instrument cluster
Compartments 209, 210 Operation 58
Configuration wizard Door
Infotainment Amundsen 97 Opening/closing 25
Infotainment Bolero 78 Double-sided floor covering in the boot
Infotainment Columbus 125 Double-sided floor covering 205
Infotainment Swing 62 DriveGreen 163
Convenience signalling 45 Driver Alert
Setting 46 Activation/deactivation 178
Coolant 185 fatigue detection assistant 178
Checking 185 Functionality 178
Indicator light 185 Indicator light 178
Refilling 185 Driver's seat 9
Safety 15 Driving data 59
Specification 185 Display 59
Temperature gauge 185 Memory 59, 60
Troubleshooting 186 Overview 59
Crew Protect Assist Setting 60
Functionality 177 Speed limit warning 60
see Proactive occupant protection 177 Driving with trailer
Troubleshooting 177 Safety 17
Crew Protect Assist system Trailer Stability Assist 169
Deactivation 177 DSR 168
Cruise control 171 Dynamic Light Assist
Functionality 171 see Headlight Assist System 48
Indicator light 171
Operation 172 E
Troubleshooting 172 Earth point 192
Cup holder 211 Economical driving
D Drive Green 163
Tips for economical driving 163
Data connection - Infotainment Amundsen EDL 168
CarStick 114 Electric parking brake 166
Settings 114 Troubleshooting 167
Data connection - Infotainment Columbus Electric windows
Settings 148 Activation 26
SIM card in external module 148 Buttons on the door 26
Date Force limiter 25
Infotainment Amundsen 97 Operation 26
Infotainment Bolero 78 Settings 26
Infotainment Columbus 125 Troubleshooting 26
Infotainment Swing 62 Electronic Differential Lock
Daytime running lights 45 EDL 168
Diesel 189 XDL+ 168
Index 231

Electronic Stability Control 168 F


Electronic voice amplification for driver and
passenger 78, 98, 126 Factory settings
Emergency Infotainment Amundsen 97
Emergency call 18 Infotainment Bolero 78
Selector lever emergency unlocking 162 Infotainment Columbus 125
Towing the vehicle 165 Infotainment Swing 62
Unlocking/locking the door 22 Fasteners in the boot 203
Using jump start cables 191 First aid kit 202
Emergency Assist Floor covering in the luggage compartment
see assist systems for emergency situations 178 Fasten the floor covering 205
Emergency Assist System 178 Fog light
Emergency call 18 Rear 46
Emergency equipment Fog lights 46
Extinguisher 202 Front 46
First aid kit 202 Fogged windows 53
Jack 203 Freewheeling
Reflective vest 202 See Driving in neutral 161
Tool kit 203 Front Assist 169
Warning triangle 202 automatic braking 169
Emergency wheel 197 distance warning system 169
Safe driving 17 Functionality 169
Take out and insert 197 Operating conditions 169
Engine compartment 10 restriction 170
Bonnet 184 setting 170
Brake fluid 166 Troubleshooting 170
Coolant 185 Front seats
Engine oil 184 Electrical adjustment 32
Safety 15 Manual adjustment 32
Vehicle battery 190 Memory function for electrically adjustable seats
Windscreen washer fluid 51 33
Engine number 220 Store the position of the electrically adjustable seat
Engine oil 184 33
Changing 184 Front vehicle area 7
Checking 184 Fuel
Indicator light 184 Diesel 189
Refilling 184 Petrol 188
Safety 15 Fuel filler flap 187
Specification 184 Fuel filter 187
Engine start Fuel tank 187
Starter button 159 Opening the flap 187
Troubleshooting 159 Full LED headlights 45
Using jump start cables 191 Fuses
EPC 186 Blown fuse 192
Equipment in the boot 202 In the dash panel 192
ESC 168 In the engine compartment 194
Functionality 168 Replacing 192
Troubleshooting 169 H
ESC Sport
Activate/Deactivate 169 Hazard warning light system 46
Exhaust control system 186 Headlight Assist System 48
Explanations 6 Activation and deactivation in Infotainment 48
Exterior Functionality 48
lighting 45 Turn off 48
Exterior mirror 37 Turn on 48
External Mirrors Headlights
Adjust the position of the mirror surface and the Full LED 45
mirror housing 37 Full LED setting 47
Extinguisher 202 Headlight range control 46
232 Index

Headrests Show main menu 107


Adjusting the height 34 Supported sources 108
Removing and inserting 34 Touch operation 107
Heated Images - Infotainment Bolero
steering wheel 37 Gesture control 87
Heated seats Main menu overview 87
Conditions 35 Settings 88
Settings 36 Show main menu 87
Heated steering wheel Supported files 88
Conditions 37 Supported sources 88
Operation 37 Touch operation 87
Settings 37 Images - Infotainment Columbus
Heated windscreen Gesture control 137
Operation 29 Main menu overview 137
Setting 29 Show main menu 137
HHC Supported files 138
see Hill Hold Control 168 Supported sources 138
High beam Touch operation 137
Headlight Assist System 48 Images- Infotainment Columbus
High beam assist system Settings 138
Functionality 47 Immobilizer 159
High-beam Indicator lights
High-beam assist system 47 Foreword 10
High-beam assist Overview 10
Activation and deactivation in the infotainment Information call
system 48 Infotainment Amundsen 117
Conditions 47 Infotainment Bolero 94
Switching off 48 Infotainment Columbus 151
Switching on 48 Infotainment swing 75
High-beam assist system 47 Information Sport 61
High-beam Assist System Infotainment Amundsen
Conditions 48 Basic settings 97
Hill Descent Assist System 178 Data connection 114
Activation/deactivation 179 Function restriction 97
Functionality 178 Keypad 99
Operating conditions 178 MENU menu 97
Hill Hold Control 168 Operation by touch 98
HOME menu Overview 97
Infotainment Columbus 125 Restart 98
Hook System update 98
In the interior 210 System version 98
Hooks Voice control 100
in the boot 203 Infotainment Bolero
Hotspot Basic settings 78
see electronic version of the manual 5 Function restriction 62, 78
Keypad 79
I MENU menu 77
i-Size 42 Operation by touch 79
ICC Overview 77
Electronic voice amplification for driver and Restart 78
passenger 78, 98, 126 System update 78
Ice scraper 8 System version 78
Images Voice control 81
see electronic version of the manual 5 Infotainment Columbus
Images - Infotainment Amundsen Basic settings 125
Gesture control 107 Data connection 148
Main menu overview 107 Function restriction 125
Settings 107 HOME menu 125
Keypad 128
Index 233

MENU menu 125 Keypad 64


Operation by touch 127 Operation by touch 63
Overview 125 Overview 62
Restart 126 Restart 63
System update 126 System update 63
System version 126 System version 63
Voice control 129 Touch operation 63
Infotainment Columbus Operation Instrument cluster
Touch operation 127 Instrument cluster display 58
Infotainment keyboard Instrument cluster display 58
see electronic version of the manual 5 Menu 58
Infotainment keypad Amundsen Overview 58
Additional keypad languages 100 Interior
Character variants 100 lighting 50
Find 100 Interior lighting 50
Overview 99 Ambient lighting 50
Service 100 Operation 50
Setting additional keypad languages 100 Settings 50
Infotainment keypad Bolero Interior monitoring - Deactivation 24
Additional keypad languages 80 Interior rear-view mirror 37
Character variants 80 see interior rear-view mirror 37
Overview 79 ISOFIX
Search 80 Functionality 42
Service 80 Use of child seats 41
Setting additional keypad languages 80
Infotainment keypad Columbus J
Additional keypad languages 128 Jukebox
Character variants 128 Infotainment Columbus 133
Find 128 Jump start cables 192
Operation 128 Jump-starting 191
Overview 128
Setting additional keypad languages 128 K
Infotainment keypad Swing
Additional keypad languages 64 Key
Character variants 64 Changing the battery 20
Find 64 Memory function of the key 21
Operation 64 Overview 20
Overview 64 Remove the key bit 20
Setting additional keypad languages 64 Troubleshooting 20
Infotainment overview Key switch for switching off airbag 44
Amundsen 97 Keyless locking (KESSY) 23
Bolero 77 Deactivation 23
Swing 62 Operation 23
Infotainment Overview Protection against locking the key inside the
Columbus 125 vehicle 23
Infotainment screen Amundsen Purpose 23
Overview 98 Troubleshooting 23
Settings 99 L
Infotainment screen Bolero
Overview 79 Lane Assist 174
Settings 79 Conditions 175
Infotainment screen Columbus Restriction 175
Overview 127 see Lane Assist 174
Settings 127 Setting 175
Infotainment screen Swing Troubleshooting 175
Overview 63 Lane change assist system
Settings 64 see Side Assist 175
Infotainment Swing Lap timer
Basic settings 62 Infotainment 61
234 Index

Launch control 161 Net partition 205


LEAVING HOME 47 Luggage Compartment
functionality 47 Multifunctional pocket 204
Operating conditions 47 Luggage Storage
Setting 47 Fastening the floor covering 205
Lever Lever for folding forward the rear seat backrests
ACC 173 202
Cruise control 172 Net on the cover 202
Headlight Assist System 48 removable light 202
High beam 45 roll-up cover 207
High-beam assist 48
Speed limiter 171 M
Turn signal 45 Main beam 45
Windscreen wiper and washer 51 Manoeuvre Assist
Liability for defects 226 Operating conditions 182
Light 45 Restriction 182
Change bulbs 48 Troubleshooting 182
Changing bulbs 48 Manual air conditioning
Clean headlights 51 Operating conditions for the cooling system 52
CORNER function 45 Operation 52
Daytime running lights 45 Recirculated air mode 52
Driving in the opposite direction of traffic 47 see manual air conditioning 52
Fog light 46 Troubleshooting 53
Full LED headlights 45 What you should be mindful of 52
Hazard warning lights 46 Manual gearbox 160
Headlight Assist System 48 MATRIX headlights
Headlight range control of the headlights 46 see Headlight Assist System 48
High beam 45 MCB 169
High-beam assist system 47 Media
Indicator light 47 see electronic version of the manual 5
Low beam 45, 46 Media - Infotainment Amundsen
Parking light 46 Main menu 104
Sidelights 46 safely remove the connected device 104
Switching on and off 45 SD card 104
Switching on and off automatically 45, 46 Service 104
Troubleshooting 47 Settings 104
Turn signal 45 Supported audio files 105
Light Assist Supported playlists 105
see high beam assist system 47 Supported sources 105
Light switch 45 Title playback including subfolders 104
Lighting Traffic news 104
Ambient lighting 50 USB device 104
Lighting range 46 what you should be mindful of 104
Limiter Wireless player 104
see speed limiter 170 Media - Infotainment Bolero
List of radio stations Main menu 84
see electronic version of the manual 5 Operation 84
Load-through device 35 safely remove the connected device 84
Loads 221 SD card 84
Lock Settings 84
Setting 22 Supported audio files 86
Locking Supported playlists 86
Central locking button 22 Supported sources 86
Emergency locking 22 things to be considered 84
functionality 21 Title playback including subfolders 84
Keyless 23 Traffic 84
Low beam 45, 46 USB device 84
Luggage compartment Media - Infotainment Columbus
Fastening nets 204
Index 235

Bluetooth® player 133 Infotainment Columbus 125


CD / DVD 133 Mirror
Main menu 132 see exterior mirror 37
Manage jukebox 133 MirrorLink
Operation 133 Infotainment Amundsen 115
Safely remove the connected device 133 Infotainment Bolero 92
SD card 133 Infotainment Columbus 149
Settings 133 Infotainment Swing 73
Supported audio files 135 see electronic version of the manual 5
Supported playlists 135 Mirrors
Supported sources 135 Set functions 38
Title playback including subfolders 133 Troubleshooting 38
Traffic news 133 Mobile device management - Infotainment
USB device 133 Amundsen
what you should be mindful of 132 Connect a mobile device to Infotainment 111
Wireless player 133 Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile
Media - Infotainment Swing device 111
Main menu 67 Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
Safely remove the connected device 67 mobile device 111
SD card 67 Mobile Device Management - Infotainment
Service 67 Amundsen 110
Settings 67 Applications in mobile devices 110
Supported audio files 69 delete a paired mobile device 111
Supported playlists 69 Disconnect from a mobile device 111
Supported sources 69 Mobile device Bluetooth compatibility 110
Title playback including subfolders 67 Mobile device compatibility 110
Traffic news 67 possible connection types 110
USB device 67 Mobile device management - Infotainment Bolero
what you should be mindful of 67 Applications in mobile devices 89
Media Command Bluetooth compatibility of mobile devices 89
see electronic version of the manual 5 Compatibility of mobile devices 89
Media Command - Infotainment Amundsen Connect a mobile device to Infotainment 90
Connection to the Infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile
109 device 90
Functionality 108 Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
Functionality restrictions 109 mobile device 90
Main menu 108 Mobile Device Management - Infotainment Bolero
Operating conditions 108 89
Operation 108 delete a paired mobile device 90
Settings 109 Disconnect from a mobile device 90
ŠKODA Media Command application 109 possible connection types 89
Supported files 109 Mobile device management - Infotainment
Media Command - Infotainment Columbus Columbus
Connection to the infotainment Wi-Fi hotspot 141 Connect a mobile device to Infotainment 143
Functionality restrictions 141 Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile
Main menu 140 device 143
Operating conditions 140 Connect Infotainment to a previously connected
Operating method 140 mobile device 143
Operation 140 Mobile Device Management - Infotainment
Settings 141 Columbus 141
ŠKODA Media Command application 141 Applications in mobile devices 142
supported files 141 delete a paired mobile device 143
Memory function of the key 21 Disconnect from a mobile device 143
Save seating position 21 Mobile device Bluetooth compatibility 142
Memory function of the seat 33 Mobile device compatibility 142
Save position 33 possible connection types 141
MENU menu rSAP 143
Infotainment Amundsen 97 Set network parameters 143
Infotainment Bolero 77 SIM card in external module 143
236 Index

Mobile device management - Infotainment Swing Change route destinations from each other 153
Connect a mobile device to Infotainment 71 Demo mode 157
Connect Infotainment to a non-paired mobile Destination information 157
device 71 Driving with a trailer 157
Connect Infotainment to a previously connected Enter destination via the address 153
mobile device 71 Find destination 153
Mobile Device Management - Infotainment Swing Home address 157
70 Information on driving time 157
Applications in mobile devices 70 List of stored destinations 153
delete a paired mobile device 71 Manual online update 158
Disconnect from a mobile device 71 Map overview 153
Mobile device Bluetooth compatibility 70 Map scale 153
Mobile device compatibility 70 Navigation announcements 153
possible connection types 70 Navigation database version 158
Motor Slip Regulation POI categories 157
see MSR 168 Route calculation 153
MSR 168 Route overview 153
Multi-Collision Brake Select destination in the map 153
see MCB 169 Select destination you are looking for 153
Multifunctional pocket 204 Select the stored destination 153
Set navigation announcements 157
N Settings 157
Navigation - infotainment Amundsen Show main menu 153
Fuel warning 123 Speed limit warning 157
Navigation - Infotainment Amundsen Speed limits 157
Change route destinations 119 Starting point of demo mode 157
Demo mode 123 Touch operation 156
Destination information 123 Traffic obstruction 157
Driving with a trailer 123 Traffic sign display 157
Enter destination via the address 119 Update the navigation database 158
Find destination 119 Waypoint mode 153
Home address 123 Net partition 205
Information on driving time 123 Nets in the luggage compartment 204
List of stored destinations 119 O
Map overview 119
Map scale 119 Offroad 162
Navigation announcements 119 Oil
Navigation database version 124 see engine oil 184
POI categories 123 Online services - Infotainment Amundsen
Route calculation 119 Breakdown call 117
Route summary 119 Change users 118
Select destination in the map 119 Connection status 118
Select destination you are looking for 119 Delete users 118
Select the stored destination 119 Information call 117
Set navigation announcements 123 Registration and activation of online services 118
Settings 123 Rights and obligations 117
Show main menu 119 Set the level of protection for personal data 118
Speed limit warning 123 Settings 118
Speed limits 123 ŠKODA Connect application 117
Starting point of demo mode 123 ŠKODA Connect Portal website 117
Touch operation 123 ŠKODA Connect website 117
Traffic obstruction 123 Online Services - Infotainment Amundsen
Traffic sign display 123 Local service 118
Update the navigation database 124 Private mode 118
Navigation - infotainment Columbus Service management 118
Fuel warning 157 Switch services on / off 118
Navigation - Infotainment Columbus Online Services - Infotainment Bolero
Automatic online update 158 Breakdown call 94
Index 237

Change user 95 Operation of Infotainment Amundsen


Connection status 95 by touch 98
Delete user 95 Operation of Infotainment Bolero
Information call 94 by touch 79
Local service 95 Overspeed limiter
Private mode 95 functionality 170
Registration and activation of online services 95
Rights and obligations 94 P
Service management 95 Park Assist
Setting the level of protection of personal data 95 Change parking mode 183
Settings 95 exiting from a longitudinal parking space 183
ŠKODA Connect Application 94 functionality 182
ŠKODA Connect Portal Website 94 Operating conditions 182
ŠKODA Connect Website 94 Operation 182
Switch services on / off 95 Parking 183
Online services - Infotainment Columbus Parking operation 183
Delete users 152 Purpose 182
Set the level of protection for personal data 152 Restriction 183
ŠKODA Connect Application 151 see park steering assistant 182
ŠKODA Connect Portal website 151 Troubleshooting 183
ŠKODA Connect website 151 Turn on/turn off 182
Online Services - Infotainment Columbus What you should be mindful of 182
Breakdown call 151 Park Assist systems 179
Change user 152 Park Pilot
Connection status 152 Operating conditions 179
Information call 151 Operation 179
Localisation services 152 Restriction 180
Private mode 152 Setting 180
Registration and activation of online services 152 Troubleshooting 180
Rights and obligations 151 Parking
Service management 152 Park steering assistant 182
Settings 152 Parking aid 179
Switch services on / off 152 Parking the vehicle safely 18
Online Services - Infotainment Swing Rear Traffic Alert 182
Breakdown call 75 Reversing camera 180
Change user 76 Parking aid
Connection status 76 functionality 179
Delete user 76 Overview 179
Information call 75 Parking brake 166
Local service 76 see electric parking brake 166
Private mode 76 Parking light 46
Registration and activation of online services 76 ParkPilot
Rights and obligations 75 see parking aid 179
Service management 76 Particle filter 186
Setting the level of protection of personal data 76 Particle Filter
Settings 76 Troubleshooting 186
ŠKODA Connect Application 75 Particulate Filter
ŠKODA Connect Portal Website 75 Cleaning 186
ŠKODA Connect Website 75 Passenger seat 9
Switch services on / off 76 Pedestrian detection
Online services ŠKODA Connect functionality 170
Infotainment Columbus 151 operating conditions 170
Infotainment Swing 75 Personalisation 61
Operating Infotainment Amundsen Personalization
by language 100 attitude 62
Operating Infotainment Bolero Change user account 61
by language 81 functionality 61
Operating Infotainment Columbus Usage 61
by language 129
238 Index

Petrol 188 Regional station logo 102


Prescribed fuel 189 Restriction 102
Prescribed petrol 188 Save station to favourites from station list 102
Refilling 188 Save station to favourites from the main menu
Requirements for refuelling 188 102
standards 188 SCAN function 102
Tank capacity 189 Select station 102
Troubleshooting 189 Settings 102
Phonebox Show main menu 101
Functionality 211 Traffic programme (TP) 102
operating conditions 211 Radio - Infotainment Bolero
What you should be mindful of 211 Arrow keys 82
Pictures - Infotainment Amundsen Assign station logo 82
Supported files 108 Automatic assignment of the station logo 82
Power assisted steering 36 Automatic frequency change (AF) 82
Practical equipment 209, 210 Change from DAB station to similar FM station in
12 volt socket 202, 209, 210, 214 event of weak signal 82
230 volt socket 210, 214 Change from the DAB station to the same DAB
Ashtray 212 station 82
Blanket 212 Change to a regionally linked FM station 82
Cigarette lighter 212 DAB traffic 82
Coat hook 210 DAB transmitter in L band 82
cup holder 211 Delete favourites 82
Make up mirror 209 Delete station logo 82
Spectacles compartment 209 Display main menu 81
Storage compartment for the tablet 214 Information about the station 82
Storage compartment for the umbrella 211 List of available stations 81
Storage compartment under the front seat 210 Main menu overview 81
Storage compartments 209, 210 other DAB announcements 82
Storage pockets 210 Radio text 82
Tablet holder 213 RDS 82
Ticket holder 209 Regional station logos 82
Waste container 212 Restriction 82
Save station to favourites from station list 82
R Save station to favourites from the main menu 82
Radio SCAN function 82
see electronic version of the manual 5 Search for stations manually 82
Radio - Infotainment Amundsen Select station 82
Arrow buttons 102 Settings 82
Assign station logo 102 Traffic Radio (TP) 82
Automatic frequency control (AF) 102 Radio - Infotainment Columbus
Automatic station logo assignment 102 Arrow buttons 130
Change from DAB station to similar FM station in Assign station logo 130
event of weak signal 102 Automatic frequency control (AF) 130
Change from DAB station to the same DAB station Automatic station logo assignment 130
102 Change from DAB station to similar FM station
Change to a regionally linked FM station 102 130
DAB traffic 102 Change from DAB station to similar FM station in
DAB transmitter in L band 102 event of weak signal 130
Delete favourites 102 Change from DAB station to the same DAB station
Delete station logo 102 130
Find stations manually 102 Change to a regionally linked FM station 130
Information on the station 102 DAB traffic 130
List of available stations 101 DAB transmitter in L band 130
Main menu overview 101 Delete favourites 130
Other DAB announcements 102 Delete station logo 130
Radio text 102 Find stations manually 130
RDS 102 Information on the station 130
List of available stations 130
Index 239

Main menu overview 130 Overview 206


Other DAB announcements 130 Replace batteries 206
Radio text 130 Take out and insert 206
RDS 130 Restarting Infotainment Amundsen 98
Regional station logo 130 Restarting Infotainment Columbus 126
Restriction 130 Restarting Infotainment Swing 63
Save station to favourites from station list 130 Restarting the Infotainment Bolero 78
Save station to favourites from the main menu Reversing camera
130 functionality 180
SCAN function 130 Operating conditions 181
Select station 130 Overview 180
Settings 130 Restriction 181
Show main menu 130 Rights arising from defective performance 226
Traffic programme (TP) 130 Rigid boot cover 206
Radio - Infotainment Swing Road Sign Recognition 176
Arrow buttons 65 Functionality 176
Assign station logo 65 Restriction 177
Automatic frequency control (AF) 65 Settings 177
Change from DAB station to similar FM station in Usage 176
event of weak signal 65 Roll-up luggage compartment cover 207
Change from the DAB station to the same DAB operation 207
station 65 Settings 207
Change to a regionally linked FM station 65 Take out and insert 207
DAB traffic 65 Roof rack 215
Delete favourites 65 Attaching the carrier 215
Delete station logo 65 Roof load 215
Find stations manually 65 Safe driving 17
Information on the station 65 rSAP
List of available stations 65 Infotainment Columbus 143
Main menu overview 65
Other DAB announcements 65 S
Radio text 65 Safe driving 17
RDS 65 SAFE function
Restriction 65 Description 21
Save station to favourites from station list 65 Turn off 21
Save station to favourites from the main menu 65 Safely remove connected device
SCAN function 65 Infotainment Bolero 78
Select station 65 Infotainment Swing 62
Settings 65 Safely removing a connected device
Show main menu 65 Infotainment Amundsen 97
Sort stations in the list of available stations 65 Infotainment Columbus 125
Traffic programme (TP) 65 Safety
Rear fog light 46 after an accident 19
Rear seats Airbag 16
Folding down 34 Assistance systems 17
Rear Traffic Alert Belt webbing arrangement 16
Functionality 182 Car adaptations 14
Setting 182 Child seat 16
Rear vehicle area 8 Correct seating position 15
Rear View Camera Driving through water 17
Operation 181 Driving with a trailer 17
Refilling Emergency call 18
AdBlue 187 Engine compartment 15
Coolant 185 Exiting the vehicle 18
Diesel 189 Indicator lights 17
Engine oil 184 New brake pads 14
Petrol 188 New tyres 14
Reflective vest 202 Operating fluids 15
Removable light
240 Index

Parking 18 Ventilation 35
regular checks 14 Selector lever 161
Roof rack 17 Service event
Running in the engine 14 Interval 217
safe driving 17 Proof 217
Sensors and cameras 14 Reset information 217
Sockets 15 Show appointment 217
Spare and emergency wheel 17 Service work 217
Transporting cargo 17 Set the MENU menu
Transporting children 16 Infotainment Bolero 78
Transporting objects 17 Infotainment Columbus 125
Vehicle battery 15 Infotainment Swing 62
weather conditions 18 Setting the HOME menu
SD card Infotainment Columbus 125
Infotainment Amundsen 104 Setting the MENU menu
Infotainment Bolero 84 Infotainment Amundsen 97
Infotainment Columbus 133 Side Assist
Infotainment Swing 67 Functionality 176
see electronic version of the manual 5 operating conditions 176
SEAL tyres 196 Purpose 175
Seat Restrictions 176
Heating 35 Setting 176
Seat belts 39 Troubleshooting 176
Adjusting the height 39 Sidelights
Automatic belt retractor 39 see Parking light 46
Belt tensioners 39 ŠKODA Connect application
Blocked strap 40 Infotainment Amundsen 117
Fastening and unfastening 39 Infotainment Columbus 151
Reversible belt tensioner 39 ŠKODA Connect Application
Status display in the instrument cluster display 39 Infotainment Bolero 94
Troubleshooting 40 Infotainment Swing 75
Seat heating ŠKODA Connect online services
Operation 35 Infotainment Amundsen 117
What you should be mindful of 35 ŠKODA Connect Online services
Seat massage function 33 Infotainment Bolero 94
Seat ventilation ŠKODA Media Command application
Conditions 35 Infotainment Amundsen 109
Operation 35 Infotainment Columbus 141
Seatback Sliding/tilting sunroof
Load-through device 35 electric operation of the sun blinds 28
Seatbelts manual operation of the sun blinds 28
Correct arrangement 16 SmartLink
Seats see electronic version of the manual 5
Adjusting the headrests 34 SmartLink - Infotainment Amundsen
Adjusting the passenger seat from the rear seats Android Auto 115
32 Android Auto - Connection via USB 117
Electrical adjustment 32 Android Auto - Disconnection 117
Folding down 34 Android Auto connection conditions 116
folding passenger seat backrest 32 Android Auto limitations 116
ISOFIX 42 Apple CarPlay 115
Manual adjustment 32 Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB 117
Massage function 33 Apple CarPlay - Disconnection 117
Memory function for electrically adjustable seats Apple CarPlay connection conditions 116
33 Apple CarPlay limitations 116
Set the length of the seat manually 33 Change to another connection type 117
Sitting safely 15 Change to another device 117
Store the position of the electrically adjustable seat Functionality 115
33 General connection conditions 116
TOP TETHER 42 Main menu 115
Index 241

MirrorLink 115 Operation of the MirrorLink running application


MirrorLink - Connection via USB 117 150
MirrorLink - Disconnection 117 Restriction while driving 150
MirrorLink connection conditions 116 Route guidance restriction 157
MirrorLink limitations 116 Settings 150
Operating the running MirrorLink application 117 Show main menu 149
Restriction while driving 116 Supported connection types 148
Route guidance restriction 123 SmartLink - Infotainment Swing
Settings 117 Android Auto 73
Show main menu 115 Android Auto – connection via USB 74
Supported connection types 115 Android Auto – disconnection 74
SmartLink - Infotainment Bolero Android Auto connection conditions 73
Android Auto 92 Android Auto restrictions 74
Android Auto – connection via USB 94 Apple CarPlay 73
Android Auto – disconnection 94 Apple CarPlay – connection via USB 74
Android Auto connection conditions 93 Apple CarPlay – disconnection 74
Android Auto restrictions 94 Apple CarPlay connection conditions 73
Apple CarPlay 92 Apple CarPlay restrictions 74
Apple CarPlay – connection via USB 94 Change to another connection type 74
Apple CarPlay – disconnection 94 Change to another device 74
Apple CarPlay connection conditions 93 Display main menu 73
Apple CarPlay restrictions 94 Functionality 73
Change to another connection type 94 General connection conditions 73
Change to another device 94 Main menu 73
Display main menu 92 MirrorLink 73
Functionality 92 MirrorLink – connection via USB 74
General connection conditions 93 MirrorLink – disconnection 74
Main menu 92 MirrorLink connection conditions 73
MirrorLink 92 MirrorLink restrictions 74
MirrorLink – connection via USB 94 Operation of the MirrorLink application 74
MirrorLink – disconnection 94 Restrictions while driving 74
MirrorLink connection conditions 93 Settings 74
MirrorLink restrictions 94 supported connection types 73
Operation of the MirrorLink running application Snow chains
93 Conditions 196
Restrictions while driving 94 Usage 196
Settings 94 Sockets
supported connection types 92 12-volt socket 214
SmartLink - Infotainment Columbus 230-volt socket 214
Android Auto 149 Safety 15
Android Auto - Connection via USB 150 Sound
Android Auto - Disconnection 150 Infotainment Amundsen 97
Android Auto connection conditions 149 Infotainment Bolero 78
Android Auto restrictions 150 Infotainment Columbus 125
Apple CarPlay 149 Infotainment Swing 62
Apple CarPlay - Connection via USB 150 Spare wheel 197
Apple CarPlay - Disconnection 150 Safe driving 17
Apple CarPlay connection conditions 149 Take out and insert 197
Apple CarPlay restrictions 150 Speed limit warning 60
Change to another connection type 150 Setting 60
Change to another device 150 Speed limiter
Functionality 148 Indicator light 170
General connection conditions 149 Operation 171
Main menu 149 Troubleshooting 171
MirrorLink 149 Stabilising systems 168
MirrorLink - Connection via USB 150 START STOP 159
MirrorLink - Disconnection 150 START-STOP
MirrorLink connection conditions 149 functionality 160
MirrorLink limitations 150 indicator light 160
242 Index

Operating conditions 160 Dimensions 222


Purpose 159 Emission standard 220
Settings 160 engine specifications 222
Troubleshooting 160 maximum permitted weights 221
Starter button Telephone - Infotainment Amundsen
Notes on starting 159 Conference call 112
Stopping the engine 159 Conference calls 113
Switching the ignition on and off 159 Connection conditions 111
Troubleshooting 159 Display accepted text messages 112
Steering column lock 36 Enter phone number 112
Steering wheel Establish a connection to the voice mailbox number
Correct position 16 112
Dials/buttons 58 Import phone contacts 113
manually changing gear with the shift paddles on List of telephone contacts 112
the steering wheel 161 Main menu overview 111
Set position 36 Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts 113
Troubleshooting 36 Ringer 113
Stopping the engine Send text message 112
Starter button 159 Show main menu 111
Stopwatch Show pictures on phone contacts 113
Infotainment 61 Sort contacts in the phonebook 113
Storage 209, 210 Telephone call 112
Sun protection Update phone contacts 113
Activating sun visor operation 28 Voice mailbox number 113
electric operation of the sun blinds 28 Telephone - Infotainment Bolero
manual operation of the sun blinds 28 Conference call 91
Operation of the rear sun protection roller blind Conference calls 92
28 Connection conditions 90
Operation of the sun blinds for the rear door Display accepted text messages 91
windows 28 Display main menu 90
Operation of the sun visors 28 Enter telephone number 91
Supported media files Establish a connection to the voice mailbox number
see electronic version of the manual 5 91
Switch off front passenger airbag Import telephone contacts 92
Indicator lights 44 List of telephone contacts 91
Key switch 44 Main menu overview 90
Status display in the instrument cluster display 44 Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts 92
Switching low beam on automatically 45 Number of voice mailbox 92
System update Ringer 92
Infotainment Amundsen 98 Send text message 91
Infotainment Bolero 78 Show pictures on phone contacts 92
Infotainment Columbus 126 Sort contacts in the phonebook 92
Infotainment Swing 63 Telephone conversation 91
Update telephone contacts 92
T Telephone - Infotainment Columbus
Tablet holder Conference call 145, 146
Removing and inserting 213 Connection conditions 144
Technical specifications 213 Delete call log 146
To adjust 213 Display accepted text messages 145
Tailgate Enter phone number 145
Settings 30 Establish a connection to the voice mailbox number
Troubleshooting 30 145
Tank capacity Import phone contacts 146
Diesel 190 List of telephone contacts 145
Petrol 189 Main menu overview 144
Technical data 220 Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts
Technical specifications 146
Consumption 220 Prefer services of SIM card in external module 146
Index 243

Rename services of SIM card in external module Emergency call 18


146 Traffic jam assistant 175
Ringer 146 Functionality 175
Select device to use contacts 146 Operating conditions 175
Send text message 145 Trailer 164
Set services of telephone function in SIM card in Coupling and uncoupling 215
external module 146 Distribution of load 164
Set the functions of the text messages 146 Driving with a trailer 164
Show main menu 144 Safe driving 17
Show pictures on phone contacts 146 Swing out the tow bar and back in 215
Sort contacts in the phonebook 146 Trailer attachment
Switch on/off services of telephone function in SIM Vertical load 216
card in external module 146 Trailer coupling
Telephone call 145 indicator light 216
Update phone contacts 146 Troubleshooting 216
Voice mailbox number 146 What you should be mindful of 215
Telephone - Infotainment Swing Trailer Stability Assist 169
Connection conditions 71 Trailers
Enter phone number 72 Permissible load 164
Import phone contacts 72 Transport
List of telephone contacts 72 Transporting objects safely 17
Main menu overview 71 Transporting
Manage preset buttons for preferred contacts 72 tow hitch 215
Ringer 72 Transporting a
Show main menu 71 trailer 164
Simultaneous calls 72 Transporting the
Sort contacts in the phonebook 72 roof rack 215
Telephone call 72 TSA
Update phone contacts 72 see Trailer Stability Assist 169
Tilting/sliding sunroof Turn signal 45
Activation after disconnecting the vehicle battery Type plate 220
27 Tyre inspection display
Conditions 27 Setting 201
Operation 27 Tyre type 201
Troubleshooting 27 Tyre pressure monitor
what you should be mindful of 27 Functionality 201
Time Indicator light 200, 201
Infotainment Amundsen 97 Overview 201
Infotainment Bolero 78 Restriction 200
Infotainment Columbus 125 Saving tyre pressure values 200
Infotainment Swing 62 Troubleshooting 201
Tiptronic Tyre pressure change 200, 201
Manually changing gear with the selector lever Vehicle loading condition 201
161 Tyre pressure monitoring system 200
manually changing gear with the shift paddles on Tyres
the steering wheel 161 All-season or winter tyres 196
Tool 203 Overview of the labelling 195
Top speed 222 Pressure 200
TOP TETHER 42 Snow chains 196
Topping up Tyre pressure monitoring system 200
Windscreen washer fluid 51 What you should be mindful of 195
Tow hitch 215
Towing a trailer 164 U
Towing eye 165 Umbrella 211
Towing the vehicle Units
Tow rope 165 Infotainment Amundsen 97
Towing 165 Infotainment Bolero 78
Traffic accident Infotainment Columbus 125
Data recorder 225
244 Index

Infotainment Swing 62 DVD menu 138


Unlock Main menu 138
Setting 22 Operation 138
Unlocking Restriction 139
Central locking button 22 Settings 139
Emergency unlocking 22 Supported sources 139
functionality 21 supported video files 139
Keyless 23 what you should be mindful of 138
the boot lid 31 VIN
Updating the infotainment system see vehicle identification number 220
see electronic version of the manual 5 Virtual cockpit
USB 209, 210 see digital instrument cluster 57
see electronic version of the manual 5 Voice control - Infotainment Amundsen
USB device Conditions 100
Infotainment Amundsen 104 Functionality 100
Infotainment Bolero 84 Help 101
Infotainment Columbus 133 Operation 100
Infotainment Swing 67 Restriction 101
User account Settings 101
see electronic version of the manual 5 Voice control - Infotainment Bolero
User management Conditions 80
see electronic version of the manual 5 Functionality 80
Help 81
V Operation 81
Variable loading floor in luggage compartment Restriction 81
Set position 208 Settings 81
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment Voice control - Infotainment Columbus
Removal and insertion 208 Functionality 129
Vehicle battery 190 Help 129
Charging 190 Operating conditions 129
Checking the condition 190 Operation 129
Discharge protection 190 Restriction 129
Disconnecting and connecting 191 Settings 129
Indicator light 191 Volume when switching on the Infotainment
Safety 15 Infotainment Amundsen 97
Troubleshooting 191 Infotainment Bolero 78
Vehicle cleaning Infotainment Columbus 125
interior space 218 Infotainment Swing 62
What you should be mindful of 218 W
Vehicle condition 60, 61
Vehicle dimensions 222 Warning triangle 202
Vehicle driving mode 162 Warranty 226
Driving mode selection 163 Extended warranty 227
Eco 162 Mobility warranty 227
Individual 162 Rights arising from defective performance 226
Normal 162 Warranty for new cars 226
Offroad 162 Washers
Overview 162 Operating conditions 50
Sport 162 Waste container 212
Troubleshooting 163 Water in the fuel filter 187
Usage 162 Weight
Vehicle height 222 Maximum allowed 221
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 220 payload 221
Vehicle length 222 Wheels
Vehicle width 222 Change 197, 198
Video Cover caps for the screws 202
see electronic version of the manual 5 Full wheel covers 202
Video DVD - Infotainment Columbus Overview of tyre labelling 195
Index 245

Spare wheel and emergency wheel 197 Operation 51


Troubleshooting 196 Setting 51
Tyre pressure 200 Troubleshooting 51
Tyre pressure monitoring system 200 Winter tires
What you should be mindful of 195 Conditions 196
Wi-Fi - Infotainment Amundsen Winter tyres
Automatic WPS connection 114 Settings 196
Change password for connection to Infotainment Usage 196
hotspot 114 What you should be mindful of 196
Change the name of the Infotainment hotspot 114 Wireless network
connect a mobile device to the Infotainment see electronic version of the manual 5
hotspot 114 Wireless player
Connect Infotainment to the mobile device Infotainment Amundsen 104
hotspot 114 Infotainment Columbus 133
Function restriction 113 WLAN - Infotainment Amundsen
Functionality 113 Overview of available hotspots 113
manual connection to the hotspot 114
Quick Infotainment connection to the hotspot 114 X
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot 114 XDL + 168
Settings 114
Tips for a perfect connection 114
Wi-Fi - Infotainment Columbus
Change password for connection to Infotainment
hotspot 147
Change the name of the Infotainment hotspot 147
Connect a mobile device to the Infotainment
hotspot 147
Connect Infotainment to the mobile device
hotspot 147
Function restriction 147
Functionality 147
Manual connection to the hotspot 147
Overview of available hotspots 147
Quick Infotainment connection to the hotspot 147
Security level of the Infotainment hotspot 147
Settings 147
Tips for a perfect connection 147
Window
electrical operation 26
heating 28
Window heating
Conditions 28
Troubleshooting 29
Usage 28
Windscreen washer fluid
indicator light 51
Refill washer fluid 51
Windscreen washer system
Operation 51
Refilling 51
Windscreen washing system
Windscreen washer fluid level too low 51
Windscreen wiper and washer
Automatic rear window wiper 51
Fold away windscreen wiper arms 52
Refill windscreen washer fluid 51
Replace the windscreen wiper blade 52
Windscreen wipers and washers
Operating conditions 50

You might also like